uStore

User Guide

Version 8.0.1

Notices
2014 XMPie, A Xerox Company. All rights reserved.
U.S. Patents 6948115, 7406194, 7548338, 7757169 and pending patents.
JP Patent 4406364B and pending patents.
uStore Version 8.0 User Guide, Document Revision: 1.23, March 2014.
For information, contact XMPie Inc.
485 Lexington Avenue
10th. Floor
New York, NY 10017
More information can be found at www.xmpie.com
XMPie provides this publication "as is" without warranty of any kind, either express or implied. This publication may
contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of
this document, the publisher and author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein. Changes are periodically made to
the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. XMPie may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.
XMPie, the XMPIE logo, PersonalEffect, uChart, uCreate, uDirect, uEdit, uImage, uPlan, uProduce, uStore, StoreFlow,
TransMedia, Circle, ADOR, XLIM, RURL, eMedia Cloud, and the slogan "one to one in one" are trademarks or
registered trademarks of XMPie, A Xerox Company, and may not be used without permission. No part of these
materials may be used or reproduced in any form, or by any means, without the express written consent of XMPie. To
request permission to use these materials, please contact marketing@xmpie.com.
XEROX and XEROX FreeFlow, FreeFlow Output Manager and FreeFlow Process Manager are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Dreamweaver, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe Photoshop and Adobe After Effects
are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008, SQL Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows
Server 2008, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Microsoft Office, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft
Access are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
ComponentArt is a trademark of ComponentArt Inc.
Other trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners.

Contents

Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Concepts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
uStore Back Office Application Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Before Creating an Online Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Logging in to a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
uStore Storefront Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Purchasing with uStore Storefront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Common Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Composite Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reviewing Your Order Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Managing Draft Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Managing Your Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Viewing Orders History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Updating Your Personal Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Updating Your Billing and Shipping Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing Recipient Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 3: Getting Started with uStore Back Office. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Logging in to uStore Back Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
uStore Back Office Application - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Creating a Clearing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

iii

Contents

PayPal Web Site Payment Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Moneris Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
PayPal Payflow Pro Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AuthorizeNET Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MultiSafepay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Cost Center Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Purchase Order Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Coupons Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Adding a New Coupon Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Managing the Existing Coupon Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Currency Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Defining Data Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting Up Delivery Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting Up an Account for the FedEx Delivery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting Up an Account for the UPS Delivery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting Up Document Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setting Up Info File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting Up HTTP Web Handler Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting Up Global Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting Up Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Managing Manufacturers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Localizing the Static Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Adding a Language to uStore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing the uStore Welcome Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Localizing System Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Exporting and Importing Localizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using the Proxy Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

iv

Contents

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Setting Up the Country Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting Up the Culture List Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Setting Up the Delivery Package Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Setting Up the Delivery Provider Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting Up the Delivery Services Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting Up the Global Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting Up the Global Configurations Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Setting Up JDF Node Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Setting Up JDF Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting Up the Mall Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Setting Up the Message Template Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Setting Up the Message Template SQL Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting Up the Order Handling Action Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting Up the Order Handling Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setting Up the Paper Size Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting Up Prepress Workflow Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Creating Prepress Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Setting Up the Province Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Transforming a Recipient List to XSLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setting Up the Report Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Setting Up the Report Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Up the USADATA Account Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting Up the Tax Group Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setting Up the Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setting Up Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Selecting the Appropriate Email Send Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Selecting the Appropriate State Transition Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Exporting Order Information as XML or cXML (Order Details XML Action). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Setting Up User Details Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring User Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Contents

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Setting Up General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting Up the Store Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting Up the External ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Setting Up Search Engine Optimization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Enabling Store-Friendly URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Managing Storefront Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Offering Customers to Receive Email Promotions (Opt-In) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting Up uProduce Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Determining the Store Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Selecting the Store Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Defining Home Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Defining the Product List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Adding a Header and a Footer to the Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Defining the Store Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Text Insertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Merchant Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Up the Store Clearing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting Up Delivery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting Up Delivery Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting Up Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Automatic User Assignment to Stores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Automatic User Assignment to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Password Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Groups with permissions to this store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Saving your Store Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

vi

Contents

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Designing a New Receipt Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Previewing a Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Restoring the Default Receipt Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adding a Chat Button to Your Store Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
On Google Analytics: Setting Up the Stores Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
In the uStore Back Office: Adding the Google Analytics Code to the Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Viewing Google Analytics Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Adding Custom JavaScript to Your Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Previewing a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Previewing the Store As Another User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Duplicating a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Localizing a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Product Profiles: Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Creating Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting Up Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Setting Up Customer Input Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Validation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Setting Up Pricing with the Pricing Calculator Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Set Prices Using the Excel Pricing Engine Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Enabling Currency Code Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Setting Up Prepress Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Linking a Product to a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

vii

Contents

Linking New Products to a Product Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Linking Existing Products to a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Unlinking Products to Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Overriding Product Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Differentiating Between Hidden and Deactivated Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Duplicating Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Deleting Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Editing a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Viewing Products Linked to a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

uStore Products: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Working with Static Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Working with Dynamic Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Working with Composite Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Adding Products to your Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Managing Product Groups and Group Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Adding Products to the Product Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Setting Up Your Products: Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Managing your Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Users Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Adding a New User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Importing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Downloading Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Deleting Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Adding Users to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Changing Store Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

viii

Contents

User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

User Groups Main Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Adding a New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Assigning Users to the User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Assigning Permissions to the User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Chapter 9: Making your Store Available Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Chapter 10: Handling Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Managing Print Product Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Print Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Managing Email Product Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Viewing Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Viewing Ordered Items Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Chapter 11: Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Predefined Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Defining your Own Reports Using SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Appendix A: Input Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism . . . . . . 457
Creating a New Message Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Creating a New Message Template SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
SQL Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Sample of the XML Data Retrieved from Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding Localized Message Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Localizing a Message Template Using the Localization Option in the Presets View. . . . . . . . . . . 464
Localizing a Message Template Using System Setup Option in the Presets View . . . . . . . . . . . 468

ix

Contents

Creating a New Message Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Configuring the Email Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Testing the Message Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Appendix C: Managing the Order Lists View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

<Master> Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
<Fields> Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
<GroupBys> Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
<Details> Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate . . . . . . 476

SSL Certificate Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
When do I need a Multi Domain SSL Certificate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
SSL Certificate Creation and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Windows Server 2008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Opening an Ogone Test Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Opening a MultiSafepay Test Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Opening a MultiSafepay Merchant Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Creating a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Contents

Appendix H: Creating a Preview Campaign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Adding Composite Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Product Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Static and Dynamic Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Upload Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Adding Composite Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Product Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Composite Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Setting up Composite Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Composite Components Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Composite Product Properties Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Ordering a Composite Product from the uStore Storefront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Adding Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Designing a Property Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Creating Property Option Icons for Gallery List/Gallery Grid View Input Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Creating Property Option Overlay Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Creating a Dependency Between Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Adding a Property Display to the Composite Preview Campaign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs. . . . . . . . . 536

Adapting Cross-Media Campaigns for uStore Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Setting Up uStore Products to Include a Personalized URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Example: Using Dials in Personalized URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Managing Ports in uProduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Generating Marketing Console Reports for Cross Media Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Pre-requisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

xi

Contents

Generating Marketing Console Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Appendix K: Creating a Facebook App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

xii

List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure 1:

Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 2:

Welcome Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Figure 3:

Buying with uStore Storefront - Common Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Figure 4:

Products Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Figure 5:

Product Details Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 6:

Example Product Customization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 7:

Example Textbox Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 8:

Example RTF Textbox Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 9:

Example Dropdown List Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 10:

Example Product Customization Page Image Customization Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 11:

Example Product Customization Page Image Customization Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 12:

Instant Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 13:

Example uEdit HD, Advanced Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 14:

Upload your Recipient List Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 15:

Recipient List Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Figure 16:

Recipient List Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Figure 17:

Uploaded Recipient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Figure 18:

Finalize Your Order Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 19:

Shopping Cart Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Figure 20:

Checkout - Order Summary Page, Order Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Figure 21:

Checkout - Order Summary page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 22:

Products Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 23:

Composite Product - Document Builder Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Figure 24:

Ordering Composite Product - Component Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Figure 25:

Ordering Composite Product - Document Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 26:

Ordering Composite Product - Upload documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

xiii

List of Figures

Figure 27:

Ordering Composite Product - Document Builder Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Figure 28:

Preflight dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 29:

Preflight dialog box with details about missing fonts and images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 30:

Preflight: Print Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Figure 31:

Finalize Your Order Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Figure 32:

Order Submitted Successfully Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 33:

Customer Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 34:

Manage Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 35:

Manage Account Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Figure 36:

Order History Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Figure 37:

Example Order Details Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Figure 38:

Personal Information Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Figure 39:

Addresses Information Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 40:

Billing/Shipping Address Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 41:

Recipient List Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 42:

uStore Back Office Site Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 43:

Presets View: Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Figure 44:

Presets View with links to Xerox FreeFlow Core and to uProduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Figure 45:

Clearing Model Editor Main Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Figure 46:

PayPal Website Payment Standard Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Figure 47:

Moneris Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Figure 48:

New Clearing Model Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Figure 49:

Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 50:

AuthorizeNET Clearing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Figure 51:

MultiSafepay Clearing Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Figure 52:

Cost Center Clearing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 53:

Purchase Order Clearing Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Figure 54:

Coupons List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 55:

Coupons Batch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

xiv

List of Figures

Figure 56:

Coupons Batch Setup Page Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Figure 57:

File Download Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Figure 58:

Coupon Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Figure 59:

List of Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Figure 60:

Currency Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Figure 61:

Data Source List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Figure 62:

New Data Source Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Figure 63:

Delivery Provider List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Figure 64:

FedEx Account List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Figure 65:

FedEx Account - Account Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 66:

FedEx Account Setup - Acquiring a Meter Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 67:

UPS Account List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Figure 68:

UPS Account - Account Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Figure 69:

Document Repositories Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Figure 70:

Global Product Properties List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Figure 71:

New Global Product Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Figure 72:

Take Values from Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 73:

Take Values from Data Source - Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Figure 74:

Manufacturer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 75:

Add New Manufacturer page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 76:

Manufacturer products window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Figure 77:

Manufacturer Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Figure 78:

Localization Table, Culture List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Figure 79:

Admin Cultures Setting Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Figure 80:

Culture Sections, Select New Language Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 81:

Edit Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 82:

Culture Edit: English en-US Resources page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 83:

Culture Sections, Table List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 84:

Culture Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

xv

List of Figures

Figure 85:

Email Template Table, Culture Edit Page - Edit More Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Figure 86:

Culture Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 87:

Culture Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 88:

Proxy Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Figure 89:

uProduce Proxy VB Script File Security Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 90:

Internet Explorer - Security Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 91:

uProduce Proxy Update Confirmation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 92:

Presets View - System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 93:

Example Table Page - Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Figure 94:

Country Table - New/Edit Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Figure 95:

System Setup - Culture List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Figure 96:

Culture Table - Edit Culture Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Figure 97:

Culture Table - Edit Culture Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 98:

Culture List Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Figure 99:

Culture List Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Figure 100: Delivery Packages List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 101: Delivery Packages - Add New Package Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 102: Delivery Providers List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 103:

Delivery Provider Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Figure 104: Delivery Services List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Figure 105: Delivery Services - Add New Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 106: Global Address Table - New/Edit Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 107: Global Configurations Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 108: Global Configurations - Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 109: Global Configurations - Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 110: Global Configurations - Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 111: Assigning a JDF node set to a property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 112: JDF Node Set page with default JDF node sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 113: JDF Node page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

xvi

List of Figures

Figure 114: Mall Table - Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Figure 115: Message Template Table - New/Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 116: Message Template Localization, Edit Page for a Selected Message Template. . . . . . . . 144
Figure 117: Message Template SQL Table - New/Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 118: Order Handling Action Table - New/Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 119: Order Handling Status Table - New/Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 120: Paper Size List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 121: Paper Size- Add New Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 122: Presets menu with links to Xerox FreeFlow workflow providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 123: Prepress Workflow Provider page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 124: Add new Prepress Workflow Provider page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 125: Prepress Workflow page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 126: Prepress Workflow setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 127: Province Table - New/Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 128: Recipient List Transformation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 129: Reports List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 130: Reports Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 131: Reports Page Edit Localized Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 132: Reports Localization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 133: Reports Localization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 134: Reports Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 135: Reports Parameters Page Parameter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 136: Reports Parameters Page Parameter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 137: Report Parameter Localization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 138: Reports Parameter Localization Page Report Parameter Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 139: USADATA Account Table Gateway Entry URL, Order Details URL, Order
Placement URL, Order Status URL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 140: Tax Group Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 141: Taxes List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

xvii

List of Figures

Figure 142: Tax Table - New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 143: Trigger List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 144: Trigger Setup, New Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 145: Trigger Setup, Exporting Order Information as XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 146: Presets User Fields List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 147: Store List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 148: Store Setup Page General Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 149: Store Setup - SEO: Customize Meta Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 150: Upload Terms and Conditions HTML Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 151: Uploaded Terms and Conditions HTML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 152: Facebook Login option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 153: Store Sign In page with Facebook Login button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 154: LDAP Configuration steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 155: Configure LDAP Connection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 156: LDAP Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 157: Default LDAP Users Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 158: Sign in to uStore with LDAP credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 159: Set by default list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 160: Personal Information page - Opt-In checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 161: Registration Page: Opt-In checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 162: Customer Opt-In Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 163: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Store Skin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 164: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Store Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 165: uStore Storefront Product Search Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 166: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 167: uStore Storefront: Welcome Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 168: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Product List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 169: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Product List Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 170: The Sequence column in the list of store products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

xviii

List of Figures

Figure 171: uStore Storefront - Allowing Paging in Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 172: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Header & Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 173: uStore Storefront: Custom Header and Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 174: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Localization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 175: uStore Storefront: Selecting the Store Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 176: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab : Text Insertions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 177: uStore Storefront: Example Text Insertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 178: Merchant Info section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 179: Merchant Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 180: Merchant Info Filled In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 181: Store Setup Page Store Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 182: Store Setup Page - Delivery Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 183: Upload Address List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 184: Store Setup Page Delivery Services tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 185: Store Setup Page: Permissions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 186: Checkout - Order Summary Page, Order Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 187: Billing Information pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 188: Store Setup Page: Advanced tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 189: Context Sensitive Help Edit window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 190: Store Setup Page Saving Your Store Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 191: Store List Page with New Store Listed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 192: Store Setup Page Take Offline Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 193: Order Approval Process button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 194: Order Approval Page - No Approval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 195: Order Approval page - Clearing Options Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 196: Order Approval Page - Approval Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 197: Order Approval - Approval Process per User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 198: Receipt Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 199: Receipt Setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

xix

List of Figures

Figure 200: Receipt Template: Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Figure 201: Receipt Template: Insert Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 202: Save Receipt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 203: Receipt Template Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 204: Save Receipt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 205: LivePerson implementation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 206: Get HTML Tags with sample codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 207: Adding the LivePerson code to uStore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 208: A stores homepage with a chat button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 209: Google Analytics implementation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 210: Google Analytics: Creating a Google Analytics account for your store . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 211: Google Analytics code snippet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 212: Adding Google Analytics code to the store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 213: Google Analytics Real-Time reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 214: Adding Custom JavaScript to Your Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 215: Preview store as another user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 216: Store List Page with a Duplicated Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 217: Store Setup Page: Advanced tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 218: Culture Sections Page for the Store Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 219: uStore workflow using Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 220: Creating Product Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 221: Setting up a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 222: Product Properties page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 223: Product Properties Add Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 224: Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 225: Multiline Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 226: Rich Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 227: uStore Storefront: Rich Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 228: Date Time Picker Input Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

xx

List of Figures

Figure 229: HTML Generic Input Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 230: Dropdown List Input Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 231: Radio Button List Input Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 232: Popup Image Selector Input Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 233: (Popup) Image Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 234: Setting Up the Extended Image Popup Selector Control Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 235: Extended Image Selector: Library View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 236: Extended Image Selector: Slider View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 237: Gallery Image Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 238: Gallery Image Selector: Storefront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 239: Gallery Image Selector: Editing Uploaded Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 240: Get Order Properties Control Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 241: Checkbox Control Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 242: Gallery List View Input Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 243: Gallery List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 244: Gallery Grid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 245: uStore Storefront: Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 246: Email Product Properties Schedule Email Sending Time Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 247: uStore Storefront Schedule Email Sending Time Product Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 248: Selecting Pricing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 249: Set Price Steps tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 250: Set Price Steps: Pack definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 251: Edit Pack Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 252: Edit Pack Name: Add New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 253: uStore Storefront: Price Review Section (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 254: Set Prices tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 255: uStore Storefront: Shopping Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 256: Set Cost Steps tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 257: Set Costs tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

xxi

List of Figures

Figure 258: Excel Pricing - Info Tab for Static, Dynamic, Email and Composite Products . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 259: Excel Pricing - Info Tab for Upload Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 260: Sample of property price with options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 261: Add workflows dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 262: Prepress Setup page with workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 263: Edit Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 264: Link icon indicates that product is linked to a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 265: Product Properties page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 266: Property Visibility options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 267: Product Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 268: Product Dependency List: Viewing products linked to a profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 269: Store Details Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 270: Product Groups List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 271: Manage Groups SEO: Customize Meta Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 272: Manage Group Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 273: Store Details Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 274: New Product Type (Storefront Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 275: Product Setup Page: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 276: uStore Storefront Products Name and Catalog Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 277: Product Setup Page: Product Information in Storefront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 278: uStore Storefront Product Description and Minimum Price Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 279: uStore Storefront: Full Product Description in Product Details Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 280: uStore Storefront Product Search Bar and Defined Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 281: Product Setup Page: Document Template (Dynamic Document) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 282: Product Setup Page: Select thumbnail from a recent job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 283: Product Setup Page: Thumbnail preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 284: Product Setup Page: Upload thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 285: Product Setup Page: Upload thumbnail dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 286: Product Setup Page: Uploaded thumbnails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

xxii

List of Figures

Figure 287: Product Setup Page: Uploaded thumbnails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Figure 288: uStore Storefront: Downloading Product Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 289: Product Setup Page: Document Template (Static Document). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 290: uStore Storefront: Static Product View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 291: Product Setup Page: Email Template (Email Document) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 292: Product Setup Page: Document (Upload Product). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 293: Product Setup Page: Document (Composite Product) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Figure 294: Product Setup Page: Cross Media Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 295: Product Setup: Proof (Dynamic Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 296: Product Setup Page: Include in Product Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 297: Product Pricing and Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 298: Product Setup: Advanced Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 299: Add manufacturer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 300: Product Setup: SEO: Customize Meta Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 301: Product Setup Page: Saving Your Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 302: Product Setup Main Page (sample) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 303: Composite Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 304: Composite Components: Add Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 305: Composite Components: Added Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 306: Composite Components: Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 307: Step Details Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 308: Customization Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 309: Dial Details Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 310: uEdit Help Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 311: uEdit Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 312: Recipients Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 313: Upload Recipient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 314: uStore Storefront: Upload your Recipient List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 315: uStore Storefront Recipient List Mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

xxiii

List of Figures

Figure 316: uStore Storefront: Upload your Recipient List, Select Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 317: uStore Storefront: Recipient List Editor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 318: uStore Storefront Add New Records Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 319: Recipient List Setup: Select Recipient from Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 320: uStore Storefront: Select Recipient from Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 321: uStore Storefront USADATA Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 322: Recipient List Setup: User a previously uploaded List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 323: uStore Storefront Use a previously uploaded list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 324: Recipient Setup: Data Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 325: Recipient Setup: Data Base, Selecting the Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 326: uStore Storefront: Selecting Data Base as the Source for a Recipient List . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 327: uStore Composite Product Order: Document Builder Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 328: uStore Composite Product Order: Recipients List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 329: Delivery Setup>General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 330: Delivery Setup>Pricing tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 331: Enabling Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 332: Products with inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 333: Edit Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 334: Editing the Product Setup: Local Cache Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 335: Copy Product to another Store Select Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 336: Copy Product to another Store Select Product Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 337: Copy Product to another Store Select Product Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 338: Duplicate Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 339: Searching Users List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 340: Create New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Figure 341: User Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Figure 342: User Setup Page Add to Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Figure 343: Import User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Figure 344: Adding Users to Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

xxiv

List of Figures

Figure 345: Changing Store Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Figure 346: uStore Back Office User Groups Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Figure 347: uStore Back Office User Groups Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 348: uStore Back Office New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 349: uStore Back Office New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Figure 350: uStore Back Office User Group Setup Users tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 351: uStore Back Office User Group Setup Users tab Import User List . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Figure 352: uStore Back Office Assigning Users to the User Group Users tab Add
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 353: Changing Store Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Figure 354: uStore Back Office Add New User Group Permissions tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Figure 355: uStore Back Office Add New User Group Permissions tabs Manage
Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Figure 356: uStore Back Office Permissions tabs Add Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Figure 357: uStore Back Office Permissions tabs Added Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Figure 358: Orders View: Orders List Page, Grouped by Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figure 359: Ordered Item Queues and Actions Print Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Figure 360: Orders List, Grouped Items Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Figure 361: Select Workflow dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Figure 362: Managing Shipping Items in the Ready for Delivery Queue.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Figure 363: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (Manual Shipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Figure 364: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (FedEx Shipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Figure 365: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (UPS Shipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Figure 366: UPS: Add New Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Figure 367: Ordered Item Queues and Actions Email Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Figure 368: Order Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 369: Customer Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Figure 370: Ordered Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Figure 371: Example Report: Customer Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

xxv

List of Figures

Figure 372: Filtered and Parameterized Report: Order Totals, Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Figure 373: Culture Sections, Table List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Figure 374: Culture Edit Page, Message Template Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 375: Email Template Table, Culture Edit Page: Edit More Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Figure 376: Message Template Localization, Edit Page for a Selected Message Template. . . . . . . . 468
Figure 377: PayPal Sign Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Figure 378: PayPal Get Started for Business Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Figure 379: PayPal: Select Payment Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Figure 380: PayPal: Sign Up for a Business Account Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Figure 381: PayPal: Business Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Figure 382: PayPal: Business Owner Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Figure 383: PayPal: Business Account Signup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Figure 384: PayPal: Activate Your Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Figure 385: PayPal: Enter Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Figure 386: PayPal: My Account Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Figure 387: PayPal: Link Your Bank Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Figure 388: PayPal: Confirm Your Bank Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Figure 389: PayPal: Confirm your bank account in 2-3 days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Figure 390: PayPal: My Account Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Figure 391: PayPal: Confirm your bank deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Figure 392: PayPal: Payment Receiving Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Figure 393: PayPal: Payment Notifications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Figure 394: PayPal: Website Payment Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Figure 395: PayPal: Website Payment Preferences: Identity Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Figure 396: PayPal: Custom Payment Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Figure 397: PayPal: Edit Custom Payment Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Figure 398: PayPal: API Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Figure 399: PayPal: Manage Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 400: Ogone: Choose Country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

xxvi

List of Figures

Figure 401: Ogone: Create free Test account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Figure 402: Ogone: Registration as a new merchant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Figure 403: Ogone: Premier subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Figure 404: Ogone: Global Transaction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 405: Ogone: Global Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 406: Ogone: Payment Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 407: Ogone: Data and Origin Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 408: Ogone: Transaction feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Figure 409: Ogone: Test Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Figure 410: Ogone: Users Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 411: MultiSafepay: Create a test account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 412: MultiSafepay: Merchant Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Figure 413: MultiSafepay: Create Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Figure 414: Page where the end-user builds a Composite Product on the storefront . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 415: Selected Perforation Property Icon in Storefront. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Figure 416: Property Option Icons: Gallery Grid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Figure 417: Property Option Overlay Images: Spiral_Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 418: Binding Type: Spiral Option selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 419: Columns for Property Name in Excel Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 420: Property Image in InDesign Document: Perforation Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 421: Property Display: uStore Preview Perforation-Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 422: uProduce: Selecting Port as a Recipient Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 423: uProduce: Activating Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 424: Product Setup Page: Cross Media Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Figure 425: Marketing Console: Print Response Rate (KPI) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Figure 426: Marketing Console - Print Response KPI Report Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Figure 427: Marketing Console: Email Opened but Not Landed Population Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Figure 428: Marketing Console: Email Opened but Not Landed Population Report Result . . . . . . . . 544
Figure 429: Create A New App window on the Facebook developers' site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

xxvii

List of Figures

Figure 430: Dashboard page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Figure 431: Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Figure 432: Website area in Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

xxviii

Chapter

Introduction to uStore
XMPie uStore allows print service providers (PSP), creative agencies, and
corporate marketing departments to quickly build e-commerceenabled
stores for ordering everything from personalized documents to email
programs and customized point-of-purchase materials. uStore makes it
simple to set up branded, Web-to-Print applications without involving
programmers. It allows users to tailor the pricing, preferences, permissions,
design customization, and print parameters to fit each customer.
You can set up as many online stores as you like. Each store can have its own
branding, its own Web pages, and its own customized document ordering
process - to best match the specific needs of the users that will access it. An
intuitive and flexible administrative tool provides an easy-to-use wizard that
helps set up and define each Web store. Your customers or users will then be
able to access their dedicated online stores, upload recipient lists for each
print job, customize the document, place an order, set shipping options, and
process payment.
For example, a national travel agency can use uStore to set up an online portal
for its regional agents, offering the agents the ability to send out a
personalized postcard Campaign to local clients. The agency will first prepare
the postcard design template and Campaign personalization business rules
using any of XMPie Variable Data Publishing products. The agency can then
use uStore to create a corporate store, based on these materials. Regional
agents will then be able to access the corporate online store and select the
desired postcard template. They can then upload their own regional recipient
lists, customize the postcard design to the degree of customization specified
by the administrator who set up the store (for example, upload a graphic
image of a new trip destination to replace the one in the original template or
change a text title), and then place the order for print. The resulting
deliverables are on demand, regionally customized, and recipient targeted,
marketing materials.
uStore is an add-on product that seamlessly integrates with all of XMPies
Variable Data Publishing (VDP) products: uDirect Professional, uProduce
and uPlan.

Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore 2

Concepts and Terminology

uStore consists of two applications, one used by the stores customers and the
other used by the stores administrators:

uStore Storefront allows customers (typically agents or print buyers) to

shop for documents in online stores created by uStore administrators.

uStore Back Office allows administrators (typically representatives of the

printer) to set up and manage online stores, define and manage the
stores users, and handle the orders received from the uStore Storefront
application. This guide contains a description of the uStore Back Office
application.

Concepts and Terminology

The following concepts and terms are used throughout this guide.
ADOR Objects: based on Automatic Dynamic Object Replacement (ADOR)
technology, these are database and rule-driven objects that enable you to
visually present personalized recipient data in your design layout. For
example, you can define the customers first name as an ADOR Object. When
you insert this object into a document, you can generate a separate instance of
the document for each customer, with a personalized message that lists the
customers first name. Within the XMPie environment, ADOR Objects are
sometimes referred to as Content Objects.
Administrator (also Store Administrator): an individual (typically a
representative of the printer) who uses the uStore Back Office application to
setup and manage online stores, define and manage the stores users, and
handle the orders received from uStore Storefront application. The
Administrator belongs to the Administrator User Group and inherits its
permissions from there.
Assets: in the context of PersonalEffect, the term Assets refers to dynamic
content (such as graphic files and text files), which are used as the values of
ADOR Objects, and thus vary from recipient to recipient (as opposed to
Resources, which are static content). For example, a personalized vacation
offer may include a Graphic ADOR, whose value changes dynamically to a
tropical island, a ski resort, a yacht, or a golf course, depending on each
recipients vacation preferences.
Asset Source: in the uProduce environment, refers to a collection of
Campaign Assets and its location.
Composite Product : one or more components combined together as a single
document. The components can be Static Documents, Dynamic Documents or
an Upload Product.

Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore 3

Concepts and Terminology

Customer: an individual (typically an agent, or a print buyer in a secured

store and a casual visitor in a public store), who uses the uStore Storefront
application to shop for products in online stores created by uStore
Administrators. Customers are usually assigned to Registered Customers
User Group.
Customization: a process supported by Dynamic Documents, which reflects
the customers input. Customization is performed on Dials (see below).
Customers can manually specify fixed values for these Dials; the specified
values are common to all Dynamic Document instances. For example, a
customer may customize a dynamic newsletter by specifying the logo and
contact details to be displayed on all newsletter copies, regardless of their
recipients.
Dial: an ADOR Object or a Variable included in a Dynamic Document and
previously marked either in uDirect Rule Editor or in uPlan as a Campaign
Dial, thereby making it available for modification via uStore. The uStore
Back Office application enables administrators to choose which available
Dials are to be accessible via the uStore Storefront application, so that
customers can customize their values.
Document: the file created for use as a basis for print or online customer
communication. You create this Document using tools such as Adobe
InDesign or Adobe Dreamweaver. A Document may also be referred to as the
design layout. uStore supports two types of Documents: Dynamic
Documents and Static Documents.
Dynamic Document: a document that has ADOR Objects assigned to design
objects, turning them from static to dynamic, thus enabling their value - text,
graphic, etc. - to be changed as a function of the data and rules. In the uStore
context, Dynamic Documents are documents that can be modified by
customers, using personalization, customization or both. There are three types
of Dynamic Documents in uStore:
Dynamic InDesign Document: a document that can be modified by
customers, using personalization, customization or both.
Dynamic XLIM Document: a document that can be personalized and
customized online using uEdit.
Dynamic Email Document: an Email document that can be personalized,
customized and scheduled. An Email document is part of the Email Blast
Campaign.

Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore 4

Concepts and Terminology

Dynamic Publishing: a discipline of Publishing that aims to produce any

customizable document, in any media, on-demand. Dynamic Publishing
extends Variable Data Printing (VDP) into digital print and electronic media,
focusing not only on final output media but also on creating documents with
dynamic content, from Design to Production.
Mall: the set of all stores configured in uStore.
Operator: an individual (typically a representative of the printer) who uses
the uStore Back Office application to handle the orders received from uStore
Storefront application. The Operator belongs to the Operator User Group and
inherits its permissions from there.
Personalization: a process supported by Dynamic Documents, which reflects
the recipients data. Personalization is performed on ADOR Objects and
Variables that are included in the Dynamic Document, but are not made
available to the uStore Storefront in the Customization process. These
dynamic objects are automatically populated with recipient-specific values,
which are unique to each Dynamic Document instance. For example, a
customer may personalize a dynamic newsletter by uploading a Recipient
List that contains the first and last name, address, and email for each
recipient.
Plan: a file containing the Campaign business logic that dictates how the
ADOR Objects are evaluated at production time. The Plan file also contains
the structure of the database schema you are using and the ADOR Objects
defined for use in your Campaign layout(s). Internal Plan variables, SQL
queries, and the QLingo language allow the Plan programmer to express
sophisticated business logic.
Product: in the context of this guide, the term Product refers to Static or
Dynamic Documents, which can be sold at online stores. However, the uStore
solution may be adapted so that you can sell other types of products (for
example, printed T-shirts).
Product Profile: Product Profiles contain a set of product properties that you
can apply to several products. When you link products to Product Profiles,
you can easily edit product properties and make global changes without the
need to open each product separately. All your changes are automatically
applied to all products that are linked to the Product Profile.
Proof Set: a file that includes a consistent set of values for each recipient,
where this set includes actual values calculated for each of the rule-driven
ADOR Objects defined for the Campaign.

Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore 5

uStore Back Office Application Workflow

Recipient: the end-consumer or person who receives an individual instance

of the Document purchased on the online store. If the Document is static, all
recipients receive identical instances. If the Document is dynamic, each
recipient may receive a unique instance of the Document, which has been
customized by the customer who ordered this Product, and personalized
based on this recipients specific data.
Static Document: a document that does not include Dials and cannot be
personalized or customized. All recipients of a Static Document get identical
instances of the Document.
Store: a virtual shop that has been set up using the uStore Back Office
application, and is available to customers via the uStore Storefront
application.
Restricted Store (B2B): a standard, secured online store created in uStore.
This store requires registration in order to be able to browse the store
products. A restricted store is available for registered users only.
Public Store (B2C): a public online store created in uStore that allows
anonymous users to browse the store but requires registration for
checking out orders.
Superuser: a user that is assigned to the Superuser User Group and has full
read/write permissions to all uStore Presets. A superuser can access all views
and configure all entities in the uStore system.
Variable: an internal object of the Plan, which can be assigned values of
expressions (QLingo, SQL, etc.). A Variable can also be used as input for
expressions that compute values of ADOR Objects. Variables allow for
avoiding repeat computations or data retrievals, as well as improved
readability of the Plan, for later revisions, etc.
Upload Product : a set of definitions used as a base for uploaded files,
enabling end-users to upload their own documents, and print using the
uStore store owner (print shop).

uStore Back Office Application Workflow

This guide focuses on the procedures performed in the uStore Back Office
application. These procedures are used to create and manage online stores
that service customers.
The administrators workflow includes the following procedures:
1.

Setting up uStore Global Configuration: Managing uStore Presets.

2.

Setting up a store: Setting Up a Store.

Chapter 1: Introduction to uStore 6

Before Creating an Online Store

3.

Creating Product Profiles: Working with Product Profiles.

4.

Adding products to your store, and defining them: Setting Up Products.

5.

Creating users: Setting up Users and User Groups.

6.

Making your store available online: Making your Store Available Online.

7.

Handling orders: Handling Orders.

8.

Generating reports: Generating Reports.

Before Creating an Online Store

Before creating an online store, the uProduce Server must be prepared as
follows:
1.

Your complete Campaign must be available on either the uProduce

Server or on the uDirect machine. For information on creating
Campaigns, please refer to the PersonalEffect documentation.
This Campaign must be uStore-friendly:

2.

The ADOR Objects and Variables you wish to make available to the
administrator (who, in turn, can make them available for
customization in the Customer application) must be marked as
Campaign Dials.
A Local Asset Source must be available for each Graphic ADOR you
marked as a Campaign Dial.

For each Document (that is, product) you must perform at least one
proof job and one production job, each consisting of at least one record.
For more details, see Adding Products to the Product Groups.

Chapter

uStore Storefront Quick Start

Guide
Overview
uStore Storefront is an online store created using the XMPie uStore
application, a self-contained Web-to-Print application for variable and static
documents.
With uStore Storefront you can order personalized and customized
documents online. Each store is uniquely branded for multiple internal or
external customers. The store features tailor-made pricing, preferences,
permissions, design customization and print parameters to suit each
customer.
Customers or users are able to access their dedicated online stores, upload
recipient lists for each print job, customize the document, place an order, set
shipping options, and process payment.
This chapter will help you get started with uStore Storefront Application, by
guiding you through the basic steps required to make purchases and manage
your orders in uStore.
Note: This guide focuses on the minimal operations required to make and
manage your orders in uStore.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 8

Getting Started

Getting Started
Logging in to a Store
Note: You can log into the uStore Storefront application using Internet
Explorer 8/9 and the latest versions of Firefox and Google Chrome. You can
also browse to uStore Storefront from your mobile device if the store skin
has been adapted for mobile use (For more information on adding mobile
skins, see Selecting the Store Skin).

If you are browsing a secured store:

1.

Go to a Storefront URL of the following form: http://<uStore Server

address>/uStore (for example, http://www.myDomain.com/Folder)
Figure 1: Login Page

2.

In the Login page, enter your Email and Password in order to sign in.
Select Remember my Email if you want uStore to remember your email
address the next time you log in.
If you forgot your password, click Forgot your password? and you will be
sent an e-mail message allowing you to reset your password.
Note: uStore administrators can enable store visitors to log in using their
Facebook credentials.

3.
4.

Click Sign In.

If you are an unregistered customer and the store enables registration, the

Create an account link will be displayed in the New to our store? section of

the window. Click this link to create your private account.

If you are browsing a public store, you do not have to log in to store in order
to browse, but you will have to sign in order to check out your orders.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 9

Getting Started

uStore Storefront Main Page

When you first log into a store, you are presented with the Welcome page.
Figure 2: Welcome Page

Here you can select a product group from the Product Groups list or search
for a specific product by entering a keyword in the Search Box and clicking
Go.
A default language flag and a currency symbol appear in the top right corner.
You can click the arrow to select a different setting.
The Personalized Welcome message can be changed (see Changing the uStore
Welcome Message).
The Toolbar is available on all pages and allows you to perform common
tasks:

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 10

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

Click

To
Open the uStore Storefront Home page, which is the Welcome page
(Figure 2).
Manage your account details. See Managing Your Account on
page 37.
View your shopping cart contents. See Step 6: Viewing Your Shopping
Cart.

Drafts

Manage your non-completed orders that were saved as drafts. See

Managing Draft Orders.

Sign Out

Sign out from your account.

Help

Open the uStore Storefront User Guide.

Note: For information on setting up store appearance in uStore Back Office,

see Determining the Store Appearance.

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

uStore Storefront provides customers with the ability to conveniently connect
to an online store, customize the desired products and place their orders.
uStore Storefront supports the following product types:

Static Document - a document that cannot be personalized or

customized. All recipients of a static document get identical instances of
the document.

Dynamic InDesign Document - a document that can be modified by

customers, using personalization, customization or both.

Dynamic XLIM Document - a document that can be personalized and

customized online using uEdit HD, an online document editing
application. For more information about uEdit HD, see the uEdit HD User
Guide.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 11

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

Dynamic Email Document an Email document that can be

personalized, customized and scheduled. An Email document is part of
the Email Blast Campaign.

Composite Product - a product that includes one or more components

combined together as a single document. The components can be Static
Documents, Dynamic Documents or documents uploaded by the
Storefront user.

There are differences in the customers shopping experience when ordering

Dynamic, Static and Email Documents (see Common Flow below) and when
ordering Composite Products (see Composite Flow).
Note: If you are browsing a public store without being logged in, a pop-up
will be displayed asking you if you are using a private or a public computer.
If you are browsing a public computer, no information will be saved for
further use. If you are browsing a private computer, the Shopping Cart will
be saved but you will not be able to edit the Recipient List until you sign in.

Common Flow
The customers shopping experience is illustrated in the following flow
diagram:
Figure 3: Buying with uStore Storefront - Common Flow

1.

Select a product from one of the available product groups (which

correspond to departments) and view its Pricing table and document
page thumbnails (see Step 1: Selecting Your Product).

2.

Customize the product (optional). For convenience, the administrator can

divide this process into several steps. For example, the first step may
require entering the agents personal details, while the second step may
include selecting the desired pictures and formatting (see Step 2:
Customizing Your Product).

3.

Edit your documents online with uEdit HD (optional) (see Step 3: Editing
a Product with uEdit HD (for XLIM Documents only)).

4.

Personalize the product (optional) using a recipient list (see Step 4:

Providing a Recipient List).

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 12

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

5.

Finalize the order by specifying its printing and pricing options (product
properties) and proofing the customized product (see Step 5: Finalizing
Your Order).

6.

Place the order by adding the product to the shopping cart (see Step 6:
Viewing Your Shopping Cart).

7.

Checkout your order (see Step 7: Checking Out).

Step 1: Selecting Your Product

Choose a Product Group (family) and then select a product from the Product
List displayed. The products available for the selected product family are
presented in the Products page.
Figure 4: Products Page

Click a Product or on the Place an Order button to select it. Once you select a
Product, you are presented with the Product Details page.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 13

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 5: Product Details Page

The Product Details page includes a thumbnail image of the selected product,
description and pricing table that lists all pricing options, with the prices
specified for the product.
Click Continue to confirm your product selection. and continue to product
customization. See Step 2: Customizing Your Product.

Step 2: Customizing Your Product

Customizing your Product in uStore is done using the Customization Wizard
consisting of several Customization Steps. The available product
Customization Steps depend on the settings that were defined in the uStore
Back Office application.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 14

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 6: Example Product Customization Page

The example above shows four Customization Steps that were defined using
the uStore Back Office application: Discount & Date, University Image,
Schedule and Campus. Each Customization step consists of Customization
Dials. Thus, in the example above, Discount & Date step consists of Discount
and Date Dials.
A Customization Dial is a Variable or an ADOR Object that is defined using
one of the following Input Controls:

Text box
A standard single- or multiline text box that enables the customer to enter
a free text input value:
Figure 7: Example Textbox Customization

RTF Textbox
The Rich Text Editor enables customers to further design and stylize the
text they enter in the controls text box by using Rich Text Format (RTF).

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 15

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 8: Example RTF Textbox Customization

Radio buttons (Advanced)

Allows you to choose a value from a list of predefined options.

Dropdown lists (Advanced)

Displays the choice list to the user as a standard dropdown control
Figure 9: Example Dropdown List Customization

Images
Allows you to select from available images to be used in your product.
You can select an image that is provided by the store administrator or
you can upload an image of your choice. Supported image types are:
*.jpg, *.eps, *.epsf, *.e, *.psd, *.pdf, *.tif, *.tiff, *.bmp, *.png and *.gif

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 16

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 10: Example Product Customization Page Image Customization Step

Date Time Picker

Allows you to specify a date attribute for an order.
Figure 11: Example Product Customization Page Image Customization Step

Prepopulation of Personalized Values

To facilitate the customization process, some of the customizable fields can be
prepopulated by default with personalized values.

Validations
Make sure you enter the correct values for each customizable field. uStore
Storefront provides the following validation options:

Mandatory - uStore must confirm that a value is provided by the

Regular Expression uStore supports industry-standard regular

customer.

expressions, which can be used to validate the user input in different

ways, from simple rules to highly sophisticated validation logic. You can
choose a regular expression template to validate the value provided by
the customer. For example, if a field should include a number for
discount percentage, it can be validated to include numbers only.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 17

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

Range - specify the minimum and maximum values allowed for the value
provided by the customer.

Width, Height and Ratio (for graphic files) - If the selected Input Control is

either an Image Selector or a Popup Image Selector, specify the allowed

width, height and ratio ranges for an uploaded graphic file.

Instant Proof
At each Customization step, you can instantly proof your selections by
clicking the Refresh Preview link.
Figure 12: Instant Proof

Note: For information on setting up the Customization Wizard in Back

Office, see Setting Up the Customization Wizard (Dynamic and Email
Documents Only).

Step 3: Editing a Product with uEdit HD (for XLIM

Documents only)
You can use uEdit HD to modify your XLIM Documents online. The
following editing options are available:

Modify the Document layout (move text and graphic boxes).

Scale images

Change static text

Replace image resources.

Apply style to text, etc.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 18

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 13: Example uEdit HD, Advanced Mode

Note: For information on setting up uEdit HD, Setting Up uEdit HD (XLIM

Documents Only).

Step 4: Providing a Recipient List

This customization step is available for Dynamic Documents only.

Uploading a Recipient List

You can upload an existing Recipient List in XML, XLS or MDB formats.
Figure 14: Upload your Recipient List Option

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 19

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

If you have no Recipient List ready to upload, you can click Download
Recipient List Template to download a template of a Recipient List. Make sure
to fill in the Recipient List with the proper data before uploading it.

Recipient List Mapping

If the uploaded file does not correspond to the template format, you will be
asked to map the document fields to the template fields.
Figure 15: Recipient List Manager

Using a Previously Uploaded Recipient List

All the previously uploaded recipient lists that match your product are
available for further use. To manage these recipient lists, click the My Accounts
icon. In the My Accounts page click the Recipient Lists link to open the
Recipient List Manager.
The Recipient List Manager stores a list of all previously uploaded recipient
lists that match your product. It is available only for uploaded and USAData
Recipient Lists. For more information on uploading your recipient list, refer
to Uploading a Recipient List.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 20

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

Figure 16 shows the Recipient List Manager as it appears in the store.

Figure 16: Recipient List Manager

Select the recipient list of your choice and click Next. You are directed to
finalize your order. See Step 5: Finalizing Your Order.
Note: The Creation Date field displays date and time according to the time
zone defined on the customers computer. The date and time format is
determined by the store locale. For example 1:51 PM 8/22/2011 for en-US
(English United States) and 13:53 22.08.2011 for de-DE (German).

Recipient List Editor

Once the Recipient list is uploaded, it is displayed allowing you to edit
columns, delete columns and proof your product.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 21

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 17: Uploaded Recipient List

In this page you can perform the following actions:

Click

To
Add a new recipient to the list.
Edit the existing recipients details
Delete a recipient entry.
Proof your product using the selected recipient details.

Using USADATA to Create a Custom-made Recipient List

You can also choose to use the services of USADATA automated mailing lists
that allow you to filter Recipients according to various demographic criteria.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 22

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

For more information on USADATA services, go to:

http://www.usadata.com/.

Selecting Recipients from Data Source

You can choose to access your Data Sources in real time and select either a
filtered Data Source or a relevant table, to be used as a Recipient List (instead
of uploading a predefined recipient list).

Retrieving Recipients from a Data Base

You can also pull Recipient Lists from tables of an existing database. As a
customer, you are given the option to filter down your recipient list by
selecting the filters that were defined by the store administrator.
Note: For information on setting up Recipients, see Setting Up Recipients
(Dynamic and Email Documents Only) in Chapter 5.

Step 5: Finalizing Your Order

The Finalize Your Order page allows you to select your printing and pricing
options, if any were specified for your product, specify the order quantity
(that is, the number of copies per recipient), and proof your product. Click
Recalculate to recalculate your total purchase price.
Note: If a Proof Approval checkbox appears at the bottom of the page, click
the Proof icon to view it and approve the purchase by clicking the Proof is
approved checkbox. You can then continue to the checkout step.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 23

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 18: Finalize Your Order Page

Click Add to Cart to finalize your order and proceed to the Shopping Cart page.
Note: For more details on setting up Product pricing options in the uStore
Back Office, see Setting Up Product Properties for Single Products.

Step 6: Viewing Your Shopping Cart

The Shopping Cart page displays your purchased items and their
corresponding prices. You can delete an item from the list (
(Edit link) or save it for later use (

),edit an item

Click Checkout to continue to the checkout step or click Continue Shopping to

make more purchases.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 24

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 19: Shopping Cart Contents

If you are browsing a public store, you will need to sign in to reach to the
Checkout page.

Step 7: Checking Out

The Check Out- Order Summary page is the last step of your purchase
experience with uStore Storefront.
The Checkout - Order Summary step is split in two pages.
The first page provides information on your Billing and Shipping addresses
as defined in your account, available Shipping and Delivery services and
their respective costs.
Here you can select a payment method from the options defined by the store
administrator.
Several payment methods are available in uStore system, for example:

Credit card payment (Moneris, PayPal Payflow Pro)

PayPal redirect (PayPal Website Payment Standard)

Additional payment information, such as taxes and coupons is displayed.

Note: For information about Product payment methods, see Setting Up the
Store Clearing Methods.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 25

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 20: Checkout - Order Summary Page, Order Options

Edit the Billing and Shipping Addresses, select the Delivery service and click
Next.
The second page of the Checkout - Order Summary step includes a detailed
summary of your order: your document and document properties and the
total order price. If the store has an Approval Process, you would proceed
with approval from this page.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 26

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 21: Checkout - Order Summary page

Click Checkout to submit your order.

Note: For more details on setting up Product delivery options and services
in uStore Back Office, see Setting Up Delivery Options and Setting Up
Delivery Services.

Composite Flow
Composite Products give the end user the option of creating his own
document by combining selected components as a single document. When
placing an order, customers select the component files to be included in the
final print document. Components can be Static Documents, Dynamic
Documents or documents uploaded by the customer. Customers can upload
Word Documents, PowerPoint presentations and PDF files. For more
information about creating Composite Products see Appendix I.
The following steps describe the customers shopping experience:
1.

Select a Composite Product from one of the available product groups

(which correspond to departments) (see Step 1: Selecting Your Product).

2.

Add components to your product, customizing when relevant. Change

the default product properties if required and personalize each copy with
a recipient list (see Step 2: Adding Components to Your Product).

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 27

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

3.

Preflight the component (see Step 3: Preflight an Uploaded Component).

4.

Finalize your order by specifying the order quantity, proofing your

product and checking out of the store (see Step 4: Finalizing Your Order
and Checking Out).

Step 1: Selecting Your Product

Choose a Product Group and select a product from the Available Products in
the Products page.
Figure 22: Products Page

Available
Products

Click a Product to select it. When you select a Product, you are presented with
the Product Details page. Click Continue to add components to the Composite
Product.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 28

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
.

Figure 23: Composite Product - Document Builder Page

Step 2: Adding Components to Your Product

To add a component to your product:
1.

Click the Add Document icon (

)and either select a Component Group
from the list or select Upload document to upload your own documents.
Figure 24: Ordering Composite Product - Component Groups

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 29

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

Note: Component Groups are groups of products that are available as

Composite Products only.

a.

If you select a Component Group, you can select one of the

documents included in the group . Select a document and click OK.

Figure 25: Ordering Composite Product - Document Template

b.

If you select Upload document, click Browse and select a file to use in
your print job. You can upload Word documents, PowerPoint
presentations and PDF files.

Figure 26: Ordering Composite Product - Upload documents

Note: If your uploaded document exceeds the printable paper size a

message is displayed asking whether you want to convert to the correct
paper size or to remove the document.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 30

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

2.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have added all components.

The components are displayed in the Document Builder page.
Figure 27: Ordering Composite Product - Document Builder Page

The Document Builder page includes the following:

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 31

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

A component placeholder. Click the

to the Composite Product.

to add a document

Thumbnail images with the name of each of the

components of the Composite Product.
Click the Edit

icon to change the name.

If a required field has not been customized or a required

property has not been defined, a red warning (
)
appears next to the components name. Click this warning
to view the Preflight Status and correct the problem.
Toolbar: when you roll over a component thumbnail a
toolbar is displayed:

Click

Click

Click

to display the components properties

to remove the component
to open the preflight dialog box.

Indicates the Total Price of the Composite Product.

The value changes as more components are added.
Click Total Price to change the No. of recipients and
the number of Copies to print.
Composite Properties includes all the properties

associated with the Composite Product. You can change

the default values.

Click Personalize each copy and select Edit your

Recipients List to personalize your product. See
Personalizing Composite Products for more details.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 32

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Click one of the icons to change the document view.
Note: The Preview view (
pages.

) can display up to 100

Move the slider to change the size of the thumbnail

images.
If the Show Properties box is checked, an overlay
image of the property (if available) is displayed over the
component thumbnail, e.g. image of binder type.

3.

Once you have added all components and personalized each copy, you
can preflight each component to ensure that your order is printed
correctly.

Step 3: Preflight an Uploaded Component

You can preflight the component that you upload to check if there are any
issues with the file before you purchase the product and send it to print.
Figure 28: Preflight dialog box

In the Preflight dialog box, a checkmark means that the property passed the
preflight successfully. An exclamation mark means that the preflight check
found issues that you should check.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 33

Purchasing with uStore Storefront

The preflight check provides the following information:

File: displays the name of the uploaded file.

No. of Pages: number of pages and its page range within the composite

product.

Colors: indicates how many pages are going to be printed in color and

Fonts: provides the number of fonts used in the document. You can click

Images: displays the number of images used in the document. You can
click the link to see how the images are distributed in the document . A
warning is prompted if image resolution is below 150 dpi.

how many in grayscale.

the link to view missing fonts . Missing fonts are replaced with substitute
fonts.

Figure 29: Preflight dialog box with details about missing fonts and images

Properties: You can click the Details link to view print properties and
change their settings. In the Print Properties dialog box, you can change

any property that was set up for the product. For example, you can
change the documents color settings or paper type.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 34

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 30: Preflight: Print Properties dialog box

To preflight the component:

1.

Roll your mouse over the component.

2.

On the toolbar that appears, click the Preflight

3.

Check the properties that are marked with an exclamation mark. For
example, if the document includes low-resolution images, it is
recommended that you replace them with high-resolution images and
upload the document again.

4.

If required, view the Print Properties and make any adjustments. For
example, you may need to print this component single-sided. Note that
your changes may affect the products total price.

icon.

Note: Your changes may affect the products total price.

5.

After you preflight all components, you can finalize the ordering process
and check out the product.

Step 4: Finalizing Your Order and Checking Out

The Finalize Your Order page allows you to specify the order quantity (that is,
the number of copies per recipient), and proof your product.
Note: If a Proof Approval checkbox appears at the bottom of the page, click
) to view it and approve the purchase by clicking
the proof icon (
the Proof is approved checkbox. You can then continue to the checkout
step.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 35

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 31: Finalize Your Order Page

Click Add to Cart to finalize your order and proceed to the Shopping Cart page.
The Shopping Cart page displays your purchased items and their
corresponding prices. The process is the same as for the Common Flow (see
Step 6: Viewing Your Shopping Cart).
The Check Out- Order Summary page is the last step of your purchase
experience with uStore Storefront. The process is the same as for the Common
Flow (see Step 7: Checking Out).

Reviewing Your Order Details

Once you have submitted your order, you are given an order number that can
be used to reorder a product using the same order details or to track the
order's progress. For more details, refer to Viewing Orders History.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 36

Purchasing with uStore Storefront
Figure 32: Order Submitted Successfully Notification

Click Print Order Details to produce a receipt including the order details.
Figure 33: Customer Receipt

Managing Draft Orders

You can manage your non-completed orders that were saved as drafts by
clicking on Drafts in the uStore Toolbar.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 37

Managing Your Account
Figure 34: Manage Drafts

The draft orders store all the configurations you during your last visit.
You can either delete or save a Draft Order. If you wish to complete the
Order, press the Continue ( ) icon. You will be redirected to the Product
Details page where you can start the ordering process.
Note: The Creation Date field displays date and time according in the
according to the time zone defined on the customers computer. The date
and time format is determined by the store locale. For example 1:51 PM
8/22/2011 for en-US (English United States) and 13:53 22.08.2011 for deDE (German).

Managing Your Account

This page is available for registered users only.
The My Account page provides you with all the options you need to manage
your account. You can:

Review your past and pending orders. See Viewing Orders History.

Update your personal information. See Updating Your Personal

Information.

Change your shipping and billing address. See Updating Your Billing
and Shipping Address.

Manage previously uploaded recipient lists. See Managing Recipient

Lists.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 38

Managing Your Account
Figure 35: Manage Account Main Page

Click an option to view its details.

Viewing Orders History

The Order History table lists all your previously submitted orders and their
status.
Figure 36: Order History Table

In the Order History page, you can click the Show receipt link to view the
Order Receipt details and click an order number to view its details.
Note: The Order Date field displays date according to the time zone defined
on the customers computer. The date format is determined by the store
locale. For example 8/22/2011 for en-US (English United States) and
22.08.2011 for de-DE (German).

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 39

Managing Your Account
Figure 37: Example Order Details Page

Using the Order Details page, you can click Reorder to order the same product
again. You can also click the Show receipt link to view the Order Receipt
details. Note that if you try to reorder a product that was deleted from the
store, an

icon will appear next to that product in the Shopping Cart page.

Updating Your Personal Information

Your personal information is first entered by the store administrator or, if you
are visiting a public store, using the customer registration process (see
Logging in to a Store).

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 40

Managing Your Account
Figure 38: Personal Information Page

Fill in your personal information and click Update.

Updating Your Billing and Shipping Address

The Billing Address and the Shipping Address sections, included in the
Addresses option, allow you to add and update your billing and shipping
information respectively. Whereas the Billing Address is used for sending
receipts and invoices, the Shipping Address is used for actual delivery of
merchandises.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 41

Managing Your Account
Figure 39: Addresses Information Main Page

You can create new Billing and Shipping addresses by clicking the Add
button. You can also edit an address or delete an address by clicking the Edit
or Delete icons respectively. Please note that the Billing and Shipping
address is only supported if its country and state/province are supported by
the store.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 42

Managing Your Account
Figure 40: Billing/Shipping Address Pages

Click Submit to update your Address information.

You can now edit an address (

), delete an address (

) or add an address

(
) by selecting an address from the Billing Address or Shipping Address
lists and clicking the relevant buttons.

Chapter 2: uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide 43

Managing Your Account

Managing Recipient Lists

The Recipient List Manager stores all your previously uploaded recipient
lists.
Figure 41: Recipient List Manager

Using the Recipient List Manager you can:

Click

To
Edit a recipient list.
Delete a recipient list.
Download a recipient list file.

Note: The Creation Date field displays date and time according to the time
zone defined on the customers computer. The date and time format is
determined by the store locale. For example 1:51 PM 8/22/2011 for en-US
(English United States) and 13:53 22.08.2011 for de-DE (German).

Chapter

Getting Started with uStore Back

Office
This chapter explains how to log in to the uStore Back Office application and
presents its main views.

Logging in to uStore Back Office

Note: You can log in to the uStore Back Office application using Internet
Explorer 8/9. No other browsers are currently supported.

The uStore installation automatically creates a user that is assigned to the

Superuser Root User Group with full read/write permissions.

To log in as the Superuser and start setting up your system:

1.

Go to a URL of the following form:

http://<uStore Server address>/uStoreAdmin

(for example, http://www.printer.com/uStoreAdmin).

Note: If you are accessing your server locally, you can use the following
address: http://localhost/uStoreAdmin.

The following Login page is displayed:

Figure 42: uStore Back Office Site Login Page

Chapter 3: Getting Started with uStore Back Office 45

uStore Back Office Application - Overview

2.

Click a flag icon in the Change Language bar to choose the uStore Back
Office locale as reflected in system messages, labels, menu items, etc.
Please note that in this page you select the application locale. The setup
language for each store is defined separately per store. To define locales,
refer to Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office.

3.

Provide the following authentication details:

4.

User Name admin

Password admin

Click Log In.

uStore Back Office Application - Overview

uStore Back Office consists of five main views, toggled by clicking their icons
in the Views toolbar. The application opens with the Stores view selected,
showing its Store List page.
uStore Back Office allows you to create and manage stores and users with the
following views:

Chapter 3: Getting Started with uStore Back Office 46

uStore Back Office Application - Overview

Button

Description

The default view, used to manage the stores defined on

your uStore server.
The Stores menu also provides access to the Product
Profiles list and enables you to create profiles. Product
Profiles help you manage and update your products
more efficiently.
Used to manage the product orders received from the
uStore Storefront application.

Used to manage the different types of users and groups

of both the uStore Storefront application and the uStore
Back Office application.
Used to analyze various aspects of the activity in the
uStore system, by generating predefined or customized
reports.

Chapter 3: Getting Started with uStore Back Office 47

uStore Back Office Application - Overview

Available in full only to users with full permissions (for

example, uStore superusers) and provides them with a
System Presets Setup tool.
All Presets are set globally in order to be applicable for
all stores defined in uStore.
System Presets setup allows you to view the database
tables that provide the foundation for your online stores,
and to configure these tables as needed before you start
working. Also available are system tools that can be
used to create and configure global models for clearing
(see Creating a Clearing Model) and messaging (see
Setting Up Triggers) activities. System Setup also
includes an automatic configuration tool that can be
used to support uStores Friendly URL feature, when
uStore is located behind a proxy server (see Using the
Proxy Setup Utility).
In addition, the Presets menu also includes links to all
the Xerox FreeFlow workflows connected to your
uStore.
For further details on uStore preset configurations, refer
to Managing uStore Presets.
The views available to different users may vary, depending on each users
permissions. Similarly, the entities shown in each view (that is, Stores,
Products, Users, etc.) are those a particular user is authorized to see (for
details, see Setting up Users and User Groups). As a superuser, you can
access all views and configure all entities in the uStore system.

Chapter

Managing uStore Presets

The Presets view is available in full only to uStore Superusers. Using this
view, superusers can gain access to various global settings and software
database tables to control the Mall behavior and shopping experience. The
settings configured in the Presets view will be available for all the stores in
the Mall. uStore integrates a powerful plug-in architecture that enables you to
extend uStores core features and capabilities. This architecture enables the
development of plug-ins that address your specific needs and enable the
integration of uStore with other business systems. For more information, refer
to the uStore Plug-In SDK Sample Applications document.
Figure 43: Presets View: Main Page

The Presets menu also includes a direct link to all your Xerox FreeFlow
Workflow applications. For more information on how to set up prepress
workflow providers, see Setting Up Prepress Workflow Providers.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 49

You can configure the Presets menu to display a link to uProduce. For more
details, see Setting Up the Mall Table.
Figure 44: Presets View with links to Xerox FreeFlow Core and to uProduce

The Presets view is your starting point to your stores global settings and
system setup. Using this view you can:

Create a Clearing Model: see Creating a Clearing Model.

Set up Coupons: see Coupons Setup.

Set up Currency: see Currency Setup.

Define Data Sources for data driven Input Controls: see Defining Data
Sources.

Set up a Delivery Account: see Setting Up Delivery Accounts

Set up Document Repositories: see Setting Up Document Repositories.

Set up Global Product Properties: see Setting Up Document Repositories

Set up Manufacturers: see Setting Up Manufacturers.

Localize your Storefront to any language: see Localizing Your Storefront

and Back Office.

Use the Proxy Setup utility to automatically set up friendly URLs that are
located behind a proxy server: see Using the Proxy Setup Utility.

Set up your system: see System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables.

Set up Tax: see Setting Up the Tax.

Set up Triggers for Actions: see Setting Up Triggers.

Set up User Details fields: see Setting Up User Details Fields.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 50

Creating a Clearing Model

Creating a Clearing Model

The uStore Back Office application supports multiple clearing models,
enabling the store administrator to select the relevant model for each store.
The Presets view includes access to the Clearing Model page, which enables
you to configure in advance clearing models that will be available for your
stores.
Figure 45: Clearing Model Editor Main Page

You can use the following clearing models:

PayPal: PayPal Payflow Pro and PayPal Web Site Payment Standard

Moneris

Ogone

AuthorizeNET

MultiSafepay

Invoice

Cost Center

Purchase Order

The clearing models are then made available to the administrator via the
Store Setup page > Clearing tab (see Setting Up the Store Clearing Methods).
The Clearing Model Editor page includes a list of all pre-configured clearing
models. The Invoice and Offline Billing clearing models are available by
default. Naturally, you can use or modify them as necessary.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 51

Creating a Clearing Model

Setting up a clearing model involves two steps: choosing a Clearing Model

(that is, a clearing service) and selecting the related Data Collection Method.
These two selections are correlated; meaning, selecting a clearing method is
bound to affect your choice of data collection method.

There are two available Clearing Models:

Automatic clearing using a clearing house uStore is supplied with

three integrated online clearing houses. These clearing providers
enable you to automatically clear transactions using various clearing
methods.
No clearing

There are two available Data Collection Methods:

Credit card collection presents the customer with a user interface

for the specific clearing method chosen in the Clearing Method dropdown list.
No collection (Payment via Invoice)

In addition, you can create plug-ins for other clearing models and data
collection methods and integrate them into uStore. The clearing models
you add are made available to the administrator via the Store Setup
pages - Clearing tab (see Setting Up the Store Clearing Methods). For
more information on creating clearing services plug-ins, refer to the
uStore Software Development Kit documentation.
The following table shows the available pairs of Clearing Models and Data
Collection Methods:
Clearing
Method

Data
Collection
Method

PayPal Payflow
Pro /PayPal Web
Site Payment
Standard

Credit Card
Collection

Moneris Clearing
Logic

Moneris Clearing
User Data Credit
Card

Remarks

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 52

Creating a Clearing Model

Clearing
Method

Data
Collection
Method

Ogone Redirect
Clearing

Ogone Redirect
Clearing

Remarks
The following clearing gateways can be used:
Credit Card
iDeal
giroPay
Direct Debits AT
Direct Debits DE
For more information on Ogone payment
methods, read http://www.ogone.com/ncol/
Acquiring_partners_PM_ENG.pdf

AuthorizeNET

AuthorizeNET
Clearing

Note: Bank transfer is not supported.

MultiSafepay

MultiSafepay
Clearing

Note: Bank transfer is not supported.

Cost Center
Clearing

Cost Center
Clearing

Using this option, the customer will be able to

choose to bill the order to an organization
cost center.

Purchase Order
Clearing

Purchase Order
Clearing

Using this option, the customer will be able to

choose to perform a payment by issuing a
separate purchase order (PO).

No Clearing

Credit Card
Collection

This model is set up out of the box as the

Offline Billing model. Administrators can
choose not to submit transactions to
automatic clearing services but perform the
clearing in-house using the customers credit
card details as provided at ordering time

No Clearing

No Collection

This model is set up out of the box as the

Invoice model. Using this option, customers
will not be asked to fill in their credit card
details. Instead, credit card collection will
take place by phone after ordering time.

To create a new clearing model for your stores, click the New link in the
Clearing Model Editor page (Figure 45). The Edit Clearing Model Settings page is
displayed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 53

Creating a Clearing Model

The configuration fields displayed in this page vary according to the selected
clearing method. For a detailed description of clearing methods
configuration, see:

PayPal Web Site Payment Standard Configuration

Moneris Configuration

PayPal Payflow Pro Configuration

Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration

AuthorizeNET Configuration

MultiSafepay Configuration

Cost Center Clearing Configuration

Purchase Order Clearing Configuration

The Edit Clearing Model Settings page includes the following fields and
selections that are common to all clearing methods:
Field

Description

Name,
Description

Enter a name and a description for the clearing model.

Status

Select Active to make the Clearing Model available for the

stores or Inactive to hide it.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 54

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description

Clearing
Co n f i g u r a t i on

Select PayPal Web Site Payment Standard, Moneris,

PayPal Payflow Pro, Ogone Redirect Clearing, Cost
Center Clearing, Purchase Order Clearing or any other
Automated Clearing Service that was integrated into uStore
using the uStore SDK to enable the respective automatic
clearing service provider. Alternatively, you can select No
Clearing to enable a choice between offline billing and
Payment via Invoice.
The Clearing Configuration fields vary according to the
selected clearing method. To configure the clearing methods,
see
PayPal Web Site Payment Standard Configuration
Moneris Configuration
PayPal Payflow Pro Configuration
Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration
AuthorizeNET Configuration
MultiSafepay Configuration
Cost Center Clearing Configuration
Purchase Order Clearing Configuration

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 55

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description

Data Collection
M e t h od

If you select one of the available Automated Clearing Services

as described above, you can select PayPal Credit Card
Collection (for PayPal), Moneris Clearing User Data
Credit Card (for Moneris), Credit Card Collection (for
PayPal Payflow Pro), Ogone Redirect Clearing, Cost
Center Clearing or Purchase Order Clearing to enable
automatic billing.
If you select the No Clearing option, then choose Credit
Card Collection to enable offline billing or No Collection to
enable payment via invoice.
The Data Collection fields vary according to the selected
clearing method. To configure the clearing methods, see
PayPal Web Site Payment Standard Configuration
Moneris Configuration
PayPal Payflow Pro Configuration
Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration
AuthorizeNET Configuration
MultiSafepay Configuration
Cost Center Clearing Configuration
Purchase Order Clearing Configuration

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 56

Creating a Clearing Model

PayPal Web Site Payment Standard Configuration

Figure 46: PayPal Website Payment Standard Clearing Configuration

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select PayPal Website Payment Standard.You will

be prompted to fill in information in the PayPal
Clearing Account Configuration section (which is
exclusive to PayPal):

PayPal Account Email Email address provided upon PayPal Account

Address registration.
Payment Data Transfer An Identity Token created during PayPal account
Identity Token configuration (see PayPal: Website Payment
Preferences).
API Username API Username created during PayPal account
configuration (see PayPal: API Access).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 57

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description
API Password API Password created during PayPal account
configuration (see PayPal: API Access).
API Signature API Signature created during PayPal account
configuration (see PayPal: API Access).
Custom Page Style PayPal payment Page Style Name as defined in
PayPal account configuration in Edit Custom
Payment Page Styles (see Figure 397)
Use Server Select Live to use the production server.
Select Test to use the test server.

Data Collection
M e t h od

Select PayPal Credit Card Collection.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 58

Creating a Clearing Model

Moneris Configuration
Figure 47: Moneris Clearing Configuration

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select Moneris Clearing Logic. You will be prompted to

fill in information in the Moneris eSelect Clearing
Model Configuration section (which is exclusive to
Moneris).

Use Server Select Live to use the production server.

Select Test to use the test server.
Select Custom, if you wish to use your own server.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 59

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description
Host Address Available only when the Custom radio button is selected
in the Use Server field.
Enables you to connect to a Test server for testing your
account or a Production server for actual use (i.e., when
the store is online).

Store ID Store ID as got from Moneris. For test use store1.

API Token API Token as got from Moneris. For test use yesguy
Currency Select the currency to be used in this account. Use this
Clearing model only in stores with the same currency.
Proxy Address Fill in your proxy details that allow uStore to connect to
Proxy Port the internet (if applicable). Note that the Proxy Port must
Proxy Logon refer to Port 443 (HTTPS).
Proxy Password
Data Collection
M e t h od

Select Moneris Clearing User Data Credit Card.

You can provide store administrators with extra security by
requesting the credit cards security code in addition to its
number. Select the Use card security code option to
prompt customers to provide their cards security code. If
this option is selected, the cards security code will be
forwarded to Moneris.

To test Moneris use the following test credit card numbers:

MasterCard

5454545454545454

Visa

4242424242424242

Amex

373599005095005

Diners

36462462742008

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 60

Creating a Clearing Model

PayPal Payflow Pro Configuration

Figure 48: New Clearing Model Setup Page

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select PayPal Payflow Pro Clearing. You will be prompted

to fill in information in the PayPal Payflow Pro Clearing
Model Configuration section (which is exclusive to PayPal
Payflow Pro).

Partner, Merchant, Your account details as provided by PayPal.

User Name,
Password
Use Server Select Live to use the production server.
Select Test to use the test server.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 61

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description

Proxy Address, Fill in your proxy details that allow uStore to connect to the
Proxy Port, Proxy internet (if applicable). Note that the Proxy Port must refer to
Logon, Proxy Port 443 (HTTPS).
Password
Data Collection
M e t h od

Select Credit Card Collection. You can provide store

administrators with extra security by requesting the credit
cards security code in addition to its number. Select the Use
card security code option to prompt customers to provide
their cards security code. If this option is selected, the cards
security code will be forwarded to PayPal.

Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration

Figure 49: Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 62

Creating a Clearing Model

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select Ogone Redirect Clearing. You will be prompted

to fill in information in the Ogone Clearing Model
Configuration section (which is exclusive to Ogone):
PSPID Login name as defined in the Registration as a new
merchant (TEST) page of the Ogone account setup
(see Figure 402).

SHA1 In Password The password entered in the SHA-1-IN Signature field

in the Data and origin verification page of the Ogone
account setup (see Figure 407).
SHA1 Out Password The password entered in the SHA-1-Out Signature
field in the Transaction feedback page of the Ogone
account setup (see Figure 408).
Address Match Select this checkbox to let Ogone check the validity of
the Billing address entered in the Storefront Checkout
page.
API User Name API User name that you receive after having created a
user account (see Figure 410).
API Password API password that you receive after having created a
user account (see Figure 410).
Use Server Select Live to use the production server.
Select Test to use the test server.
Data Collection
M e t h od

Ogone Redirect Clearing option is automatically

selected. Select one of the following Clearing gateways:
Credit Card
iDEAL
giroPay
Direct Debits AT
Direct Debits DE

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 63

Creating a Clearing Model

AuthorizeNET Configuration
Warning: The bank transfer payment option is not supported in this
version.
Figure 50: AuthorizeNET Clearing Model

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select AuthorizeNET Clearing.You will be prompted

to fill in information which is exclusive to AuthorizeNET
clearing configuration.

Login ID API Login ID to the AuthorizeNET Account (Account

> Settings >API Login ID and Transaction Key)
Transaction Key Transaction Key of the AuthorizeNET Account. To
create a Transaction Key, go to Account > Settings
>API Login ID and Transaction Key and click
Create New Transaction Key.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 64

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description
Currency AuthorizeNET supports payments in US Dollar only.
Make sure that the Primary Currency of the store
using the AuthorizeNET Clearing Method is set to US
Dollar too (see Defining the Store Locale). Otherwise,
the payment will not be processed.
Use Server Select Live to use the production server.
Select Test to use the test server.
Relay response from Select this checkbox if you wish to define a special
uStore page to which a customer will be redirected after
payment. For example, this page can display a
payment receipt.
If this checkbox is left unchecked, the customer is
redirected to the Storefront immediately after
payment.
Relay Page HTML If the Relay response from uStore checkbox is
selected, you can edit the HTML of the Relay Page. By
default, uStore provides a receipt template. You can
edit this template or provide your own HTML code.

Auto-redirect to store If you are using a Relay Page, you need to define the
after...seconds time interval after which the customer is redirected
from the Relay Page back to uStore. By default, the
Relay Page is displayed for 10 seconds.
Test Connection Click the Test Connection link to verify that your
connection to the AuthorizeNET account is working.
Data Collection
M e t h od

Select AuthorizeNET Clearing.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 65

Creating a Clearing Model

MultiSafepay Configuration
Warning: The bank transfer payment option is not supported in this
version.
Figure 51: MultiSafepay Clearing Model

Field

Description

Clearing Method

Select MultiSafePay Clearing.You will be prompted

to fill in information which is exclusive to MultiSafepay
clearing configuration.

Account ID The Account ID of the MultiSafepay Account.

Site ID The Site ID of the MultiSafepay Site (Account
>Settings >Sites >Site ID). MultiSafepay allows
you to define several Sites for the same Account. For
example, you can create different sites for each uStore
store under the same MultiSafepay Account.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 66

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description
Site Code The Site Security Code of the MultiSafepay Site
(Account >Settings >Sites >Site Security Code).
Currency MultiSafepay supports payments in Euro only. If the
Primary Currency of the Store using the
MultiSafepay Clearing Method is different, it will be
converted to Euro according to the conversion tables
defined for that Store.
Make sure that the conversion rates used by the Store
are up-to-date.
To verify conversion rates:
If the store uses conversion rates defined in
Presets, go to Presets >Currency Setup.
If the store uses conversion rates defined
specifically for the store, go to Store Setup
>Appearance >Secondary Currencies.
Use Server Select Live to use the production server.
Select Test to use the test server.

Description Template Template for the order description shown on

MultiSafepay website. The default template is {1},
Order #{0}, where {0} is the Order ID and {1} is
the Store name.
You can modify the template using the following
additional placeholders:
{2} - Store Friendly URL
{3} - Store Raw URL
Notification HTML The HTML page that will be displayed to the customer
after payment. By default, this page will display a
redirect link to uStore.
You can edit the HTML code using the following
placeholders:
{0} - return URL
{1} - return to store text
{2} - redirection message
Auto redirect to store Define the time interval after which the customer is
after ... seconds redirected from the Notification HTML back to uStore.
By default, the Notification page is displayed for 10
seconds.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 67

Creating a Clearing Model
Field

Description

Data Collection
M e t h od

Select MultiSafepay Clearing.

Cost Center Clearing Configuration

Note: In some cases, when using a delayed clearing service, such as a
cheque or wire transfer, a final clearing confirmation is received several
hours or days after the order has been made. After an immediate initial
approval, orders will be processed as confirmed, yet they will stay in a
"Delayed Payment" state until the final confirmation.
Figure 52: Cost Center Clearing Model

Field

Description

Clearing Method

The Cost Center Clearing is selected by default.

Data Collection
M e t h od

The Cost Center Clearing is selected by default.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 68

Coupons Setup

Purchase Order Clearing Configuration

Figure 53: Purchase Order Clearing Model

Field

Description

Clearing Method

The Purchase Order Clearing is selected by default.

Data Collection
M e t h od

The Purchase Order Clearing is selected by default.

Coupons Setup
Administrators can generate coupon batches containing unique coupon
numbers. Customers who receive coupons can enter their coupon number
during the order checkout, and thus obtain a discount.
When you click the Coupon Setup link in the Presets view, the Coupons list
page is displayed with the Coupons tab showing a list of all currently defined
coupons batches.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 69

Coupons Setup
Figure 54: Coupons List Page

For each coupon batch, the following parameters are displayed:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the coupon batch.

Description

Description of the coupon batch.

S t or e N a m e

Name of the store to which the coupon batch is assigned.

Discount Info

Discount monetary value or percentage and the minimum

purchase amount required to be able to use the coupon.

Time Span

Time period during which the coupon is valid.

Total

The total number of coupons in the coupon batch.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 70

Coupons Setup
Field

Description

Used

For Promotion Codes:

Limited to: The number of customers to which the
promotion code usage is limited.
For Personal Coupons and Promotion Codes:
the number of coupons that have been fully or partially used.
Fully:
either the entire coupon amount has been used
or the coupon has been used in a maximum number of
orders for which it is available.
Partially:
either the coupon amount has been partially used
or the coupon has been used in a partial number of orders
for which it is available

Status

The status of the coupon batch (Active, Inactive or Expired).

Active: the coupon batch can be used.
Inactive: the coupon has been deactivated by the
administrator and therefore, cannot be used. This coupon
can be re-activated.
Expired: The coupon has been fully used or reached its
expiration date. The promotion code coupon is also expired
if all limited users have fully used their coupon.

The Name, Description and Store Name fields can be filtered by writing the
coupon batch name, description or store name (respectively) in the Filter box
and clicking the Filter icon.
In the Coupons list page the store administrator can:

Add a new coupon batch (Adding a New Coupon Batch)

Manage the existing coupon batches (Managing the Existing Coupon

Batches)

Adding a New Coupon Batch

To define a new coupon batch:
1.

Click the New Coupon Batch link.

The Coupon Batch Setup page is displayed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 71

Coupons Setup
Figure 55: Coupons Batch Setup

2.

Fill in the following information:

Field

Description

Coupon Set Name

Mandatory. Name of the coupon batch.

Description

Optional. Description of the coupon batch.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 72

Coupons Setup
Field

Description

Status

Select Active or Inactive. Deactivating a coupon will

make it unavailable in the store. In case the Inactive
status is selected, the following default status message
is displayed: The coupon is inactive until further
notice. This status message is editable.

Definition

This section contains fields that constitute the coupon

definition.
Coupon Type From the drop-down list select Personal Coupon or
Promotion Code.
A Personal coupon is a set of coupon codes. Each
coupon code can be used by one customer only.
A promotion code is one or more coupon code/s. Each
coupon code can be used by multiple customers, for
example: coupons that are provided in a newspaper.
Usable in Store From the drop-down list select the store in which the
coupon should be used.
Reduction Type From the drop-down list, select one of the following
options:
Fixed Discount: select this option to offer a fixed
monetary value discount.
% Discount: select this option to offer a percentage
discount.

Reduction Amount Mandatory.

If Fixed Discount has been previously selected in
the Reduction Type field, enter the discount
monetary value. uStore automatically applies the
currency defined for the store selected in Usable in
Store field.
If % Discount has been previously selected in the
Reduction Type field, enter the discount
percentage. For example, for 10% discount, type in
10.

Note: Coupon reduction is applied on the price of

the products excluding tax and delivery fee.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 73

Coupons Setup
Field

Description
Min. Purchase for Mandatory. The minimum purchase sum that enables
Discount using the coupon. uStore automatically applies the
currency defined for the store selected in Usable in
Store field. The default minimum purchase sum is 0.

Note: The minimum purchase amount does not

include tax and delivery fee.
Usage Limitation If you selected Personal Coupon in the Coupon Type
drop-down list, you can limit the coupon usage by
selecting one of the following options that apply per
customer:
Limited to one order: the coupon expires after one
use even if the entire discount sum has not been
used. This is the default option.
Unlimited till Expires: the coupon expires when
the entire discount sum has been used or when the
expiry date has been reached.
Limited to orders: the coupon expires after using
it in the specified number of orders.
If you selected Promotion Code in the Coupon Type
drop-down list, you have two sets of limitations: one per
Customer (see above) and one per Promotion Code.
The following limitations are available per Promotion
Code:
Unlimited: there are no limitations that apply to the
coupon. The only possible limitations (if any) are
those defined per customer (see the options
applicable for Personal Coupons).
Limited to first...customers: the coupon expires
after it has been used by a given number of
customers.
Please note that in case you defined limitations Per
Coupon and Per Customer, the limitations per coupon
apply for all customers and in addition to that, the
limitations per customer apply for each individual
customer.
For example, if you defined a coupon that is limited to
first five customers and limited to 1 order, then only the
first five customers will be able to use this coupon and
each customer will be able to use it for one order only.
Time Span

This section defines the time span during which the

coupon is valid.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 74

Coupons Setup
Field

Description
Unlimited The coupon has no starting or expiry date. This is the
default option.
Will expire in .from The starting date of the coupon is today. The coupon
Today will expire in a specified number of days/weeks/months
from today. From the drop-down list select Days,
Weeks or Months and in the text box enter the
number of days, weeks or months.

Starting The coupon will be valid during the defined time

date.Expiration date interval.
Select the Starting date and the Expiration date by
using the Calendar icon. Both dates are mandatory.
Click the Clear button to clear your definitions.
Co u p o n C od e
G e n e r a t i on

This section defines coupon generation mode.

Auto-production Select Auto-production to automatically generate a

Createcoupons coupon batch. In Createcoupons field specify the
number of coupons you would like to generate. uStore
will generate a CSV file ready to be downloaded. The
file will contain unique, randomly looking, 8 or more
characters long coupon codes.
Manual production
Upload coupon list
(supported formats:
excel, CSV)

When you want to have coupon codes in a certain

format, select Manual production to upload the
coupon batch excel file prepared in advance.
To prepare the coupon batch file, click Download
Coupon Excel template (empty) link and save
the template to your computer.
To upload the manually generated coupon file, click
Browse next to the Upload coupon list
(supported formats: excel, CSV) field.

Note: If a coupon code defined in the coupon batch

file already exists in the system, the file
upload will fail.

3.

Click Generate. The coupon batch record is added to the coupons list in
the Coupons tab on the Coupons list.
Click Cancel if you wish to discard your definitions and return to the
Coupons tab.

4.

After the coupon batch file has been generated, the store administrator
can download it (see Downloading the Coupon Batch File) and distribute

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 75

Coupons Setup

it to the customers by email or as a printed document. Since the coupon

distribution is not automated, the store administrator is responsible for
creating an Email or Print Document and sending it to the customers
using uDirect or uProduce.

Managing the Existing Coupon Batches

Note: When managing the existing coupon batches, please note that a
coupon is not transferable and can be used by ONE user ONLY!

The following operations can be performed on the coupon batch:

Modifying the coupon batch status (see Modifying the Coupon Batch
Status)

Downloading the coupon batch file (see Downloading the Coupon Batch
File)

Duplicating the coupon batch (see Duplicating the Coupon Batch)

Moving the coupon batch to archive (see Moving the Coupon Batch to
Archive)

Modifying the Coupon Batch Status

To modify the coupon batch status:
1.

Click the Coupon Name in the Name column.

The Coupon Batch Setup page is displayed with Status as the only editable
field.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 76

Coupons Setup
Figure 56: Coupons Batch Setup Page Edit

2.

Modify the coupon batch status by selecting the Active or Inactive in the
Status field. In case Inactive status is selected, you may change the
Customer Notice as needed.

3.

Click Save.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 77

Coupons Setup

Downloading the Coupon Batch File

To download the coupon batch file:
1.

In the Coupons tab on the Coupons list page click the Download icon

The File Download window is displayed:

Figure 57: File Download Window

2.

Click Open to open the coupon batch file or click Save to save the coupon
batch file on your computer.

Duplicating the Coupon Batch

Duplicating the coupon batch enables you to create a new coupon batch using
the definitions of the already existing coupon batch.

To duplicate the coupon batch:

1.

In the Coupons tab on the Coupons list page click the Duplicate icon
OR
Click the Coupon Name in the Name column. In the Coupon Batch Setup
page click the Duplicate link (Figure 56).
The Coupon Batch Setup page is displayed showing the duplicated
coupon batch parameters.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 78

Currency Setup

2.

Modify, if needed, the required parameters and set the number of

coupons to be created in the Number of coupons to create field in the
Coupon Code Generation section.

3.

Click Generate. A new coupon batch is created and added to the Coupons
list in the Coupons tab.

Moving the Coupon Batch to Archive

To move the coupon batch to the archive:
1.

In the Coupons list page, Coupons tab click the Archive icon
. The
Coupon Batch record is removed from the Coupons list in the Coupons tab
and is moved to the Archive tab.
Figure 58: Coupon Archive

Note: A coupon batch cannot be restored from the Archive. Instead you can
create a copy of this coupon batch by using the Duplicate operation
(Duplicating the Coupon Batch). When clicking the Duplicate icon, the
coupon batch will be saved in the Coupons tab.

Currency Setup
The Currency Setup enables you to define currencies that can be displayed in
the store and their exchange rates. When you click the Currency Setup link in
the Presets view, a list of all currently defined currencies is displayed. A
reference currency which serves as a basis for conversion is set by default to
US dollar in the Reference Currency drop-down list. The administrator can
modify the reference currency at any time. The reference currency does not
have to be in used in a store. It can only serve as a basis for calculation of the
exchange rates of other currencies.
In the Currency Setup page, you can add new currencies, edit existing ones
and delete all currencies except the reference currency.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 79

Currency Setup
Figure 59: List of Currencies

For each currency, the following parameters are displayed:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the currency.

S ym bo l

Currency symbol, for example $ for US dollar.

Exchange Rate

Exchange rate with respect to the currency set as reference in

the Reference Currency drop-down list. Changing the
reference currency will reset all exchange rates. The
reference currency exchange rate will always be 1 and
disabled (1 USD=1 USD). The exchange rates can be left
empty.

To define a new currency:

1.

Click the Add New button.

The Currency Setup page is displayed.
Figure 60: Currency Setup Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 80

Defining Data Sources

2.

3.

Fill in the following information:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the currency.

S ym bo l

Currency symbol, for example $ for US dollar

Abbreviation

Abbreviation for the currency name, for example

USD for US dollar.

Click Save.

Defining Data Sources

Data Sources enable you to define databases that will be used to populate
Input Controls such as drop-down lists and text boxes at the store. For more
information on how you use Data Sources in your store, see Setting Up
Product Properties for Single Products.
When you click the Data Sources Setup link in the Presets view, a list of all
currently defined Data Sources is displayed. You can delete a Data Source,
edit a Data Sources definitions or you can define a new Data Source.
Figure 61: Data Source List Page

To define a new Data Source:

1.

Click the Add New Data Source link.

The New Data Source page is displayed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 81

Defining Data Sources
Figure 62: New Data Source Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 82

Setting Up Delivery Accounts

2.

Fill in the following information:

Field

Description

Data Source Name

Name of the Data Source.

D a t a S o u r c e D e s cr i p t i o n

Description of the Data Source.

Server

Enter the name of the server where the database

resides followed by a back slash and the database
instance.
For example: ServerName\DBInstance.

3.

Database

Enter the name of the specific database you want

to use.

User, Password

User name and password that are used to access

the database.

Available in stores

Select in which store you want to allow the use of

that Data Source.

After you complete defining the Data Source (i.e., Server, Database, User
name and Password) you can test your connection to the uProduce server
by clicking the Test Connection button.

You can now bind between the Data Source you have just defined to any
Input Control you want to use in a store. For more information on how to use
Data Sources in your store, refer to Setting Up Product Properties for Single
Products.

Setting Up Delivery Accounts

The Delivery table in the Presets view enables you to define delivery
providers accounts for your stores. Available delivery providers include:
FedEx and UPS. You can use the Delivery Setup option to add and configure
delivery provider accounts. The accounts you add here are made available to
the store administrators when they configure the store during the store setup
process, as detailed in Setting Up Delivery Options.
When you click the Delivery Setup link in the Presets view, a list of all
currently defined delivery providers is displayed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 83

Setting Up Delivery Accounts
Figure 63: Delivery Provider List Page

uStore is supplied with two out-of-the-box delivery providers: FedEx and

UPS.

To set up an account for the FedEx delivery service, see Setting Up an

Account for the FedEx Delivery Service.

To set up an account for the UPS delivery service, see Setting Up an

Account for the UPS Delivery Service.

Setting Up an Account for the FedEx Delivery Service

Click the Fedex link in the list of delivery providers to add a new FedEx
account or to configure an existing account.
The FedEx Account List page is displayed.
Figure 64: FedEx Account List Page

You can edit a FedEx account by clicking its name in the list or you can delete
an account by clicking the trash can icon next to it.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 84

Setting Up Delivery Accounts

To add a new FedEx account:

1.

To add a FedEx account, click the Add Account link. The FedEx Account -

Account Setup page is displayed.

Figure 65: FedEx Account - Account Setup Page

2.

Fill in the following information:

Account Name: Name of the account.

Account Description: Description of the account.

Account Number: Provided by FedEx when creating a new account.

Meter Number: Provided by FedEx when subscribing to a FedEx

account. The FedEx Meter Number provides you with access to the
FedEx FSM (FedEx Ship Manager). If you do not have a meter
number, you can use uStore to connect to FedEx and request a
number. Click the New link in the Meter Number line, fill in your
details in the displayed page and click Issue a New Meter Number:

Figure 66: FedEx Account Setup - Acquiring a Meter Number

Currency: Select the currency that will be used to calculate delivery

cost as provided by FedEx. The Currency drop-down list includes all
of the currencies that are currently defined for the uStore mall. To
define additional currencies, refer to Determining the Store
Appearance. Note that the currency type you select here must be
identical to the one used at the store.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 85

Setting Up Delivery Accounts

Customer Pays for Delivery: When selected, charges the customer with
the delivery expenses. The following are two examples that describe
two available scenarios.

Scenario A Public Store (B2C)

The uStore owner has a FedEx account that he uses in his store. In
such case, you should select the Customer Pays for Delivery
checkbox to charge the customer with the delivery expenses.

Scenario B Secured Store (B2B)

The Store owner has a FedEx account that he uses in his store. For
example, the store was created for Company X that already has a
FedEx account number (as opposed to scenario A where the
uStore owner has a FedEx account number) and the store
customers are Company Xs agents. In this case, Company X
should not be charged twice for shipping; hence you should
leave the Customer Pays for Delivery checkbox unselected.

Use Server:

Select Live to use the production server.

Select Test to use the test server

Setting Up an Account for the UPS Delivery Service

Click the UPS link in the list of delivery providers to add a new UPS account
or to configure an existing account.
The UPS Account List page is displayed.
Figure 67: UPS Account List Page

You can edit a UPS account by clicking its name in the list or you can delete
an account by clicking the trash can icon next to it.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 86

Setting Up Delivery Accounts

To add a new UPS account:

1.

To add a UPS account, click the Add Account link. The UPS Account Account Setup page is displayed.
Figure 68: UPS Account - Account Setup Page

2.

Fill in the following information:

Account Name: Name of the account.

Description: Description of the account.

Account Number, User ID, Password, Access Key: Provided by UPS

when creating a new account.

Currency: Select the currency that will be used to calculate delivery

cost as provided by UPS. The Currency dropdown list includes all the
currencies that are defined for the uStore mall. To define additional
currencies, refer to Determining the Store Appearance. Note, the
currency type you select here must be identical to the one used at the
store.
Length Unit, Weight Unit: Measuring units used for defining the

package dimensions and weight. You can select the metric system
(i.e., centimeters and kilograms) or the equivalent English system
(inches and pounds) commonly used in the US.

Customer Pays for Delivery: When selected, charges the customer with
the delivery expenses. The following are two examples that describe
two available scenarios.

Scenario A Public Store (B2C)

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 87

Setting Up Document Repositories

The uStore owner has a UPS account that he uses in his store. In
such case you should select the Customer Pays for Delivery
checkbox to charge the customer with the delivery expenses.

Scenario B (Secured Store (B2B)):

The Store owner has a UPS account that he uses in his store. For
example, the store was created for Company X that already has a
UPS account number (as opposed to scenario A where the uStore
owner has a UPS account number) and the store customers are
Company Xs agents. In this case, Company X should not be
charged twice for shipping; hence you should leave the Customer
Pays for Delivery checkbox unselected.

Configuration Type: Allows you to connect to a Test server for testing

your account or to a Production server for actual use (i.e., when the
store is online).
Use Server:

Select Live to use the production server.

Select Test to use the test server

Show Proxy Configuration: Click to define the proxy parameters as

described below.

Proxy Address/Proxy Port/Proxy User/Password: Fill in your

proxy details if uStore is located behind a proxy server. Note that
the Proxy Port must refer to Port 443 (HTTPS).

Test Connection: Click this link to test connection to the UPS service.

Setting Up Document Repositories

Setting up Document Repositories enables the uStore administrator to define
external file repositories for Composite Products. The administrator sets up
the repository location, which file types can be uploaded and whether the
visitor can change the order of the pages or edit Product Properties on
specific pages of the uploaded file. The store visitors will be able to upload
Documents from these repositories when ordering a Composite Product.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 88

Setting Up Document Repositories
Figure 69: Document Repositories Folder

To set up a Document Repository:

1.

Enter the Presets view and click the Document Repositories Setup link.

2.

In the Document Repositories List window, click New to add a new

Document Repository.

3.

Enter the repository Name and Description.

4.

In the Repository Type field, select Document Repository On Disk. This is a

pre-defined repository type provided by uStore out-of-the box.

5.

In the Allowed Extensions section, select the file extensions that are
allowed to be uploaded. uStore supports upload of the following file
extensions: PDF, PPT, PPTX, DOC, DOCX.

6.

If you wish to allow store customers to modify the uploaded files, select

Allow Page-Level Modifications. If this option is enabled, customers can

change page order and modify Product Properties on specific pages.

7.

In the List File By drop-down list, select the mode in which the contents of
an external Document Repository will be retrieved and define the

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 89

Setting Up Document Repositories

required parameters for the selected mode.

There are four available options:

Folder: allows uploading Documents from a folder located on a

uStore server. In the Path field, enter the folder path on a uStore
server.
Network Path: allows uploading Documents from a folder located in a
network that can be accessed by a uStore server. Enter the following
parameters:

Path: enter the folder path in the network.

Username, Password, Domain: if the network path requires

authentication, enter the username, password and domain name

required to access the network location defined in the Path field.

Info File: allows uploading Documents from a folder whose structure

and contents are represented using an XML info file. In the Path field
enter the path to folder in which the XML info file (folderinfo.xml)
resides. For more details on folderinfo.xml see Setting Up Info File
Parameters
HTTP Web Handler: allows uploading Documents from a remote

server (for example, Dropbox) using the HTTP Web Handler file
representing the folder path and contents. In the URL field, enter the
URL of a remote folder in which the HTTP Web Handler file resides.
For more details, see Setting Up HTTP Web Handler Parameters

8.

Click Save.

Once you have set up your Document Repository, you can enable it for use by
a specific Upload Product. For more details, see Setting Up Upload Products
(Component Groups only).

Setting Up Info File Parameters

The folderinfo.xml file is used to represent the structure and contents of a
particular folder. This file can be used in the following cases:

The real folder name can be replaced by a virtual display name.

The real file name can be replaced by a virtual display name.

You can decide which files inside a specific folder will be visible in
the repository and which files will be hidden.
You can define a custom thumbnail icon for a file.

The folderinfo.xml file has the following structure:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 90

Setting Up Document Repositories
Code Sample 1: Folderinfo.xml

<FolderInfo>
<subfolders>
<folder folderName="<Folder Name>" path="<Folder
Path>" iconClass="fileExtensionFolder"
iconPath=""></folder>
</subfolders>
<files>
<file fileName="<File Name>" extension="<File
Extension>" path="<File Path>" iconClass="<File
Extension Type>" iconPath="<Icon Path>"></file>
</files>
</FolderInfo>

Parameter

Value

folderName

The display name of a folder. The display name

can be different from the actual folder name.

path

The actual file or folder path. The path must be

located under the folder in which the
folderinfo.xml resides.

iconClass

When defining the folder parameters, the

iconClass parameter must have
fileExtensionFolder value.
When defining the file parameters, the

iconClass parameter must have

fileExtension<Extension Type>
value, for example fileExtensionpptx, if
the file extension is PPTX.
iconPath

The full path to the location of the icon file.

fileName

The display name of a file. The display name can

be different from the actual file name.

extension

The file extension. For example, PPTX, PPT,

DOCX, DOC, PDF.

Example:
In the following example, we set the Document repository to contain a folder
named Giftcards with a file named Birthday.pptx. The file has a thumbnail
icon which is located at https://play.google.com/intl/en-US_us/about/
images/giftcards/birthday_120x120.png.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 91

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Code Sample 2: Folderinfo.xml - Example

<FolderInfo>
<subfolders>
<folder folderName="Giftcards" path="My Files"
iconClass="fileExtensionFolder" iconPath=""></
folder>
</subfolders>
<files>
<file fileName="Birthday" extension="pptx"
path="Projects/Giftcards/Birthday.pptx"
iconClass="fileExtensionpptx" iconPath="https://
play.google.com/intl/en-US_us/about/images/
giftcards/birthday_120x120.png"></file>
</files>
</FolderInfo>

Setting Up HTTP Web Handler Parameters

An HTTP Web Handler file is used to represent the structure and contents of
a remote folder. For example, you might use a Web Handler file to fetch
contents of a remote repository, such as, for example, Dropbox.
When a customer wishes to upload a Document from a remote Document
Repository implemented using an HTTP Web Handler, uStore sends a
request to the Handler file to fetch the requested folder. When a customer
clicks a file, an additional request is sent to fetch the file.
The HTTP Web Handler file expects to receive the following two parameters:

path: returns the repository path. When you fetch the root folder, the
path parameter is empty.

mode: returns file or list values.

list: returns folderinfo.xml. This value is used to retrieve the folder

contents.

file: returns file. This value is used to retrieve the actual file.

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Product Properties define the products pricing and delivery options. Product
properties can be either product-specific or global, that is, available to all
products in the Mall. A predefined list of global properties is available for
your use. Some of these properties are system properties and cannot be
deleted, others can be modified or removed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 92

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Superusers can create additional global properties that will be available for
use as product property templates in the entire mall. For example, you may
want to create a product property that cannot be modified by the store
administrator or be used for aggregation. Furthermore, global properties may
be presented by default each time a store administrator creates a product. For
example, you can create a product property for customer comments that will
be displayed as a text box. Naturally, you can allow Store Administrators to
override global property settings.
The following properties are system properties and cannot be deleted from
the Global Properties List:

Base: refers to the product base price. This property is mandatory for all
products and the settings cannot be modified.
Schedule e-mail sending time: mandatory for Email products. The settings

cannot be modified.

Color: enables printing in black and white or in color. This property is

mandatory for Upload products and the settings cannot be modified

Double Sided Printing: enables printing on one side of the page or on both
sides. This property is mandatory for Upload products and the settings
cannot be modified

Binding Side: enables binding on the long or the short side of the page.

Binding Type: enables you to select a binding type. This property is a

default property for Composite Products. The settings can be modified.

This property is a default property for Composite Products. The settings

cannot be modified.

To create a global product property:

1.

Enter the Presets view and click the Global Product Properties Setup link.
The Global Product Property List page lists all available product
properties. The Base product property that appears in the list is an initial
product property defined during uStore installation. Users assigned to
the Superuser Root Group can add new product properties and schedule
email sending time.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 93

Setting Up Global Product Properties
Figure 70: Global Product Properties List Page

The Global Product Property list shows the settings of all available global
product properties. Available settings for global properties are described
in the following table.
Setting

Description

Mandatory

A global property is mandatory in every product in

the mall.

Editable

A customer may change a property value in the

store.

Visible

A global property is visible to customers in a store.

Affects Price

A property is included in pricing and cost

calculation.

A f f e c t s D e l i v e ry

You can define a product property that affects

delivery cost calculations. For example, you can
define several types of paper (for example, matte,
glossy and plain) where each paper type has a
different weight and thus affects the delivery cost.
Delivery prices are determined during product
setup, as in Setting Up Delivery.

Affects Aggregation

Indicates a property that distinguishes the product

for aggregation.

Logical Name

Indicates a property that is used to tag the

product with a logical name. See a full description
below.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 94

Setting Up Global Product Properties

You can edit or delete a Global Product Property.

2.

Click New to create a new Global Product Property.

Figure 71: New Global Product Property Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 95

Setting Up Global Product Properties

3.

Enter a name and description for the newly created Global Product
Property.
Note: If desired, you can design and display an icon to appear in the
Storefront next to the property name.
This icon should be placed in the folder:

\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons
It should be in PNG format and should be 20 x 20 pixels in size. The name
of the image for the selected status should be
PropertyName_selected.PNG and for the unselected status,
PropertyName.PNG.

4.

Select whether the Global Product Property is:

Mandatory in Every Product - the property will be added to any

product that will be created. The property will be added to all the
existing and newly created products. Note that if the property affects
pricing calculation, prices will be set to zero in all the existing
products.
Store Admin May Change Configuration enables store administrators
to select the following options when setting up the product
properties:

Visible for Customer

Customer May Change Value

Used in Pricing Calculation

Store Admin May Change Values enables store administrators to set

the following sections when setting up the product properties:

Input Controls

When the dial has no value, take values from

Validation

Visible for Customer

Customer May Change Values

Used in Pricing Calculation

Product properties affecting pricing are also taken into consideration

during the cost calculation.

Used in Delivery Calculation

You can define a Product Property that affects delivery cost

calculations. For example, you can define several types of paper (for
example, matte, glossy and plain) where each paper type has a
different weight and thus affects the delivery cost.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 96

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Delivery prices are determined during product setup, as in Setting

Up Delivery.

Affects Aggregation - For more information on aggregating orders,

refer to Handling Orders.

Show in Shopping Cart and Order History -you can select if the Global
Property will be displayed in the Shopping Cart and Order History

pages.

Split Shipping per Value Selection- you can determine if the Global
Property can trigger split shipping. When in the Finalize Step of the
ordering process a customer selects a Product Property value, the
system verifies that this value is identical to the values selected for
this Product Property in other products of the same order. If the
values are not identical, the system automatically triggers split
shipping. For example, if a customer ordered two products, both of
which have a Turnaround Time Product Property, and the value of
this property is different for each product (5 days for Product 1 and
10 days for Product 2), then each one of these products will be
shipped separately. In the Storefront, when the Shopping Cart has
items with properties that are set to Split shipping per value selection,
if these properties have the same name but are assigned different
values, the system will show a warning. The warning will also be
displayed if the Shopping Cart contains one item with a property that
is set to Split shipping per value selection, and another item that does
not contain this property.

Availability for each of the above options is indicated in the Global

Product Properties List Page by a green check sign for used property

settings and no indication for unused ones.

5.

Make any necessary modifications as described below:

Input Control: Select the product property type. You can choose from
the following available types of controls:

Text Input a standard, single-line text box that enables the

customer to enter short, free-text input value.
Multiple Text Input similar to the Text Input Control, but

enables the customer to enter several lines of text.

Radio Button List allows the customer to choose a value from a

list of predefined options. This Input Control displays the choice
list to the user as a set of standard radio-style inputs.
Dropdown List similar to the Radio Button List, but displays the

choice list to the user as a standard dropdown control.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 97

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Date Time Picker allows customers to specify a date attribute

for an order. The store administrator can set the DateTime Picker
to function as a Popup (opens when clicked on) or Inline
(always visible). You can also set the date picker to a predefined
period of time by using the Earliest and Latest date options. Use
the Earliest and Latest date options to set predefined dates or
dates relative to an order date (for example: X days after an order
has been made).

HTML Generic allows you to embed personalized HTML in

uStore (in the Markup field) that will be rendered in real-time as
the contents of the dial control. For example, you can embed a
flash object or a Web page. When you embed a flash object, make
sure you fill in its Client ID in the Object ID field. You can use the
following parameters in the markup code:

#DIAL_VALUE# - will be replaced with the value of the dial as

saved in the database.
#DIAL_DISPLAY_NAME# - will be replaced with the name of
the dial as set in Display Name field.
You can also define a Java Script Callback Function in the

Callback Function field, which will be available on the page, and

call it to return a value to uStore.

(Popup) Image Selector allows customers to choose images

from the available Campaign Assets on the uProduce Server or to

upload their own pictures and use them in the Document. When
this control is selected, store administrators can restrict the
width, height and ratio ranges of the uploaded graphic file to
predefined measures. The Image Selector displays all the
available images on the uStore page. The Popup Image Selector
displays all images in a popup window, and only the selected
images in the uStore page.

Extended Image Popup Selector in addition to capabilities

offered by the Image Selector and the Popup Image Selector

(selecting or uploading images), this Input Control allows
customers to edit the uploaded images.

Gallery Image Selector in addition to capabilities offered by the

other Image Selectors (such as, selecting, uploading or cropping
images), this Input Control offers customers enhanced editing
capabilities. For example, the customers can adjust brightness
and contrast, flip and rotate images and control the image
opacity.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 98

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Get Order Properties allows you to add the Order ID

(automatically generated for each order) or the Order Item ID
(automatically generated for each item of this specific order)
values, which are generated automatically, to your product. This
way, an order or an order item can be easily distinguished with
an ID number.
Checkbox allows you to add a checkbox as a product property.
You can set the value that the Dial/property is given when that
checkbox is selected (Value when Checked) or unselected (Value
when Unchecked). You can also define this checkbox as
mandatory by selecting the Customer Must Check checkbox. This
way, customers will not be able to continue shopping unless this
checkbox is selected. For example, you can add a EULA
statement as a product property and ask customers to accept it in
order to continue the shopping process.
Gallery List View allows the customer to choose a value from a
list of predefined options. This Input Control displays the choices
to the user as a list of icons, with names and description.
Gallery Grid View allows the customer to choose a value from

predefined options. This Input Control displays the choices to the

user as a grid of icons, with name and description.

When the dial has no values, take values from this section allows you

to set each propertys default value for all arbitrary properties, and all
value options, including default, for a multi-optional inputs, such as
a Dropdown List. This is done using one or more of the following
options:

Take Values from Last Orders of

This option is relevant for the default value selection only. To

display values used in the previous orders, check this checkbox
and select one of the following options:
Same Product the value this customer gave this Dial in the
previous order of this product.
All Products in Store the value this customer gave this Dial in
the previous order of any other product, which includes this
Dial name and is sold in the same Store.

Take Values from Data Source

This option allows you to set values for single option controls
(Text Input and Multiline Text Input) and the values in multiple
options controls (Radio Button and Dropdown List) with data
derived from a database rather than defining it manually. For

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 99

Setting Up Global Product Properties

example, you can define an input control of type Dropdown List

that is populated with the customers addresses as registered in
the uStore database instead of manually defining each entry of
the list. This way, you can present each store shopper a
personalized list. You can use the predefined uStore databases or
you can define a custom database that conforms to the uStore
database structure.
Note: You can only use either a global Data Source (available for
all stores) or a Data Source that was defined for the specific store
you are configuring. For more information on how to define a
Data Source, refer to Defining Data Sources.
After you select a Data Source from the Data Source list available
for the store you are configuring, you can use the wizard to
define data binding for that Data Source or define it manually by
entering an SQL query.
Figure 72: Take Values from Data Source

You can either use the Wizard option to populate personalized

values from a Data Source or you can set the personalized values
manually by using the Custom option.
If you chose the Wizard to populate the personalized values from
a Data Source, you are required to provide the following
information:
Table or View: select the table or view from which data is
pulled.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 100

Setting Up Global Product Properties

Display Text Field (Multiple Options Input Controls): the text that
is displayed in the input control and is associated with a Value
field. For example, the presented text may be an address while
the associated value field that is passed on to uProduce is a ZIP
code. This selection is available only in multiple input controls.
Value Field: select the field (column) in the table or view that
will be used to populate the input control. For example, you
may have a field in your table or view that stores a recipient
names; select that field to populate the input control with
names from the Recipient column.
Conditions: The wizard enables you to define filters by which
the specific value in the Value Field is pulled. You can use the
following ID filters:
User ID Field - available in the Users table
Store ID Field - available in the Stores table
Product ID Field - available in the Products table
Language ID Field - available in the Culture table
tYou can also use any desired ID filters provided they are
mapped to the above uStore ID filters. If you are defining a
single option input control and the filter you are defining
returns several records, only the first one will be displayed to
the user.
Default Field (Multiple Options Input Controls): select the field
(column) in the table or view that will be used to set the default
value of the input control. Then, enter the specific value in that
field that actually sets the default value. For example, the
default value field can be 'IsDefault' and the actual values that
set the default value can be '1' for 'is default' and '0' for 'not
default'. In this case, you should select 'IsDefault' in the
Default Field list and enter '1' as its value
Override Default Sorting Field (Multiple Options Input Controls):
allows you to sort the input control entries by the order in a
specified table field (or view). The sorting order is determined
by the data type in the selected field, as follows:
lexicographic order for text
alphanumeric order for numbers
chronological order for dates
To manually define the Data Source for personalized values,
select Custom and enter an SQL query in the Query field.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 101

Setting Up Global Product Properties
Figure 73: Take Values from Data Source - Custom

If you are using a single option Input Control such as a Text Box,
you should enter a query that returns a single value. You should
use one or more of the following parameters: @UserID, @StoreID,
@ProductID, @CultureID and @OrderProductID (which is
@OrderItemID).
If you are using a multiple options input control such as a
Dropdown list, you should enter a query that can return several
values. You should use one or more of the following parameters:
@UserID, @StoreID, @ProductID, @CultureID and
@OrderProductID (which is @OrderItemID).

Take Values from Predefine Value/s select this checkbox to

define the default values for single-value field control, and the
values list, including the default value, for multioptional control.
In addition, it enables Spell Checking for textual dials.
Default Value the propertys default value, which may be
overridden by the customer. For multioptional controls, you
can also create a list of values to be used as default values
when necessary. In addition, you may manually add values to
the list by clicking the Add new value link, entering the text to
the relevant textbox and clicking the green check icon. If you
wish to upload a list of values, you may do it using an Excel
file. Please note that if a certain product property that has a
default value is not marked as affecting pricing, the default
value will not be displayed to the user.

Spell Checking - applies only to textual dials and properties

that implement text or multiline text input controls. To use the
spell checker in a textual control, select the Use Spell Check
checkbox, and then select a language from the Language list.
You can select both the Take Values from Data Source and the
Take values from Predefine Value/s options. In that case, if a value

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 102

Setting Up Manufacturers

is missing in the Data Source, it will be taken from the values set
in the predefined list.

Validations The following options are provided:

Mandatory - uStore must confirm that a value is provided by

the customer.
Regular Expression uStore supports industry-standard
regular expressions. You can choose a regular expression
template that will be used to validate the value provided by
the customer. The Select Template list provides common
examples of regular expressions such as a Positive Integer, US
Phone Number, etc. You can adapt this list to your needs by
configuring it in the database. The Error Message field allows
you add a textual message in case validation fails. For
information on working with regular expressions, see: http://
www.regular-expressions.info/ and http://
www.regexlib.com/
Range - specify the minimum and maximum values allowed
for the value provided by the customer.
6.

Click Save to save the global product property. The global product
property appears in the Product Properties editing section, in the Available
Properties list. All properties that are affecting the price are displayed in
the Pricing Setup page of each product as well (see Setting Up the
Product Pricing for Single Products).

Setting Up Manufacturers
uStore allows setting up several manufacturers for store products. These
manufacturers will be assigned to produce the relevant products, and their
address will be considered as the Pickup Address in the customer's order.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 103

Setting Up Manufacturers

To add a manufacturer:
1.

In the Presets view, click the Manufacturer Setup link. The Manufacturer
Setup page is displayed:
Figure 74: Manufacturer Setup

2.

Click the New Manufacturer link.

The Add new manufacturer page is displayed:
Figure 75: Add New Manufacturer page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 104

Setting Up Manufacturers

3.

Fill in the required fields:

Setting

Description

Manufacturer
display name

Mandatory. The name of the manufacturer as it

will be displayed in Storefront.

Description

A short description.

Address

Fill in all the required fields for the manufacturers

address. The manufacturers address will be
considered as a Pickup Address in a store
offering delivery services.

Validate Address
with Carriers

Manufacturers address must be validated if your

store is using delivery carriers such as UPS or
Fedex.

Validate account Select the UPS or Fedex account in the drop-down

list and click the Validate link.

4.

Click Save. The new manufacturer is added to the Manufacturers list.

Managing Manufacturers
The Manufacturers Setup page displays the list of Manufacturers defined in
the system.
For each Manufacturer, the following fields are displayed:

Name: Manufacturers display name

Description: Manufacturers description

Assigned Products: the number of products assigned to this Manufacturer

(Figure 299). The number of assigned products is a link. Clicking this link
opens the Manufacturer products window where you can see what
products in what store are assigned to this manufacturer.

Figure 76: Manufacturer products window

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 105

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

Deleting Manufacturers
To delete a Manufacturer:
1.

In the Manufacturer Setup page, click the Delete

icon. Please note that
you cannot delete a Manufacturer if it has products assigned to it. In this
case, the Manufacturer deletion popup will be displayed where you will
be prompted to reassign the products to another Manufacturer before
deletion:
Figure 77: Manufacturer Deletion

2.

Click OK. The manufacturer will be deleted from the list.

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

uStore allows you to localize the following content:

Static store text (for example, titles, instructions) these localizations are
defined in the Presets view.

Dynamic store text (for example, Product Groups, Products) these

localization options are defined in the Stores view and are specific for
each store (see Figure 70).

Localizing the Static Text

The Localization page in the Presets view enables superusers to localize the
Storefront to any language as reflected in system messages, labels, menu
items, etc (i.e., static items). The static text is the text that appears /is available
in all uStore stores. Administrators are able to select the locale they want to
use when they log in to uStore Back Office. See Logging in to uStore Back
Office.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 106

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office
Figure 78: Localization Table, Culture List Page

The Culture List that opens when you click the Localization link in the Presets
view contains all the languages that are currently defined in your uStore
system for the Storefront localization. The cultures with missing localizations
are marked with the
icon. For each language a flag, a full culture name
(French-France), a culture code (fr-FR) and a language name in the native
language (Franais) are displayed. Clicking the Edit pencil icon allows you to
edit these definitions.
You can add a new language, edit language properties, translate Storefront
labels and menus to the selected language and delete a language. Please note
that out-of-the box cultures and cultures already used in stores do not have
an option to be deleted.
To set cultures for the Back Office application, click the Set Admin Cultures
link and select the languages you want available on the Back Office Login
page.
Figure 79: Admin Cultures Setting Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 107

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

Adding a Language to uStore

To add a language to uStore:
1.

Click the New link in the Culture List page (Figure 78).
The Add New Language page is displayed:
Figure 80: Culture Sections, Select New Language Page

If you do not find the desired culture, or if you wish to use several
dialects of a language, and thus address different segments of the
population (for example, youngsters vs. elders, etc.), you can create a new
culture or a new instance of a language. For example, you may want to
create two stores for different dialects of the en-US language. In this case,
you should add two instances of the en-US languages (as described
above) and distinguish each with a different name. To create a new
language or a new instance of a language, see Setting Up the Culture List
Table. Then, you can localize each store with a different dialect using
uStore Localization Tool as described in Localizing System Tables.
2.

Select the language you want to add from the list and click Save.
The Culture Sections page is displayed where you can now localize uStore
tables with the newly added language (see Localizing System Tables).

To edit properties of an existing language:

1.

In the Culture List page (Figure 78), click the Edit icon (
) next to the
language you want to edit. The Culture Edit page is displayed.
Figure 81: Edit Culture

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 108

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

2.

The Culture Edit page includes the following fields:

Field

Description

C ul t u r e Co d e

Culture name, using the .NET

conventions. For example, enter en-US
for English - United States. For more
details, go to:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/
default.asp?url=/library/en-us/cpref/
html/
frlrfSystemGlobalizationCultureInfoClass
Topic.asp

C ul t u r e N a m e

The name of the Culture that will be

displayed to the store administrator. For
example, English-United States.

Flag File Name

The flag file name you wish to assign to

this culture. The flag files are located in:

...uStore\App\CustomerApp\
Images\flags.
The flag file icon will be available for
selection in the Storefront Login page
and in the top right corner of all other
pages.
Language

3.

The culture name in the native language.

Click Save.

Changing the uStore Welcome Message

When you first log in to a store, you are presented with a Welcome page
displaying a personalized welcome message (Figure 2). By default the English
message says Hello {FirstName}, displaying the first name of the user logged
in to the store. You can modify this message to include other user properties.

To change the uStore welcome message:

1.

In the Presets view, click the Localization link. The Culture List page
(Figure 78) is displayed.

2.

Click the Translate icon

next to the language for which you want to
modify the user properties displayed. The Culture Sections page is
displayed (Figure 83).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 109

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

3.

Click the Resources link and search for the English-US text Hello or ID 345
in the Culture Edit: English en-US Resources page:
Figure 82: Culture Edit: English en-US Resources page

4.

The default text is Hello {0}, where {0} represents First Name. Click the
Edit icon (

) to add other user properties:

No.

User Property

{0}

First Name

{1}

Last Name

{2}

Job Title

{3}

E-mail Address

{4}

Department

5.

Click Save.

Localizing System Tables

For each language in uStore, you can localize the uStore tables. To localize the
uStore system tables, click the Translate icon
next to a language in the
Localization Table, Culture List page (Figure 78). If you create a new language,
you will be automatically redirected to the Culture Sections page (Figure 83)
once you click Save to save the new culture (Figure 80).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 110

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office
Figure 83: Culture Sections, Table List Page

The Culture Sections, Table List page lists all available system tables of the
uStore system that can be localized. The tables that have missing localizations
will be marked with the

icon.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 111

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

To localize a table with missing localizations, click its link. The Localization
page for the selected system table is displayed.
Figure 84: Culture Edit Page
Click a column header
to sort search results.

Use filters as search

fields to narrow down
search results

Enter localized text

here

Click Edit
More to
disclose more
editing options

The Culture Edit page lists all of the text strings that are available for a selected
system table, their ID number and an entry field where you can enter text in
the local language. That text will be displayed in the store instead of the
default English text.
You can filter down the presented text string list by using the filtering option
at the top of each column. To apply a filter to the list, click the Filter icon (
)
next to the required column header and select the filter from the displayed
list. Some filters allow you to further pinpoint the desired results by
specifying a value or a text string of one or more required fields in the records
returned from the database. For example, the Contains filter allows you to
enter a text string to look for in the listed records.
You can sort any column in the resulted record list in ascending or
descending order by clicking the required column header. Clicking it once
will sort the list in ascending order; clicking it again will sort it in descending
order.
You can display all unlocalized records identified by the [no
localization] label in their Localized Text field by clicking the Show only
items without localization link.
Except for the Email Template localization table, all tables can be localized by
simply entering new text in the local language. To do so, click the Edit link to
the right of the text string you want to replace and enter the new text in the
box that appears. You can also enter the text directly in the Localized Text
column.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 112

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office

If the record you want to localize contains several localizable fields, click the
Edit More link to open all the linked localization text fields and localize them
as necessary.
Figure 85: Email Template Table, Culture Edit Page - Edit More Option

For detailed explanations on how to configure the Email Template table, refer
to Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism.

Exporting and Importing Localizations

uStore offers you the possibility to export localizable application strings into
an Excel file. After this file is translated, it can be then imported back to
uStore.

Exporting Localizations
To export the localizable strings into an Excel file:
1.

Click the Export link in the Localization Culture List page (Figure 78).
The Culture Export page is displayed:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 113

Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office
Figure 86: Culture Export

2.

Select the source culture (<language> - <country>) from the Source

Culture drop-down list.

3.

Select the target culture from the Target Culture drop-down list.

4.

If you wish to export all the source strings including those that have
already been localized, click the Download Entire Translation link. If you
wish to export only the strings that have not been localized to the selected
target language, click Download Missing Translation.

Importing Localizations
To import the translated Excel file:
1.

Click the Import link in the Localization Culture List page (Figure 78).
The Culture Import page is displayed:
Figure 87: Culture Import

2.

Select the target culture in the Target Culture drop-down list.

3.

Click Browse to locate the translated Excel file.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 114

Using the Proxy Setup Utility

4.

Make sure you backed up your database before importing the

translations.

5.

Click Update Translation. The new translations will be inserted into the
database.

Using the Proxy Setup Utility

The Proxy Setup Utility is designed to help store superusers to configure
uStores proxy server (if one is installed) with the appropriate ISAPI_Rewrite
rules to support uStores Friendly URL feature (see Enabling Store-Friendly
URL).
The Proxy Setup utility configures the Reverse Proxy server, behind which
uStore is located; therefore, you must run the utility on the Reverse Proxy
server itself.
In addition, you must also update the internal routing table in the Windows
hosts file to make the domain name point to the uStore server.

To run the Proxy Setup utility:

1.

In the Presets view, click the Proxy Setup link. The Proxy Setup page is
displayed:
Figure 88: Proxy Setup Page

2.

Click Download Script. A message window is displayed, warning you that

this action should take place ONLY on the proxy server.

3.

Click OK to proceed. The File Download Security Warning is displayed:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 115

Using the Proxy Setup Utility
Figure 89: uProduce Proxy VB Script File Security Warning

4.

Click Open. The Internet Explorer Security Warning is displayed:

Figure 90: Internet Explorer - Security Warning

5.

Click Run to execute the script file.

6.

Click OK, on the XMPie Proxy notification window:

Figure 91: uProduce Proxy Update Confirmation window

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 116

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

To update the hosts file:

1.

Go to %systemroot%\system32\drivers\etc\hosts folder and open

the hosts file with Notepad.
Please note that since the hosts file is write-protected in Microsoft
Windows Server 2008, you might receive an error message when trying
to modify it. To work around this issue, perform the following steps:
a.

Click Start >All Programs >Accessories.

b.

Right-click Notepad and then click Run as administrator.

c.

If you are prompted for an administrator password or for a

confirmation, type the password, or click Allow or Yes.

d. Open the hosts file and make the necessary changes.

e.
2.

Click Save on the File menu.

In the internal routing table, enter domain names of all the stores that
have a public domain name and map each domain name to the uStore
internal IP address.
For example, 192.168.4.17

www.MyDomain.com.

The domain name of the store can be found in Store Setup > Enable Store
Friendly URL section > Store Domain field.

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

You can use the System Setup page to customize uStore tables. System Setup
allows you to view the uStore database tables that provide the foundation for
your online stores and configure these tables as needed before you start
working.
To configure system tables, you must be familiar with the uStore software
and its functionality.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 117

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 92: Presets View - System Setup

The System Setup tables include:

Tables that must be configured before you start working. For example,
the Mall table defines various servers in your system, such as the

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 118

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

uProduce server and the SMTP server, which must be configured before
you can operate an online store.

Tables that may be used as they are, but are likely to be adapted to better
address your specific needs. For example, the Country table contains a
list of countries that may be enabled or disabled as required.

You can enable or disable optional table records by defining their Status field
as either Active or Inactive (respectively).
In addition, the System Setup enables superusers to localize the storefront as
reflected in system messages, labels, menu items, etc. Tables that provide a
Localization option include the Edit Localized Text link in their Edit page.
Clicking this link will display the Localization page for the selected table, in
which you can select a table record from the list and edit its corresponding
page items. The localized text will be visible to the customer at the Storefront.
In addition, the Edit Localized Text (Add New) procedure must be used to
make new records available for use in the Mall (for example, see Setting Up
the Culture List Table).
System Setup provides access to the following system tables. The asterisk
mark (*) next to a table indicates that the table can be localized to support
your local language:

Country Table (*): see Setting Up the Country Table

Culture List Table: see Setting Up the Culture List Table

Delivery Package Table: see Setting Up the Delivery Package Table

Delivery Provider Table: see Setting Up the Delivery Provider Table

Delivery Services Table: see Setting Up the Delivery Services Table

Global Address Table: see Setting Up the Global Address Table

Global Configurations Table: see Setting Up the Global Configurations

Table

JDF Node Set: see Setting Up JDF Node Sets.

JDF Nodes: see Setting Up JDF Nodes.

Message Template Table (*): see Setting Up the Message Template Table

Message Template SQL Table: see Setting Up the Message Template SQL
Table

Mall Table (*): see Setting Up the Mall Table

Order Handling Action Table: see Setting Up the Order Handling Action
Table

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 119

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Order Handling Status Table: see Setting Up the Order Handling Status
Table

Paper Size Table: see Setting Up the Paper Size Table

Prepress Workflow: see Creating Prepress Workflows.

Prepress Workflow Provider: see Setting Up Prepress Workflow

Providers.

Province Table (*): see Setting Up the Province Table

Recipient List Transformation: see Transforming a Recipient List to XSLT

Report Table: see Setting Up the Report Table

Report Parameter Table: see Setting Up the Report Parameter Table

Tax Group Table: see Setting Up the Tax Group Table

USADATA Account Table: see Setting Up the USADATA Account Table

To customize a system table:

In the System Setup page, click the name of the table you want to edit.
The Table page is displayed:
Figure 93: Example Table Page - Currency

The Table page lists all the table entries that were defined for the selected
table. You can:

Add a new table entry - click Add New.

Note: You can add table entries to any system table except the table, which
includes a single hard-coded table entry that can only be edited.

View a table entry - click View

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 120

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Edit a table entry - click Edit

Delete a table entry from the selected System Table - click Delete

Note that the Mall table must not be deleted.

Setting Up the Country Table

The Country table includes information regarding the country in which your
store(s) and your potential customers are located.
Note: If a country is marked as supported for a certain store, it cannot be
deleted from the Country table.
Figure 94: Country Table - New/Edit Page

The Country Table New/Edit page includes the following fields and selections:
Field

Description

Name

Country name.

Co de

Country code. For example, enter US for United States.

Display Order

(optional) Unique number that will determine the location

of this country in the relevant dropdown lists in the
system.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 121

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Status

Select whether to activate this country table entry

(Active) or deactivate it (Inactive). If the Status is set
to Active, the country will be available for selection in
the Supported Locations section of the Appearance
tab in the Store Setup page (see Figure 174). If the
country is already in use for a specific store, you cannot
change its status to Inactive.

Editing the Country Table Localized Text

1.

Click the Edit Localized Text link in the Country Edit or View pages. The
Localization page for the selected Country table is displayed.

2.

) to edit an existing
Click Add New to add a new localized text or Edit (
one. The selected tables Localization page is displayed.
Note: You should add a localized text for each language that you want to
use in your stores.

3.

Fill in the Name field in your local language.

4.

Click Save to save your settings.

Setting Up the Culture List Table

The Culture List table (Figure 83) allows you to add a new language to
support your region. It is also possible to use several dialects by creating
multiple instances of a language and, thus, address different segments of the
population (for example, youngsters vs. seniors, etc).
For example, you can create two stores for different dialects of the US
language. In this case, you should add two instances of the en-US languages
(see Adding a Language to uStore) and distinguish each with a different
name. Then you can localize each store with a different dialect using uStore
Localization Tool (see Localizing System Tables).

To create a new language or a new instance of a language:

1.

In the Presets main view, select System Setup.

2.

In the System Setup list, select Culture List. The list of all defined
languages is displayed:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 122

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 95: System Setup - Culture List Page

3.

In the Culture List page (Figure 78), click Add New to create a new
language or language instance or edit an existing language or language
instance.
Figure 96: Culture Table - Edit Culture Page

4.

Fill in/edit the following fields:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 123

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Field

Description

C ul t u r e c od e

Culture name, using the .NET

conventions. For example, enter en-US
for English - United States. For more
details, go to:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/
default.asp?url=/library/en-us/cpref/
html/
frlrfSystemGlobalizationCultureInfoClass
Topic.asp

Full Name

The name of the Culture that will be

displayed to the store administrator. For
example, English-United States.

FlagFileName

Enter the flag file name you wish to

assign to this culture. The flag files are
located in:

...uStore\App\CustomerApp\
Images\flags.
The flag file icon will be available for
selection in the Storefront Login page
and in the top right corner of all other
pages.

5.

6.

Click Save. The new/edited culture will be displayed in the Culture List
page.
Click the Edit button

next to the newly added culture. The Culture

Table - Edit Culture page is displayed.

Figure 97: Culture Table - Edit Culture Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 124

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Note: You can override the default culture settings for a specific store by
setting up the store attributes, as described in Determining the Store
Appearance.

7.

Click the Edit Localized Text button. The System Setup - Culture List
Localization page is displayed.
Figure 98: Culture List Localization

8.

Click the Add New button. The Culture List Localization page is displayed:
Figure 99: Culture List Localization

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 125

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

9.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

C ul t u r e I D

Enter the CultureID as specified in

Presets>Localization>Localization
Culture List page (see Figure 78).
The Culture ID indicates the language
selected for uStore localization.

CultureDisplayName

Enter the culture display name in the

language that corresponds to the defined
CultureID.

10. Click Save.

Setting Up the Delivery Package Table

The Delivery Package table allows you to add new packages to your store that
can be used for delivery.
Figure 100: Delivery Packages List Page

uStore is shipped with several FedEx packages that are commonly used by
customers as shown in the Delivery Packages List page. However, you can add
more packages by clicking the Add New link.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 126

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 101: Delivery Packages - Add New Package Page

The Delivery Packages - Add New Package page includes the following fields:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the package to be displayed during Product Setup,

as described in Setting Up Delivery.

H e ig h t , L e n g t h,
Width

Package dimensions. The Dimensions measurement units

are determined in the Length Unit field.

T a re W e i g ht

Package weight. The Tare Weights measurement units are

determined in the Tare Weight Unit field.

M a x C on t e n t
Weight

Maximum loading weight allowed. The Max Content

Weights measurement units are determined in the Max
Content Unit field.

Co de

Enter a carrier package code. For example, enter FedEx

package code to add a FedEx standard package or enter
YOURPACKAGING (case sensitive) to add a custom
package.

Custom

Specify whether the package is a custom-made package or

a standard carrier package.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 127

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up the Delivery Provider Table

The Delivery Provider table lists the predefined delivery providers in the
uStore system. These providers are: FedEx, Manual Mailing and Manual
Shipping. Using the Delivery Provider table, you can only disable a
predefined delivery provider.
Figure 102: Delivery Providers List Page

To disable a delivery provider, click the Edit button

next to it and then
replace the value 1 (Active) with the value 0 (Inactive) in the Status field.
The value 2 means that the current delivery provider has been deleted.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 128

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 103: Delivery Provider Page

Setting Up the Delivery Services Table

The Delivery Services table lists all of the predefined delivery services in the
uStore system. These services are: FedEx and UPS delivery services, Mail
Drop (Manual Mailing) and Manual Shipping - Standard and Overnight.
Using the Delivery Services table, you can add more delivery services.
Figure 104: Delivery Services List Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 129

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

uStore is shipped with several out-of-the-box delivery services for FedEx,

UPS, manual mailing and manual shipping, that are commonly used by
customers, as shown in the Delivery Services List page (Figure 104). However,
you can add more delivery services by clicking the Add New link.
Figure 105: Delivery Services - Add New Service Page

The Delivery Services - Add New Delivery Service page includes the following
fields:
Field

Description

D e l iv e r y P ro v i d e r Select the delivery provider type you want to add. Available

options are:
FedEx
UPS
Manual Mailing
Manual Shipping
Void Delivery - no delivery specified for this service
Status

Select Active to enable this service in your store or Inactive

to disable it.

Name

Name of the delivery service

Description

Description of the delivery service

Co de

If you are using an online carrier service, enter a delivery

service code as provided by the carrier.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 130

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

T ra c k i n g L i nk
Format

Enter the format of the tracking link URL that will be used to
keep track of packages. Use {0} as a placeholder for the
tracking number. If you are using FedEx or UPS as your delivery
provider, specify the URL that will be used to track packages, as
provided by the respective delivery provider. When configuring
a Manual Shipping service, use tracking link format to have
online tracking.

Fixed Address

Fixed Address is applicable to Manual Shipping services; it is

used in tax calculation. Select Null if orders are shipped to
customers. Select the store location if you want to implement
pickup at store. If an address is provided, the tax will be
calculated according to that address; otherwise, it will be
calculated according to the customers shipping address. The
Store Location information is retrieved from the Global Address
table. See Setting Up the Message Template Table.

Setting Up the Global Address Table

The Global Address table includes information regarding your store(s)
location(s). The information you enter here is used for online delivery
providers (that is, FedEx and UPS) and for implementing a Pickup at Store
delivery service for the Manual Delivery provider.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 131

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 106: Global Address Table - New/Edit Page

The Global Address Table - New/Edit page includes the following fields and
selections:
Field

Description

Display Order

N.A.

A d d re s s 1 ,
A d d re s s 2

Store address.

C i t y, S t a t e , Z i p ,
Co u n t ry

Enter (select) your store location. Note that the Global

Address location is not restricted to the locations supported
by the store (see Supported Locations field in Defining the
Store Locale).

Phone, Fax

Phone number and fax number.

Person Name

Contact name for customer service.

Company

Your company name.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 132

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up the Global Configurations Table

The Global Configuration table defines settings that apply for the entire
system.
Figure 107: Global Configurations Table

The uStore system comes with a set of pre-configured global configurations.

Warning: It is not recommended that you modify. global configurations.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 133

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the ProductDownloadExpirationDays Global

Configuration
To set product download expiration period:
1.

Click the Edit icon next to the ProductDownloadExpirationDays

configuration to modify its settings. The Global Configurations edit page is
displayed:
Figure 108: Global Configurations - Edit Page

2.

The Global Configurations edit page includes the following fields:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the Global Configuration.

Description

Description of the Global Configuration.

V a l ue

Enter the number of days after which the product

download option will expire. Leaving this field empty
means there is no expiration period for product
download. Entering a zero value will make the product
expire immediately.

A p p l ic a t i o n T y p e

In the drop-down list, select AdminApp if your Global

Configuration applies for the Back Office application or
CustomApp if it applies to the Storefront.

3.

Click Save.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 134

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the MinimumAllowedDPI Global Configuration

When end-users upload their own documents in a Composite Product, the
uploaded documents have a preflight procedure that checks the quality of the
uploaded file. One of the values checked, is the DPI of images included in the
document. The MinimumAllowedDPI parameter sets the minimum DPI
allowed. A warning is displayed if an image has a DPI less than the value of
the parameter.

To set the minimum DPI allowed for the print product:

1.

Click the Edit icon next to the MinimumAllowedDPI configuration to

modify its settings. The Global Configurations edit Page is displayed:
Figure 109: Global Configurations - Edit Page

2.

The Global Configurations edit page includes the following fields:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the Global Configuration.

Description

Description of the Global Configuration.

V a l ue

Enter the minimum allowed DPI for the print product.

Leaving this field empty or a value of 0 means there is
no minimum DPI.

A p p l ic a t i o n T y p e

In the drop-down list, select AdminApp if your Global

Configuration applies for the Back Office application or
CustomApp if it applies to the Storefront. If neither
option is selected, the application will apply to both the
Back Office and the Storefront.

3.

Click Save.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 135

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the DefaultCompositeQuantity Global

Configuration
When placing an order for a Composite Product, the Total Price displayed in
the Storefront is based on the default number of copies. The
DefaultCompositeQuantity parameter enables changing this default value.

To set the default quantity for Composite Products:

1.

Click the Edit icon next to the DefaultCompositeQuantity configuration to

modify its settings. The Global Configurations edit page is displayed:
Figure 110: Global Configurations - Edit Page

2.

The Global Configurations edit page includes the following fields:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the Global Configuration.

Description

Description of the Global Configuration.

V a l ue

Enter the default value for the quantity of Composite

Items that can be ordered. If you leave this field empty
the default value is 1. The Quantity can be changed in
the Store when finalizing an order.

A p p l ic a t i o n T y p e

This Global Configuration applies to the Storefront, so

CustomApp should be selected.

3.

Click Save.
Note: If the minimum limitation of a Composite Product is greater than the
default quantity defined, the minimum quantity allowed will be displayed in
the storefront as the default number of copies.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 136

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up JDF Node Sets

JDF (Job Definition Format) is an industry standard designed to simplify
information exchange between different applications and systems in and
around the Graphic Arts Industry.
uStore enables you to create JDF files that are compatible with the Xerox
FreeFlow JDF conventions and other 3rd party JDF-enabled print devices.
For more information on JDF specifications, see the JDF Specification
Documents page at http://www.cip4.org/documents/jdf_specifications/
index.html.

If you assign a prepress workflow to a product in your store, when the job is
sent to print, uStore creates a JDF file that accompanies the job and defines its
printing requirements.
JDF jobs consist of a set of nodes that specify the production steps required to
create the end product. The nodes are arranged in a hierarchical tree
structure.
When you set up your product properties, if you want them to be supported
by JDF, you need to associate each property to a JDF node.

Adding New JDF Nodes

By default, uStore includes JDF nodes for several paper types, folding and
color settings (color or grays ca le). These nodes are available when you set up
JDF requirements in the Product Properties page.
If your job includes additional requirements, such as binding and imposition,
you need to create additional JDF node sets.
To ensure that your product is printed according to the JDF specifications,
make sure that you follow these steps:
1.

Create the required property in the Product Properties page.

See Setting Up Product Properties.

2.

Create the new JDF Node Set.

The JDF Node Set that you create is added to the list of options available
when you set up JDF requirements in the Product Properties page. See To
add new JDF node sets:.

3.

Create the new JDF Node.

See Setting Up JDF Nodes.

4.

Assign the required JDF Node set to the property options in the Product
Properties page (Figure 111).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 137

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

See how to set up input controls for drop-down lists, radio buttons and
gallery list/grid view list in the section Setting Up Customer Input
Controls.
Note: You can only set up JDF nodes for the following customer input
controls:
- Drop-down lists
- Radio buttons
- Gallery list or grid view lists
Figure 111: Assigning a JDF node set to a property

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 138

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

To add new JDF node sets:

1.

Select Presets>System Setup>JDF Node Set.

Figure 112: JDF Node Set page with default JDF node sets

2.

On the JDF Node Set page, click Add New.

3.

In the Display Name box, enter a name for the node set. For example, if
your product needs a 3-hole ring binding, enter RingBinding.

4.

Click Save.
The Node Set is added to the list and is available in the Product
Properties page when you set up customer input controls of the following
types: Drop-down lists, radio buttons, and gallery/grid view lists.

To make sure that uStore sends the correct information when it creates the
JDF file, you need to set up the JDF Node with the required XML code.

Setting Up JDF Nodes

After you create the required JDF node set, you need to add the XML code
that defines the property parameters.
When the JDF node represents an attribute, add a @ at the beginning or the
XML snippet.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 139

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

To add a new JDF node:

1.

Select Presets>System Setup>JDF Node.

Figure 113: JDF Node page

2.

On the JDF Node page, click Add New.

3.

In the JDF Node Set ID list, select the JDF Node Set that you want to set
up. For example, if you create a JDF Node Set for 3-hole ring binder,
select the RingBinding node set.

4.

In the Node XML box, enter the XML code for the new JDF node. For
example, enter @HoleType="R3-generic".
You can find the required XML code in the JDF Specifications document.
To access an online version of this document, go to http://
www.cip4.org/documents/jdf_specifications/html2/JDF1.4a.htm.

5.

In the Node Target Xpath box, enter the location of node in the JDF file. For
example, the HoleType attribute should be located at
//ns:ResourcePool/ns:Media.

6.

Click Save.
The new node set is added to the list. Every time a product includes this
property option, the XML code will be added to the JDF file.

For your reference, uStore saves all JDF files at \\[ServerName]\App\JDF.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 140

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up the Mall Table

The Mall table defines your uStore connectivity parameters, including the
uProduce connection and the proxy and SMTP servers details, where
applicable. You can also define an alternative Welcome page for your stores.
The Mall page includes a single hard-coded table entry that can only be
edited. Do not add a new table entry to this system table or delete this table.
Figure 114: Mall Table - Edit Page

The Mall Table - Edit page includes the following fields:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the Mall.

u P r od u c e S e r v e r
IP

An IP address or a domain name of the uProduce base

server.

u P r od u c e
Customer

uProduce Customer Name, to which uStore logs in.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 141

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Proxy
Proxy
Proxy
Proxy

Address,
P or t ,
L og o n ,
Password

If you use a proxy server, these are the details of the

proxy server, behind which uStore is located.
Please note that these fields refer to the Proxy Server
that acts as an intermediary between a workstation user
and the Internet to ensure security, administrative
control and caching service. This Proxy Server is not the
same as the Helicon Proxy Server.

Status

Must be set to Active. Setting this selection to

Inactive, deactivates uStore.

SMTP
SMTP
SMTP
SMTP

The details of the server used to send email messages

from uStore:

Server,
Port,
User,
P a s s w or d

Email server (required)

Port (Default: 25)
User
Password

W e l c om e P a g e U R L , You can change the default Welcome page of uStore to

any other uniquely designed Welcome page. Doing so
W e l c om e P a g e S q l
requires you to enter the new page URL and an SQL
select statement. This will be the default Welcome page
for all stores in the Mall.
u S t or e S e r v e r I P

The IP of the uStore server

u P r od u c e U s e r

The user name of the uProduce user. Please note that

the store will not work properly if the user is deleted

u P r od u c e
Password

The password of the uProduce user. Please note that the

store will not work properly if the password is changed.

Logout URL

The URL of a page that is displayed after logout.

uProduce link

Select Active if you wish to display a link to uProduce

when clicking the Presets tab. To hide the link to
uProduce, select Inactive.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 142

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the Mall Table Localized Text

1.

Click the Edit Localized Text link in the Mall Edit or View pages. The
Localization page for the selected Mall table is displayed.

2.

) to edit an existing
Click Add New to add a new localized text or Edit (
one. The selected tables Localization page is displayed.
Note: You should add a localized text for each language you want to use in
the Back Office application.

3.

Fill in the Name, Description and Order Confirmation Text fields in your
local language.

4.

Click Save to save your settings.

Setting Up the Message Template Table

The Message Template table contains various kinds of email message
templates that can be selected later on when sending email is enabled as a
response to system events (see Setting Up Triggers).
You can create new message templates by clicking the Add New button.
Figure 115: Message Template Table - New/Edit Page

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 143

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

The Message Template Table New/Edit page includes the following fields and
selections:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the email message template that will appear in the

Select Email Template list of the Trigger Setup, New/
Edit Trigger page, see Figure 144.

Sender Address

Email address, to which customers will be able to reply upon

delivery of the email message that uStore sends.

Sender Display
Name

Name of the sender that will appear in the header of the

email message sent to customers.

E v e nt P o i n t

Event corresponding to this email template. Events that

trigger actions can be selected in the Trigger Setup, New/
Edit Trigger page, as in Figure 144.

Example Message

Enter an example text of the resulting message body. For

example, This message was sent to you by uStore.

Action

An action that will trigger this email message.

After setting up the Message Template table, you must set up the localized
text for the newly created message template (even if the new message
templates language is English).
To complete the creation of a new message template, you should also set the
corresponding message template SQL in the Message Template SQL table, as
described in Setting Up the Message Template SQL Table.

To edit the localized text for a message template:

1.

In the Message Template main page, click the

(View) button or the
(Edit) button next to the message template whose localized text you want
to set.
The Message Template Edit/View page is displayed.

2.

Click the Edit Localized Text link located at the top right side of the page.
The Message Template Localization page is displayed.

3.

Click the
to edit.

(Edit) button next to the message template culture you want

The Message Template Localization page for the selected message

template is displayed.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 144

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 116: Message Template Localization, Edit Page for a Selected Message
Template

The Message Template Localization Edit page includes the following fields
and selections:
Field

Description

C ul t u r e

Select the culture to which this localization applies.

N a m e , D e s c r i p t i o n Enter a name and a description for the message

template in the local language.
M e s s a g e B od y

XSL for the e-mail body in the local language.

M e s s a g e S u b j e ct

XSL for the e-mail subject in the local language.

Setting Up the Message Template SQL Table

The Message Template SQL table should be set to support the creation of email
message templates. SQL queries are used to generate XML code that is, in
turn, used by the XSL to create a message in HTML format.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 145

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 117: Message Template SQL Table - New/Edit Page

The Message Template SQL Table New/Edit page includes the following fields:
Field

Description

Message Template
Id

ID number of the message template associated with this

SQL.

SQL Text

SQL statement. For further details, refer to Setting Up the

uStore Messaging Mechanism.

Name

Node name in the XML file that will be generated. The

node name must be unique per message template.

Setting Up the Order Handling Action Table

The Order Handling Action table enables you to add actions to the default
Action list in the Orders view. See Handling Orders.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 146

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 118: Order Handling Action Table - New/Edit Page

The Order Handling Action Table New/Edit page includes the following fields
and selections:
Field

Description

N a m e , D e s c r i p t i o n Name and description of the Action item.

From Status,
To Status

Select the transition origin and destination to which the

action refers.

Display Name

Name of the action as it appears in the Orders view.

Display Order

Unique number that will determine the location of this

action in the Action list of the Orders view.

D e f a u l t A ct io n

Select True if this action is the default one. Otherwise,

select False.

Annotation
Required

Select whether to force administrators to annotate to a

state transition.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 147

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

A c t i o n S t r i ng

Indicate the class that is associated with this action.

Status

Select whether to activate this action (Active) or

deactivate it (Inactive).

Assembly Name

Indicates the assembly in which the actions code resides.

P r o c e s s I n C l u s t e r Select True if you want all selected items in the Orders

List page to be sent as a cluster or separately to the
action.
Display In Action
Combo

Select whether to display this action in the Action list of

the Orders view.

Execute State
T ra n s i t i o n

Select whether to record a state transition. Note that

True must be selected if you want to record state
transition annotations. See Annotation Required selection
above.

Setting Up the Order Handling Status Table

The Order Handling Status table enables you to add queues to the Orders view
(see Handling Orders).
Figure 119: Order Handling Status Table - New/Edit Page

The Order Handling Status Table New/Edit page includes the following fields
and selections:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 148

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Field
Name

Description
The name of the queue that is visible to the
administrator in the Orders view.

Description

Description of the queue.

Customer App
Display Name

The name of the queue to be displayed in the Order

History page in the Storefront application.
Using different names for queues in the Back Office and
the Storefront applications enables you to hide internal
store procedures from customers.
For example, you can cluster several queues (for
example, queues A, B and C) in the Back Office
application to a unique Customer queue (for example,
D). As a result, in the Order History page, customers
will not be able to see the exact status of an order as it
appears in the Back Office application (A, B, C); rather
they will see the specific order status you have enabled
(D).

Display Order

Enter a unique number that will determine the location

of this queue in the Queue list in the Orders view.

Status

Select whether to activate this order queue (Active) or

deactivate it (Inactive). Do not deactivate queues that
contain orders.

G ri d V i e w X m l

For details, refer to Managing the Order Lists View.

Setting Up the Paper Size Table

The Paper Size table lists all the predefined paper sizes in the store. This list is
used when configuring the output paper size of Upload Products. Using the
Paper Size table you can add more paper sizes.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 149

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 120: Paper Size List Page

To add more paper sizes click the Add New link.

Figure 121: Paper Size- Add New Paper Size

The Paper Size- Add New Paper Size page includes the following fields:
Field

Description

Paper Size ID

Automatically assigned

Display Name

The name of the paper size as it will appear in uStore. It is

visible in the storefront when validating a mismatch between
the uploaded paper size and the definition of the Upload
Product.

Width (mm)

The width of the page in mm.

H e ig h t ( m m )

The height of the page in mm.

Status

Select Active to enable this service in you store or Inactive to

disable it.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 150

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up Prepress Workflow Providers

uStore enables you to set up two types of workflow providers:

Xerox FreeFlow: Provides seamless integration with the Xerox FreeFlow

Core application and the Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager. The Xerox
FreeFlow workflow providers enable you to associate workflows defined
in the Xerox FreeFlow Core or Process Manager with uStore products or
product profiles.

Manual: Enables you to export your JDF files to hot folders.

Accessing Xerox FreeFlow Core from Within uStore

Because Xerox FreeFlow Core is a web application, you can add a link to the
application directly from the Presets menu.
Figure 122: Presets menu with links to Xerox FreeFlow workflow providers

For details on how to add these links, see the procedure below.

To add a Xerox FreeFlow workflow provider:

1.

Select Presets>System Setup>Prepress Workflow Provider.

Figure 123: Prepress Workflow Provider page

2.

On the Prepress Workflow Provider page, click Add New.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 151

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 124: Add new Prepress Workflow Provider page

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for the provider.

4.

In the Provider Type list, select Xerox FreeFlow.

5.

In the Gateway URL, enter the required port as follows:

To connect to a Xerox Process Manager, type http://[ServerName] or

[IP_Address]: 7779.
To connect to Xerox FreeFlow Core, type http://[ServerName] or
[IP_Address]:7751.
Note: Make sure that there is no firewall between the Xerox FreeFlow
provider and uStore.

6.

(Optional) In the Logo File Name box, enter the path to the logo of the
workflow provider. If you do not provide the path to a file, uStore uses
the name of the provider instead.
Note: The file should be placed at:

\\[ServerName]\XMPie\uStore\App\AdminApp\Images\Prepress

7.

To create a link to the workflow provider in the Presets menu, in the

Admin URL box, enter its path.

8.

If the Xerox FreeFlow provider is installed on the same server as

uStore, enter its relative path. For example, type /freeflowconnect.
If the Xerox FreeFlow provider is installed on a remote server, enter
its full path. For example, type: //[ServerName] or [IP_Address]/
freeflowconnect.

Click Save.
The new Xerox FreeFlow workflow provider is added to the list of
Prepress Workflow Providers and is available for all your products and
product profiles.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 152

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

To add a Prepress Workflow Provider of type Manual:

1.

Select Presets>System Setup>Prepress Workflow Provider (Figure 123).

2.

On the Prepress Workflow Provider page, click Add New (Figure 124).

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for the provider. It is recommended to

give the provider a significative name that will help you select the correct
workflow provider when you associate a product or product profile to it.

4.

(Optional) In the Logo File Name box, enter the path to the logo of the
workflow provider. If you do not provide the path to a file, uStore uses
the name of the provider instead.
Note: The file should be placed at:

\\[ServerName]\XMPie\uStore\App\AdminApp\Images\Prepress

5.

\\[ServerName]\XMPie\uStore\App\AdminApp\Images\prepress

6.

Click Save.
The manual workflow provider is added to the list of Prepress Workflow
Providers and is available for all your products and product profiles.

Creating Prepress Workflows

After you set up a manual prepress workflow provider (see Setting Up
Prepress Workflow Providers.), you can create prepress workflows for that
manual provider.
Manual workflow providers are mainly used to define hot folders. When you
work with manual workflow providers, you need to set up a workflow for
each hot folder.
Note: For FreeFlow Core workflow providers, prepress workflows are
defined in the FreeFlow Core application or the Xerox Process Manager.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 153

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

To set up a new Prepress workflow:

1.

Select Presets>System Setup>Prepress Workflow.

Figure 125: Prepress Workflow page

2.

On the Prepress Workflow page, click Add New.

Figure 126: Prepress Workflow setup page

3.

In Prepress Workflow Name box, enter a name for the workflow. For
example, for printing business cards jobs, you can name this workflow
Business_Cards.

4.

In the Output Folder box, enter the path to the folder where the hot folder.
For example, type \\[ServerName]\[FolderName]\Business Cards.

5.

In the Prepress Workflow Provider list, select the required workflow

provider.

6.

Click Save.
The new workflow is saved and can be assigned to products and product
profiles.

For details on how to assign workflows to products or product profiles, see

Setting Up Prepress Workflows.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 154

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Setting Up the Province Table

Similar to the Country table (see above), the Province table includes
information regarding the province/state in which your store(s) and potential
customers are located. See Setting Up the Tax.
Note: If a province is marked as supported for a certain store, it cannot be
deleted from the Province table.
Figure 127: Province Table - New/Edit Page

The Province Table New/Edit page includes the following fields and selections:
Field

Description

Co u n t ry

Select the country, in which the province is located.

Name

Province name.

Co de

Province code. For example, enter NY for New York.

Display Order

Unique number that will determine the location of this

province in the relevant dropdown lists in the system.

Status

Select whether to activate this province table entry (Active)

or deactivate it (Inactive). If the Status is set to Active, the
province will be available for selection in the Supported
Locations section of the Appearance tab in the Store
Setup page (see Figure 174). If the province is already in use
for a specific store, you cannot change its status to Inactive.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 155

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the Province Table Localized Text

1.

Click the Edit Localized Text link in the Province Edit or View pages. The
Localization page for the selected Province table is displayed.

2.

) to edit an existing
Click Add New to add a new localized text or Edit (
one. The selected tables Localization page is displayed.
Note: You should add a localized text for each language you want to use in
the Back Office application.

3.

Fill in the Name field in your local language.

4.

Click Save to save your settings.

Transforming a Recipient List to XSLT

You can transform the XML format of a USAData or any other Recipient List
to conform to the schema you are using in the products Plan file. For
example, you may want to add information to the USAData recipient list or
change a column headers name in the list to match your Plan.
The following is an example of a USAData XML:
<NewDataSet>
<RecipitentList>
<PrefixTTL />
<IndividualName>John Smith</IndividualName>
<firstname>John</firstname>
<middlename />
<lastname>Smith</lastname>
<address>279 East 44th St</address>
<Address2line></Address2line>
<city>New York</city>
<State>NY</State>
<zip>10017</zip>
<zip4>4349</zip4>
<DPBC>380</DPBC>
<PreDirectional>E</PreDirectional>
<Number>279</Number>

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 156

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
<street_name>44th St</street_name>
<CRRT>C045</CRRT>
<Lat>40.75131</Lat>
<long>-073.97170</long>
</RecipitentList>
<RecipitentList>
<PrefixTTL>Mrs</PrefixTTL>
<IndividualName>Mark Lord</IndividualName>
<firstname>Mark</firstname>
<middlename></middlename>
<lastname>Lord</lastname>
<address>150 East 49th St</address>
<Address2line>Apt 5B</Address2line>
<city>New York</city>
<State>NY</State>
<zip>10017</zip>
<zip4>1236</zip4>
<DPBC>522</DPBC>
<PreDirectional>E</PreDirectional>
<Number>150</Number>
<street_name>49th St</street_name>
<CRRT>C058</CRRT>
<Lat>40.75574</Lat>
<long>-073.97259</long>
</RecipitentList>
</NewDataSet>

The following is an example of the XSLT that you need to create in order to
transform the USAData XML to match your Plan:
<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
<xsl:output method="xml"/>
<xsl:template match="/">
<NewDataSet>
<xsl:for-each select="NewDataSet/RecipitentList">

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 157

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
<RecipientList>
<Category></Category>
<City><xsl:value-of select="city" /></City>
<FirstName><xsl:value-of select="FirstName" /></FirstName>
<Gender><xsl:value-of select="Gender" /></Gender>
<id><xsl:value-of select="IndividualName" /></id>
<LastName><xsl:value-of select="LastName" /></LastName>
<State><xsl:value-of select="State" /></State>
<Street><xsl:value-of select="address" /></Street>
<ZIP><xsl:value-of select="zip" /></ZIP>
</RecipientList>
</xsl:for-each>
</NewDataSet>
</xsl:template>
</xsl:stylesheet>

To transform a Recipient Lists XML:

1.

In the System Setup main page (see Figure 92), click the Recipient List
Transformation link.
A list of all Recipient Lists (including USAData) currently defined in the
uStore system is displayed.

2.

Click the Edit button

to transform.

next to the Recipient List whose XML you want

The Recipient List Transformation page for the selected Recipient List is
displayed:
Figure 128: Recipient List Transformation Page

The Recipient List Transformation page includes the following fields:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 158

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Field

Description

ID

N.A.

Product ID

Product ID in which the USAData Recipient List is used.

T ra n s f o r m a t i o n

Enter the XSL that will be used for transforming the

USAData XML. See the sample code above.

Setting Up the Report Table

The Report table lists all of the predefined and user-defined reports in the
uStore system.
Figure 129: Reports List

uStore is shipped with several out-of-the-box reports that are commonly used
by customers. However, you can add more reports by clicking the Add New
link.

Adding a New Report

To add a new Report:
1.

Click Add New to add a new report.

The Report definition page is displayed:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 159

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 130: Reports Page

2.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

Report ID

Automatic.

Name

Enter the name of the report as it will appear in the

Reports table (free text).

Report Type

From the drop-down list, select Stored-Procedure

Query or SQL Query.
Stored-Procedure Query: a stored procedure
that will be used to retrieve information that is
relevant for the report.
SQL Query an SQL query will be that will be
used to retrieve information that is relevant for
the report.

Parent Report ID

Reports may be aggregated under a master report

section. To do so, create a dummy report as a
master report section, and for the reports under it,
assign the Parent Report ID to the ID of the master
report section.
The Parent Report ID can be obtained from the
Reports list (Presets>System Setup>Reports).

Display Order

The order in which the report will appear in the

Reports page under the Reports tab (Figure 372).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 160

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Status

Select the report status from the drop-down list.

Active: the report will appear in the Reports list.
Inactive: the report will not appear in the
Reports list.

3.

Click Save.

Editing the Report Table Localized Text

To edit the Report Table:
1.

From the Reports list, click the Edit (

definitions.

) icon to edit the Report

Figure 131: Reports Page Edit Localized Text

2.

Click the Edit Localized Text link in the Report Edit or View pages. The
Report Localization list is displayed:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 161

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 132: Reports Localization List

3.

Click Add New to add a new localized text. The selected tables
Localization page is displayed:
Note: You should add a localized text for each language you want to use in
the Back Office application.
Figure 133: Reports Localization Page

4.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

R e p o r t C u l t u re
ID

Automatic.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 162

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Report ID

The Report ID is automatically generated once you

create a new Report.

C ul t u r e

Select your culture (for example, en-US for English of

United States).

Display Name

The name of the report as it will appear in uStore.

Description

Report description.

Report Command

If the Report type is a Stored-Procedure Query: enter the

name of the Store Procedure. The Stored-Procedure
must reside in the uStore database.
If the Report type is SQL Query: enter the SQL
statement.
You may use Alias in your own language in order to get
friendly report results.

5.

Click Save to save your settings.

Setting Up the Report Parameter Table

The Reports Parameters table lists all the parameters used by the uStore
reports. uStore is shipped with several out-of-the-box report parameters that
are used by out-of-the-box reports. However, you can add more report
parameters by clicking the Add New link.
Figure 134: Reports Parameters List

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 163

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Adding a New Report Parameter

1.

Click Add New. The Report Parameter page will display the report
parameter definition fields:
Figure 135: Reports Parameters Page Parameter Definitions

2.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

Report
Parameter ID

Automatic.

Report ID

The ID of the Report that will use this parameter. A

Report Parameter is defined per Report. If you want
other Reports to use this parameter, you should
duplicate the Report Parameter definitions for each
Report ID.

Name

The name of the Report Parameter as it appears in the

database.

Default Value

Enter the default value (free text). The default value

should be compatible with the database type of the
report parameter (for example, integer or string)

Is User Editable

Enter 1 if the user can edit this parameter or 0 if not.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 164

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Display Order

The order in which the report parameter will appear in

the Report Parameters section in the Report tab
(Figure 372)

Status

Status of the Report Parameter.

Active: the report parameter will appear in the Report
Parameters list.
Inactive: the report will not appear in the Reports
Parameters list.

I s V i e w a bl e

Enter 1 if the user will be allowed to view this parameter

or 0 if not. If you assign 0, enter a default value for the
parameter.

C on t r ol N a m e

The name of the control to be used to collect a value for

the parameter.
Use ParamTextBox for a textbox and
ParamListBox for a dropdown list.

V a l ue L oo ku p
Query

Should be used with the ParamListBox control in

order to fill the list box with values.
The Value Lookup Query result must have 3 fields:
Value the value that you would like to use for the
report
Name the name that you would like the user to see
in the selection list
Selected whether you would like this item to be
selected by default
For example:

select Value = S.StoreID,

Name=SC.Name, Selected = 0 from
Store S join Store_Culture SC on
(S.StoreID=SC.StoreID and
SC.CultureID=dbo.fn_StoreSetupCulture
(S.StoreID)) JOIN
fn_UserStores(@ActiveUserId) US ON
S.StoreID = us.StoreId Where
S.StatusID <> 2

3.

Click Save. The Report Parameter will be added to the Report Parameters
List.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 165

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables

Editing the Report Parameter Table Localized Text

1.

From the Report Parameters list, click the

Report Parameter definitions:

(Edit) icon to edit the

Figure 136: Reports Parameters Page Parameter Definitions

2.

Click the Edit Localized Text link. The Report Parameter Localization list is
displayed (Figure 137):
Figure 137: Report Parameter Localization Page

3.

Click Add New. The Report Parameter Localization definition page is

displayed (Figure 138):

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 166

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 138: Reports Parameter Localization Page Report Parameter Definition

Note: You should add a localized text for each language you want to use in
the Back Office application.

4.

5.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

Report
Parameter
C ul t u r e ID

Automatic.

Report
Parameter ID

Automatic. The Report ID is created once you create a

new Report parameter.

C ul t u r e

Select your culture (for example, en-US for English of

United States).

Display Name

The name of the report parameter as it will appear in

uStore.

Click Save to save your settings.

Setting Up the USADATA Account Table

The USADATA Account table enables Superusers to create multiple accounts
that can be selected by the store administrator in the Store Setup.
Note: This table is applicable for US customers only.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 167

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Figure 139: USADATA Account Table Gateway Entry URL, Order Details URL, Order
Placement URL, Order Status URL

The USADATA Account Table New/Edit page includes the following fields:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the USAData account.

Client ID,
A c c o u n t ID

Provided by USAData.

Return URL

Enter the following URL:

http://<uStoreDomain>/uStore/
RecipientList/USADATA/
LeadsModuleRebound.aspx
Replace <uStoreDomain> with the domain name
of your uStore server. If the store uses the HTTPS
secured protocol, replace http with https in the
URL.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 168

System Setup: Customizing uStore Tables
Field

Description

Proxy IP,
P r o x y P or t

Fill in your proxy details if your uStore is located behind

a proxy server. Note that the Proxy Port must refer to
port 80 (HTTP).

Gateway Entry URL,

Order Details URL,
O r d e r P l a c e m e nt
URL,
O r d e r St a t u s U R L

Please use the following URL addresses instead of the

URL provided by the USAData (See Figure 139):
Gateway Entry URL: http://listmodulev3.usadata.com/
default.aspx
Order Details URL: http://listmodulev3.usadata.com/
getorderdetails.aspx
Order Placement URL: http://
listmodulev3.usadata.com/getorderfulfilled.aspx
Order Status URL: http://listmodulev3.usadata.com/
checkstatus.aspx

O r d e r Ty p e

The Order Type options are provided by USAData. The

default order type is CONSUMER.

Setting Up the Tax Group Table

The Tax Group table enables superusers to create Tax Groups to which taxes
can be assigned. uStore comes with a pre-defined Default Tax group.
Figure 140: Tax Group Page

In the Tax Group page, enter the Tax Group name and click Save. The Tax
Group ID is assigned automatically by the system.
Once the Tax Group is defined, you can assign taxes to it in the Tax page (see
Setting Up the Tax).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 169

Setting Up the Tax

Setting Up the Tax

Taxes in uStore are configured in the following locations:

Tax Setup table (described in this section)

You can create taxes per country, province, ZIP code, and mark them as
applicable for Subtotal Price, Recipient List Price, Shipping Price and
Mailing Price. You can choose any combination of the available
parameters.

Tax Group table

Taxes must be assigned to Tax Groups. In the Tax Group table, you can
create Tax Groups to which you can later assign the store products (see
Setting Up the Tax Group Table).

Edit Product page

In this page, the product is assigned to a Tax Group. By default, the

products are assigned to a Default Tax Group. Assigning products to a
different Tax Groups is used in case different taxes are applied to various
product categories (see Saving your Product).

Store Setup page

In this page you define, for a given store, if the tax will be included in the
price and the format in which it will be displayed. If you choose to
include the tax in the price, you must select the stores global country.
Only taxes applicable for the stores global country will be taken into
consideration during the price calculation (see Determining the Store
Appearance).
The Tax Setup page is used to define the tax fee by indicating the countries
(and provinces if applicable) to which you provide delivery. In addition, you
may select if you wish to apply the tax to one of the following prices: Subtotal,
Recipient List, Shipping or Mailing. uStore enables defining multiple taxes
that can be applied simultaneously.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 170

Setting Up the Tax

To add a tax:
1.

In the Presets view, click Tax Setup.The Taxes List page is displayed:
Figure 141: Taxes List Page

2.

Click the New Tax button. The Tax Setup page is displayed:
Figure 142: Tax Table - New Page

3.

Fill in the following tax parameters:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 171

Setting Up the Tax
Table 1: Tax Table - New/Edit Page
Field

Description

Name

Enter the tax name (mandatory).

Description

Enter the tax description.

Percentage

Enter the tax fee as a percentage (mandatory).

Co u n t ry

Select the country, where the tax applies (mandatory).

S t a t e / P r o v i n ce

This field is displayed only if the selected country has

states or provinces.
Select the state/province where the tax applies. Do not
fill in the province if you wish to define a tax for all
provinces in the country.

Zip Code

Select a zip code where the tax applies. Do not fill in the
ZIP code if you wish to create a tax for all the ZIP codes
in the province (or county if province is omitted).

T o Z i p C od e

Enter a ZIP code to create a range of ZIP codes, starting

from the ZIP code you entered in the Zip Code field. Do
not fill in the To Zip Code field if you wish to use only
one ZIP code as defined in Zip Code above.

T a x G ro u p

In the drop-down list, select the Tax Group to which you

wish to assign the tax. For more information about Tax
Groups, see Setting Up the Tax Group Table.

A p p l ie s f o r
S u bt o t a l P ri c e

Check this checkbox to apply the tax to the subtotal

price.

A p p l ie s f o r
Recipient List
Price

Check this checkbox to apply the tax to the Recipient List

price.

A p p l ie s f o r
S h ip p i n g P r i ce

Check this checkbox to apply the tax to the Shipping

price.

A p p l ie s f o r
M a il i n g P r i c e

Check this checkbox to apply the tax to the Mailing price.

Status

Select whether to activate this tax fee table entry

(Active) or deactivate it (Inactive).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 172

Setting Up Triggers

4.

Click Save.

Setting Up Triggers
uStore Back Office contains triggers that dispatch actions in specific events.
Superusers are allowed to add new triggers.
For each trigger, the following events are available:

User creation in Back Office application

Customer registration

Order state transition

Order submission in Customer application

Password recovery

These combinations of events and assigned actions are known as rules. For
example, you can create a rule that is defined for an order submission event,
which triggers an email send action. Moreover, you can create a rule that
submits an order to production the moment it is checked out by the customer.
The messaging mechanism enables you to apply filters to events to narrow
down the triggers that will eventually execute actions.
Figure 143: Trigger List Page

The Trigger List main page includes a list of triggers and their descriptions. To
create a new trigger, click New in the Trigger List main page.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 173

Setting Up Triggers
Figure 144: Trigger Setup, New Trigger

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 174

Setting Up Triggers

In addition to basic properties, such as Rule Name and Rule Description, the
Edit Rule Settings page includes the following options:

Event: Enables you to select from the following events:

User Creation in Admin Application: A user has been created (for

further details, see Setting up Users and User Groups)

Customer Registration: A customer has performed registration (for

further details, see Enabling Registration)

Inventory Changed: The inventory level of a product that is managed

by inventory was ordered.

Inventory Level Is Low: The on-shelf inventory level of a product that

is managed by inventory reached the predefined limit.
Order State Transition: An order queue has been changed (for further
details, see Handling Orders)

Order Submission in Customer Application: A customer submitted an

Delivery Creation

Password Recovery: A customer recovered his password to a uStore

order at the store

account.

uStore customers are able to recover forgotten passwords by clicking

the Forgot your password? link in the Log in page of a store. When
clicking that link, an e-mail message is sent to the customers in which
they can click a link to reset their password. Naturally, you can use a
combination of filters, email templates and recipients to create a
number of triggers for different customers. For example, you can
create templates of different languages to be sent to foreign
customers.

Redirect Clearing Failed

USADATA Clearing Failed

Customer Registration pending Activation: a customer has performed

registration but his registration must be activated (for further details,
see Enabling Registration).

Filter: allows you to define a filter for an event to narrow down triggered
actions. The Filter list is dynamic and depends on the event you select. By
default, all filters share the same properties, i.e., allowing you to filter
down events by stores, whether all stores or specific stores. For example,
the Order State Transition event includes further refining options, that is,
allowing you to select the origin State (From State) and the target State (To
State) that triggers an action.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 175

Setting Up Triggers

Action to Perform: select the action you want to perform in response to the
occurring event. Available actions are Send Mail, State Transition and
Order Details XML.

The following table shows the available events and their corresponding
actions and filters:
Event

Filter

Action

User Creation in Admin

Application

Filter by Store

Send Mail

Customer Registration

Filter by Store

Send Mail

Inventory Changed

Filter by Store

Send Mail
Order Details XML

Inventory Level Is Low

Filter by Store

Send Mail
Order Details XML

Order State Transition

Order Submission in Customer

Application

Password Recovery

Order State Transition

Filter

Send Mail

State Transition Filter

State Transition Action

Order Submission
Filter

Send Mail

State Transition Filter

State Transition Action

Order Details Filter

Order Details XML

Password Recovery
Filter

Send Mail

Selecting the Appropriate Email Send Action

The following options are available for an email send action:

Select Email Recipients: you can select from predefined email recipients or
User Groups or you can enter new email addresses in the Other field. It is

also possible to enter a number of email addresses separated by

semicolons ;.

Select Email Template: this list is dynamic and depends on your event
selection. Each event is assigned with the proper email template that
defines the appearance and message body of the sent email.

Note: You can enhance email messaging by adding new email templates.
For more information, refer to Setting Up the Message Template Table.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 176

Setting Up Triggers

Selecting the Appropriate State Transition Action

The following options are available for a state transition action:

Store Name: select the store to which the action applies.

Product Name: select the product to which the action applies.

Landing queue: triggers an action when an order reaches a certain queue.

For example, you can set the Landing queue to Pending, thus triggering a
selected action (available in the Action to perform list) whenever an order
is registered in the Pending queue. Naturally, the Actions to perform list is
dynamically changed as a result of your selection in the Landing queue
list.

Action to perform: select the order handling action you want to execute

from the actions available for the selected Landing queue. For more
information on defining order handling actions, refer to Setting Up the
Order Handling Action Table.

Exporting Order Information as XML or cXML (Order

Details XML Action)
You can use the Order Details XML action to integrate the order fulfillment
process with external systems, such as MIS, finance and production
automation systems. The Order Details XML action generates a file that
contains all the information about a certain order. The generated file can then
be transferred to information systems such as MIS and CRM. For example, in
order to calculate total revenue from sales. The generated file follows a
predefined template (XML or cXML), which is available in the Select
Template list (Figure 144).

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 177

Setting Up Triggers

To allow exporting order information as XML or cXML:

1.

Create a new trigger as described in Setting Up Triggers.

Figure 145: Trigger Setup, Exporting Order Information as XML

2.

Select the Order Submission in Customer Application event from the Event
list.

3.

Select Order Details Filter from the Filter list.

You can now save the generated XML to a disk:

In the Select Xml Delivery Method section, select Save to Disk and
specify the path for saving the file (for example, C:\Orders). You
can also save the file on a remote computer. In this case, specify the
Domain name, User Name and Password of the remote computer.

Or you can use the generated XML to implement a Web method:

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 178

Setting Up User Details Fields

In the Select Xml Delivery Method section, select Call a Web Service and
specify the Web service URL in the URL field.
When creating a Web Service, use the default namespace: http://
tempuri.org/".
Make sure the Web service you are using incorporates a Web method
of the following form:

void Execute(XmlDocument orderXml)

4.

Select the template you want to use for the generated file from the Select

Template list.

To export order information as XML, choose OrderDetailsXML.

To export order information as cXML, choose Order Details in cXML.

Setting Up User Details Fields

uStore Back Office allows you to customize the appearance of the User Setup
page (Figure 341). The User Fields List page allows you to select and configure
the fields required for user definition.

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 179

Setting Up User Details Fields
Figure 146: Presets User Fields List

uStore Back Office contains a list of pre-defined system fields and allows you
to define up to five custom fields.
There are four types of fields:

Mandatory system fields: always appear in the User Setup page and their
settings cannot be modified

First Name

Last Name

Assign to Store

Include in Groups

Email

Password

Chapter 4: Managing uStore Presets 180

Setting Up User Details Fields

Confirm Password

Optional system fields: by default appear in the User Setup page but can
be hidden or their settings can be modified:

Phone Number

Mobile Number

Fax Number

Company Name

Department

Job Title

External Id

Optional hidden system fields: hidden by default, but can be displayed

and their settings can be modified:

Gender: a drop-down field

Birthday: a calendar field

Billing Addresses

Shipping Addresses

Custom fields: user-defined fields that can be configured to be displayed

in the User Setup page.

Configuring User Fields

To customize the appearance of the User Setup page:
1.

If you wish to add a custom field to the User Setup page, enter its name in
the Custom text box. You can define up to five custom fields.

2.

Define which fields will appear in the User Setup page using the Active
checkbox.

3.

For Active fields, select Mandatory if you wish to mark them as

mandatory for user setup. Mandatory fields cannot be left blank when
defining a user.

4.

For Active fields, select Visible to Customer if you wish to display them in
the Personal Information page in Storefront (under the My Account tab).
The following fields cannot be marked as Visible to Customer: External Id,
Billing Addresses, Shipping Addresses. However, the Billing Addresses and
Shipping Addresses fields will appear in the Storefront, under My Account
>Addresses.

5.

Click Save.

Chapter

Setting Up a Store
Setting up and maintaining stores in uStore is done in the Stores view:
Figure 147: Store List Page

The Store list page displays the list of stores with the following information
for each store:
Status Indicator: The green indicator (
The grey indicator (

) means that the store is online.

) is displayed for offline stores.

Store Name: The name of the store

ID: The store ID.
Products: The number of products in the store.
Groups: The number of product groups in the store.
Pending Orders: The number of pending orders.
Modified by: The user that modified the store.
Setup: Click this link to open the Store Setup page in which you can edit your
store definitions (see Setting Up General Information).
Localize: clicking this link enables you to localize the dynamic text of your

store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 182

Setting Up General Information

In this page you can perform the following actions:

Create a new store by clicking the New link.

Delete an existing store by selecting the store and clicking the Delete link.

Duplicate an existing store by selecting the store and clicking the

Duplicate link.

To create a store, click the Stores icon in the Views toolbar and then click New
to display the Store Setup page and specify the store properties. As a rule, the
store properties serve as default settings for the stores products. However,
product pricing, shipping pricing and shipping options can be overridden
per-product.
The store status, whether online or offline, is shown on the top right side of
the Store Setup page. It determines whether this store is accessible to
customers via the Internet. Make sure that the store status is set to Offline
while you set up the store, customize its products and give users permission
to access it. You can change the status to Online when you are done.
See Saving your Store Settings.

Setting Up General Information

The General tab enables you to set up your stores general information, such
as store name, store description, etc.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 183

Setting Up General Information
Figure 148: Store Setup Page General Information tab

In addition to basic parameters such as Store Name and Description, the setup
includes the following definitions:

Store Type (see Setting Up the Store Type)

External ID (see Setting Up the External ID)

Enable Store-Friendly URL (see Enabling Store-Friendly URL)

Enable customer registration (see Managing Storefront Login)

Offer customer to receive email promotions (Opt-in) (see Offering

uProduce Connection (see Setting Up uProduce Connection)

Customers to Receive Email Promotions (Opt-In))

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 184

Setting Up General Information

Setting Up the Store Type

In the Store Type list, select the store type.
There are three types of stores:

Secured Store (B2B): A standard, secured online store created in uStore.

This store requires registration in order to be able to browse the store
products. A restricted store is available for registered users only
(see Setting Up Permissions).

Public Store (B2C): A public online store created in uStore that allows

anonymous users to browse the store but requires registration for

checking out orders. Anonymous users have several usage restrictions
unless they are registered:

Anonymous users are able to browse the store, order products using
the Customization Steps and the Recipient List upload, and add them
to their Shopping Cart. However, they are required to register in
order to check out their orders.
Anonymous users have no access to My Account option of the store
unless they have registered and logged in.
Anonymous users have no access to Recipient Manager and cannot
reuse the uploaded Recipient List for other products.
Anonymous users cannot view and edit the contents of the uploaded
Recipient List after the order has been placed in the Shopping Cart.

uStore Connect Store: A store that can be integrated with third party ecommerce applications

Customers and integrators can now bring the same variable data print
(VDP) ordering workflow available in uStore to their existing ecommerce systems through the new uStore Connect interface. Customers
will continue to use the uStore architecture to house product definitions
and provide interface to uProduce, in addition to other tasks, but can also
now import the order workflow portion of uStore into their own solution
providing broad customization capabilities, online template editing
with uEdit, various recipient list provider options and online proofing.
This capability will allow customers and integrators to develop systems
offering VDP Campaigns quickly and cost effectively.
Customers ordering static products would use the 3rd party system, but
when ordering VDP products, they will automatically be redirected in the
background to uStore to complete the order for that product. Once the
product order is completed, the customer is then directed back to the
third party system shopping cart. A new set of Web Service APIs are

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 185

Setting Up General Information

provided to support this integration. These APIs provide the abilityto

read store and order data, manage users and orders, send orders to
production and much more. A full integration sample is provided with
the uStore SDK to jump start the integration process.
Warning: When a uStore Connect store type is selected, some of the store
configuration parameters are hidden.
Note: For more information on uStore Connect stores, please refer to uStore
Connect Sample Application document. For information on uStore SDK,
please refer to uStore Plug-In SDK Sample Applications document.

Setting Up the External ID

The External ID enables you to distinguish your store with an identification
number. This is useful when you create custom made plug-ins for uStore.

Setting Up Search Engine Optimization Parameters

Search Engine Optimization (SEO) enables you to improve the volume and
quality of traffic to your website from search engines. SEO definitions include
four main meta tags: Homepage Title, Description, Keywords and General Title
Addition.
In the Search Engine Optimization (SEO) section, select one of the following
options:

Use default values: select this radio button if you would like to use the
default SEO definitions. The default values are as follows:

Homepage Title: <Store Name>

Description: <Store Description>. If no description is available, <Store
Name> is used instead.

Keywords: No keywords are defined by default.

General Title Addition: <Store Name> is used as a suffix for all titles in

the store.

Use customized values select this radio button if you would like to set up
customized values for SEO. Then, click the Customize link. The SEO:
Customize Meta Tags window is displayed:

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 186

Setting Up General Information
Figure 149: Store Setup - SEO: Customize Meta Tags

Modify the default values:

Homepage Title: Mandatory. The default value is <Store Name>. You

may enter a different value.

Description: Mandatory. The default value is <Store Description>. If

no description is available, <Store Name> is used instead. You may
enter a customized description (up to 300 characters).
Keywords: Optional. This field is empty by default. You may enter
keywords, separated with comma. The Keywords field may contain

up to 300 characters.

General Title Addition: By default, the <Store Name> is used as a

suffix for all titles in the store. You may modify the description in the
text box and select a different option is the list (instead of As a suffix).
The available options are As a prefix or Do not include. When As a
suffix or As a prefix values are selected, all Title fields in the SEO
dialogs of the store (including Product and Product group SEO
dialogs) will include the addition to the title. When Do not include is
selected, no addition will be added to the page titles.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 187

Setting Up General Information

Enabling Store-Friendly URL

Select Enable Store-Friendly URL to enable a friendly URL for accessing the
store, and specify the following:

Store Domain: The domain name of the server on which uStore is installed
or the domain name of the Proxy server behind which uStore is located.

Store Folder (optional): A user-friendly name for the folder containing

this store (for example, MyStore). The combination of a domain and a
folder must be unique for each store.

Notes:

When entering only the Store Domain, the Store URL

appears as: www.StoreDomain.com
When entering both the Store Domain and the Folder, the
Store URL appears as: www.StoreDomain.com/
StoreFolder
When entering only the Store Domain, make sure this
domain is not used for other stores.
If you are using a proxy server, follow the instructions
provided for the Proxy Setup utility (as described in Using
the Proxy Setup Utility) after you place the store online.

Managing Storefront Login

When you set up a business-to-business store, uStore provides you two
registration methods:

uStore Authentication (Default): Select this option to require customers to

register to you store before they can view it. See Enabling Registration.

LDAP Authentication: Select this option if you want to enable the store
customers to log in to the store using their LDAP (lightweight directory
access protocol) credentials. See Enabling LDAP Login.

Enabling Registration
Store Administrators can set a store to support user registration for
unregistered customers. For example, this can be used for public stores that
are not restricted to registered users. Users that log into uStore using public
registration will be directed to create a private account. Once an account has
been set up at a store, customers can use their accounts to navigate through
the store and make purchases.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 188

Setting Up General Information

If the Public Store (B2C) option is selected in the Store Type field, the Enable
Registration checkbox is selected by default and disabled because registration
is mandatory in public stores in order to be able to check out orders. You can
either use the default uStore registration page or replace it with the custom
page:

Use default registration page: Select this option if you want to use the

default registration page.

Add CAPTCHA: If you choose to use the default registration page, you

have an option to add CAPTCHA to increase the level of security in

your store. This checkbox is empty by default.

Enable Terms and Conditions acceptance: Select this checkbox to add

the Terms and Conditions checkbox to the Storefront Registration
page, and thus require customers to accept the uStore Terms and
Conditions during the registration process. In the Storefront
application, accepting the Terms and Conditions of the store during
the registration process is mandatory.

Terms and Conditions HTML file: once the Enable Terms and
Conditions acceptance checkbox is selected, you can upload an

HTML file containing your legal Terms and Conditions

document. Make sure your file is in HTML format. If you have a
Word document, save it as HTML prior to uploading it to uStore.
To start the upload, click the Upload button. The Upload a Terms
and Conditions HTML window is displayed:

Figure 150: Upload Terms and Conditions HTML Page

Click Browse to locate the file and then click Upload. The
uploaded file will appear as a link in the Store Setup page. You
can click this link to open the HTML file in a separate browser
window.You can click the Replace button, to replace the
uploaded file with a new one.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 189

Setting Up General Information
Figure 151: Uploaded Terms and Conditions HTML file

Require activation by email: Select this checkbox if you would like to

enable registration activation for this store. In this case, customers

registering to the store will receive a registration activation email
with the activation link. The activation must be performed no later
than 48 hours from the registration time. If a customer did not
activate the registration during this time, the registration will be
cancelled.

Log in using Facebook account. App ID: Select this option if you would
like to enable store visitors to log in using their Facebook credentials.

Note: To be able to use this feature, you first need to create an application
on Facebook.
For information on how to create a Facebook app, see Creating a Facebook
App.
Figure 152: Facebook Login option

In the App ID box, enter the App ID that you got when you
created the Facebook app.

After you set up the Facebook Login feature in your store, store
visitors will be able to sign in to the store using their Facebook
credentials instead of their uStore credentials.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 190

Setting Up General Information
Figure 153: Store Sign In page with Facebook Login button

Use custom registration page: The Registration page is also replaceable.

Administrators can create a Registration page that suites their specific
needs and use it instead of the default one. For example, this feature can
be used to include personal information fields that are not included in the
default registration page.

Page URL: If you choose to use a custom registration page, you have
to enter the URL of a that page in the Page URL field.

Note: The above registration options are not available when set up a store
that uses LDAP authentication.

Enabling LDAP Login

LDAP (lightweight directory access protocol) authentication enables
customers to log in to the store with their organizations login credentials
without the need to create a new account.
When a user logs in, uStore tries to match the LDAP domain-controller
groups to existing groups in uStore. Group names that are found on both
uStore and the domain controller are associated with the logged in user.
For example, if the user is member of Group1, Group2 and Group3 and
uStore has a group named Group1, the user will be associated with Group1.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 191

Setting Up General Information

When you use LDAP Authentication, you need to perform the following
steps.
Figure 154: LDAP Configuration steps
Store Setup
General tab:
LDAP Connection
Settings

Create New Group

Permissions tab:
LDAP Users Group

Set up new
groups

1.

On the General tab, you configure the LDAP connection settings. In this
step, you connect to the LDAP provider server to retrieve the required
user information. Then you make sure that the users first name and
email labels in the uStore system are mapped to the appropriate LDAP
property (attribute). Different organizations may use a different property
name to define users names. For example, the first name property may be
mapped to the following properties: CN, givenName, givenName and
SN (last name). If you do not know how your active directory is
structured, consult your System Administrator.
On the General tab, you also define a Group Name Prefix to be used to
distinguish domain controller groups from other uStore groups.

2.

On the Permissions tab, you select the group that will be used as the
default group for users who log in with their LDAP credentials. If you do
not want associate all LDAP users to the same default group, you can
select None and create new groups with specific permissions.

3.

On the User Group Setup page, you need to create new user groups with
the required permissions for the LDAP users. When you create the user
groups on uStore, you must follow this naming convention: [Group
Name Prefix].[domain controller group name].
For example, if you set the prefix to Acme and the user in the domain
controller is a member of Group1, uStore associates the user with the
uStore group named Acme.Group1.
To learn more about how to create user groups, see Adding a New User
Group.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 192

Setting Up General Information

To configure LDAP authentication:

1.

Under Storefront Login Management, in the Log in using list, select LDAP
Authentication.

2.

Click the link Configure LDAP Connection.

Figure 155: Configure LDAP Connection dialog box

3.

In the LDAP Configuration dialog box, fill in the following information:

Note: You may need your system administrators help to fill in the required
LDAP information.

LDAP URL: The LDAP URL indicates the location of the Active
Directory server.

Tip: The LDAP connection string is made up of the server's name, followed
by the path of the container object where the user is located. Examples of
LDAP URL strings:
LDAP://servername.domain/DC=domain,DC=com
LDAP://myDomainController.myDomain.com/
CN=Users,DC=charrandev,DC=com
For more information, see:
http://stackoverflow.com/questions/11458291/how-do-i-build-this-ldapconnection-string
http://serverfault.com/questions/130543/how-can-i-figure-out-my-ldapconnection-string

4.

User Name: Your LDAP server user name.

Password: Your LDAP server password.

Domain: Your organizations domain server name.

Click Connect.
uStore connects to the LDAP server.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 193

Setting Up General Information

5.

After a successful connection, make sure that the appropriate property

names are selected in the following fields:

First Name: Select the name of the property used for users first
names. This property name can be givenName or CN, but some
directories may use a different property name as well.

Note: Consult with your System Administrator to make sure that you map
the property names correctly.

Last Name: The property name commonly used for last names is SN.

This property is not mandatory. If you do not select the property

used for last name, select the option None.

Email: Select the name of the property used for users email. This
property name is usually mail.

Note: It is important that you select the correct email property name.
uStore uses the email address to send out several types of notifications.
Figure 156: LDAP Authentication

Group Name Prefix: Fill in a name that will be used as the prefix of the
uStore user group. The Group Name Prefix is used to distinguish

LDAP domain controller groups from uStore groups. See Creating

User Groups that Match LDAP Groups.

6.

On the Permissions tab, under LDAP Users Group, select a group from the
list.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 194

Setting Up General Information
Figure 157: Default LDAP Users Group

All users that log in using LDAP authentication are added to this group.
The group that you select here does not replace any other group that
LDAP users may belong to.
To make sure that the LDAP users are provided the required
permissions, it is recommended that you create a new user group for each
LDAP group and assign each group with the relevant permissions.
After you set up your store with LDAP authentication, users will be able to
log in to the store with the same credentials used in their organization and
wont need to create a new user for uStore.
Figure 158: Sign in to uStore with LDAP credentials

Offering Customers to Receive Email Promotions

(Opt-In)
U.S. Federal CAN-SPAM Act and similar anti-SPAM regulations in other
countries require senders of commercial email advertisements and
promotions to offer customers the ability to unsubscribe from these emails.
Store Administrators can set up a store to enable Storefront customers to
select whether they want or not to receive commercial emails from the store.
When you select the Offer customer to receive email promotions (Opt-in)
checkbox, the Set by default to list is displayed.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 195

Setting Up General Information
Figure 159: Set by default list

Select one of the following options:

Opt-in (Receive offers): by default, the customers of the store will receive

commercial emails.

Opt-out (Do not receive offers): by default, the customers of the store will

not receive commercial emails.

Note: To use the Offer customer to receive email promotions (Opt-in)

option with LDAP authentication, make sure that all LDAP users have a valid
email address.

In Storefront, the Opt-In checkbox (I would like to receive offers, news and
information via Email) will appear under My Account>Personal Information for

each registered user. The customer may modify the default settings at any
moment.
Figure 160: Personal Information page - Opt-In checkbox

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 196

Setting Up General Information

If the Enable Registration option is activated for the store, the Opt-In checkbox
will also appear on the store Registration page with settings defined in the Set
by default to list (selected, if Opt-in has been selected and empty, if Opt-Out
has been selected).
Figure 161: Registration Page: Opt-In checkbox

The Store administrator can create reports about the Opt-In status of the
customers in the stores they are allowed to access by selecting the Customer
Opt-In Status pre-defined report in the Reports tab.
Figure 162: Customer Opt-In Status Report

The report is created by store and by Opt-In Status. For more information
about uStore Reports, see Generating Reports.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 197

Determining the Store Appearance

Setting Up uProduce Connection

In the uProduce Connection section enter the User and Password information
of the uProduce Server user who sets up the uStore Campaign. This
information determines which products will be available in your store. Make
sure you first set up the uProduce Server and uProduce Customer as
described in Setting Up the Mall Table.

Determining the Store Appearance

The store appearance as presented to customers is defined in the Appearance
tab. You can select a skin for your store and define the store home page as
well as define local and other store enhancements.

Selecting the Store Skin

Figure 163: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Store Skin

Skin Name: You can control the look and feel of your stores by either selecting

one of the uStore default skins or using your own store skin(s) instead. The
skins are designed with active CSS and can easily be modified using HTML5
Base. For uStore Connect stores, make sure to select a skin that matches the
appearance of the third-party e-commerce application. The XMPieGreen skin
is also adapted for mobile devices.

To add a desktop skin to the uStore system:

1.

Place your skins library (containing all required files, for example,
Style.css and the various image files) in the following directory:
<uStore Installation
Drive>:\XMPie\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images

2.

Create a new folder using the same name as your skins library in the
following directory:

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 198

Determining the Store Appearance

<uStore Installation
Drive>:\XMPie\uStore\App\CustomerApp\App_Themes

and copy the following files from one of the existing theme folders to the
newly created folder: Common.skin, XmpImageButton.skin.

To add a mobile skin to the uStore system:

1.

Place your skins library (containing all required files, for example,
StyleMobile.css and the various image files) in the following directory:
<uStore Installation
Drive>:\XMPie\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images

2.

Create a new folder named <Skin Name> Mobile in the following

directory:
<uStore Installation
Drive>:\XMPie\uStore\App\CustomerApp\App_Themes
and copy the following files from one of the existing theme folders to the
newly created folder: Common.skin, XmpImageButton.skin.You can
have two different views (desktop and mobile) for the same skin.
Note: Due to the nature and limitations of mobile devices, some of the features
which are available for the desktop version will not be available, or will have a
different functionality on mobile devices:
Definitions of Product List Display > Paging are ignored since there is no
paging to this list in mobile.
Definitions of Product List Display > Product List Preview Style are ignored
on mobile devices, showing the products only as a list.
Products with uEdit enabled will not be shown in the product list for devices with
maximum screen width of 768px (mostly phones or small tablets).
The Steps navigation bar is hidden for devices with maximum screen width of
768px (mostly phones or small tablets)
In the Shopping Cart, the ability to add a nick name to the items in the list is
disabled.
In the Order Summary, the ability to split an order between different addresses
is disabled.
On the Document submission page, personalization of the copies (Recipient
List) is disabled.
On the Document submission page, zooming in/out is disabled for devices
with maximum screen width of 768px (mostly phones or small tablets).
Dials with input control of types Image selector and Pop up image selector
will be shown as the new input control Gallery image selector.

The uStore Back Office application automatically detects the new skin library
and includes it in the Store Setup pages Skin Name section. Because the name
of your skin library is added to the list as is, it is recommended that you give
the library a user-friendly, descriptive name (for example, Rainbow).

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 199

Determining the Store Appearance
Header Title enables you to add a header title to your store; this will be
displayed in the store Welcome page:

Figure 164: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Store Skin

Show Product Search Bar Select this to enable the product Search Bar in your
stores Home page and Product List page. The product Search Bar enables
customers to quickly find products by product name, product description
and Key Words.

Figure 165 shows the search bar as it appears in the store.

Figure 165: uStore Storefront Product Search Bar

Search Bar

To use the search bar, enter a key word in the Search field and either press
<Enter> or click Go.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 200

Determining the Store Appearance

Defining Home Page

Figure 166: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Home Page

Home Page - the home page of each online store can be personalized percustomer. For example, it can display the status of the customers latest
orders, customer-specific promotions, and so forth.

The uStore Back Office application enables you to create personalized home
pages via the Store Setup pages new Home Page section. For each home page,
you are required to specify the following:
Welcome Text: Enables you to add welcome text to your store; this will be
displayed in the store Welcome page.

Figure 167: uStore Storefront: Welcome Page

Welcome Text

Use custom homepage: Select this checkbox if you want to use a

customized home page instead of the default uStore homepage.

URL: The address of the static or dynamic Web page you want to use
as a home page (created in HTML, ASP, ASPX, PHP, etc.)
SQL: A query defining the parameters required by the above URL.

The SQL may contain references to the @StoreID and @UserID

parameters, which are automatically given to the SQL. The fields

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 201

Determining the Store Appearance

returned from the SQL populate the query string of the uStore
Storefront home page. The query must return exactly one record.
You can also define the URL and SQL properties at the mall-level, as part of
the System Setup process. See Managing uStore Presets. In this case, if you do
not define these properties at the store-level, they are inherited from the Mall
table.

Defining the Product List Display

Figure 168: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Product List Display

You can display products in your store as:

List: Products are sorted one below the other.

Grid: Products are sorted one next to the other.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 202

Determining the Store Appearance
Figure 169: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab: Product List Sorting

You can sort the displayed products by:

Sequence Ascending or Sequence Descending: When you create products,

they are added to the product list in a certain sequence. This option
enables you to display the products to this sequence.

Figure 170: The Sequence column in the list of store products

Name A-Z or Name Z-A: Display the products in your store in an

alphabetical order.

Displaying the Product List in Pages

If you have a long list of products, you can display the products over a
number of pages instead of having them listed on one long page.
Select the Allow Paging in Product List to show only a number of products per
page, thus enabling the user to browse between pages. Specify the number of
products per page is in the Number of Products per Page text box.
Clear the Allow Paging in Product List checkbox to organize all the products in
a single page and enable the customer scroll for products.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 203

Determining the Store Appearance
Figure 171: uStore Storefront - Allowing Paging in Product List

Paging in Product
Paging inList
Product
page
List page

Products arranged in a
list

Products arranged
in a list

Adding a Header and a Footer to the Store

Figure 172: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Header & Footer

You can define a custom header and footer for the store. In the Custom Header
and Custom Footer fields, enter a virtual path that points to the header or
footer (respectively) that you want to use. You can point to a static or a
dynamic (i.e., personalized for every customer) Web page by using an HTML
URL or an ASCX URL (.NET 2.0 tool user control), respectively. For further
explanations on how to use ASCX URL, refer to the uStore SDK
documentation.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 204

Determining the Store Appearance

Headers and footers may include links to a personal Web page that opens as
an embedded pane within the uStore environment (i.e., main content). To
enable this feature, you should use the LoadMainContent function. This Java
script function accepts the following parameters:

URL: The URL you want to open when the customer follows the
provided link.

Window height: The URL opens within uStore in a dedicated pane whose
height is predefined in pixels. By default, the height is set to 540 pixels.

Title: The title that appears atop the opened pane within uStore.

Figure 173: uStore Storefront: Custom Header and Footer

Custom Header

Custom Footer

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 205

Determining the Store Appearance

Defining the Store Locale

Figure 174: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab Localization

Localization (Manage Culture Options): uStore customers are able to select a

Storefront locale when they log in. The various locales you define here are
represented by national flags on the Login page.
Primary Currency: In the list, select the currency you want to use in the store.

The actual billing will always be performed in that currency. Please note, that
when changing the currency, the warning message will pop up notifying you
that only the currency name is going to be changed, but there will be no price
conversion from the previous currency to the new one. Once you change the
currency, the new settings will take effect in the Storefront price display. The
previous orders will not be affected by the currency change.

Secondary Currency: In addition to the primary currency used in the store, you

may select secondary currencies that can be used for display only. The
currencies appearing in this section are the ones defined in the Presets
>Currency Setup (see Currency Setup). To select a secondary currencies for
display, select the checkbox next to the currency name and enter the exchange
rate. You can either use the exchange rates defined globally in the Presets

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 206

Determining the Store Appearance

view or define exchange rates applicable for a specific store only. By default,
the Use Rates from Presets checkbox is selected and, as a result, the exchange
rates defined in the Presets >Currency Setup (see Currency Setup) are be
applied for the store. To define exchange rates that are different from the ones
defined in the Presets and applicable for your store only, fill in the Exchange
Rate field for the selected currencies. The exchange rates are defined with
respect to the primary currency. Please note that the primary currency is
different from the reference currency defined in the Presets.
Supported Locations: Select the locations supported by the store. As a default,
the list will include the countries and provinces/states whose Status field is
set to Active in the respective Country and Province tables in the Presets view
>System Setup. At least one country and one of its provinces (if applicable)
must be selected. You can select all, clear all, or select only a few items.
Tax Display while Shopping: Select one of the following tax display formats
that will be applied to your store. For more information on tax configuration,
see Setting Up the Tax.

Prices do not include tax: The product prices will be displayed without

Tax is added to price: The product prices displayed in the store will

Custom price format: Enter the custom price format using the following

tax.

include tax.

writing notation (the custom price format must include the tax format):

{Price}: Price, tax not included

{Tax}: Tax only

{PriceIncludingTax}: Price including tax

For example: {Price} + {Tax} VAT

Tax Calculation Method: This field is displayed only when the Tax is added to
price or the Custom price format options are selected. In the list, select the

country according to which the taxes will be globally calculated. This list will
only include countries that are marked as supported for this store in the
Supported Locations section. Only taxes that are defined for this country will
be used in that store (see the Country field value in the Tax table in the Setting
Up the Tax). If you selected a country that was later removed from the list of
Supported locations, you will have to modify the selection by choosing
another country.
Note: When creating a Tax record that applies to Shipping, it can only be
assigned to a Default Tax group.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 207

Determining the Store Appearance

To add a locale to your store:

1.

Click the Add New Culture link and select the locale you want to add from
the Culture Name list. Please note that only locales that were selected in
Presets > Localization (see Localizing Your Storefront and Back Office) are
available for selection here.
To add more languages to the Culture Name list, refer to Adding a
Language to uStore.

2.

Define the Decimal places and Decimal separator displayed (requires you
to enter a value) and select the Currency Pattern, Weight Units and Length
Units.
You can set the stores default locale by selecting the Storefront Default
checkbox next to the relevant locale.
You must set the setup locale by selecting the Setup Culture checkbox next
to the relevant locale. The setup locale determines the language in which
the store is configured in the Back Office. Only one Setup Culture may be
selected.
Warning: The Currency used at the store can be changed as long as there
were no orders made at the store. Once an order has been submitted, the
currency for that store is set and cannot be changed.

3.

Click

The locale settings are represented by national flags and are visible to
customers on the Login page on the top right side.
In a public store, the flag icons are available in the same location in all
pages.
Figure 175: uStore Storefront: Selecting the Store Locale

Customers can select their locale

by clicking the corresponding
national flag

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 208

Determining the Store Appearance

Text Insertions
Figure 176: Store Setup Page, Store Appearance tab : Text Insertions

Text Insertions: Enables you to add text messages, such as information or

instructions, in various places at the store. You can add text messages on the
Order Confirmation page, Order Details page and on the Shopping Cart page.
The text messages will appear on the relevant page at the store.

Figure 177: uStore Storefront: Example Text Insertions

Text Insertion on the

Shopping Cart page

Merchant Info
Store Administrators often want to display merchant information in receipts
and emails sent from the store. This information can be entered in the
Merchant Info section of the Appearance tab in the Back Office application and
will be displayed in all receipts and email templates in the Storefront.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 209

Determining the Store Appearance
Figure 178: Merchant Info section

To add merchant information:

1.

Under the Merchant Info section, click Add. The Merchant Info dialog is
displayed:
Figure 179: Merchant Info Dialog

2.

Fill in the fields you want to appear in your receipts and emails.
Note: The Merchants address is not restricted to the locations supported by
the store (see Defining the Store Locale).

3.

If you want to add a company logo, click Browse near the Company Logo
field and select the logo image you want to upload. Note that the
uploaded image must be either in JPG, GIF or PNG format and should
not exceed the following maximum parameters: width: 450 px,
height: 80 px.

4.

Click Submit.
The dialog is closed and the Merchant Info is displayed in the Merchant
Info section of the Appearance tab:

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 210

Setting Up the Store Clearing Methods
Figure 180: Merchant Info Filled In

5.

You can click Edit to modify your Merchant Info, or Delete to remove it.

Setting Up the Store Clearing Methods

The Clearing tab enables you to select the clearing method(s)/clearing
services you want to use in your store. Available Clearing Models are set
using the Clearing Model Setup in the Presets view, as described in Creating a
Clearing Model.
Note: In uStore Connect stores, the Invoice clearing model is implicitly
selected.

The Display Name column shows the clearing method name you chose to
display in your store as you previously set in the Presets view, Clearing Model
Setup page. For further explanations on how to configure clearing models,
refer to Creating a Clearing Model.
Figure 181: Store Setup Page Store Attributes

Note: This setting cannot be overridden per-product.

Setting Up Delivery Options

You can allow customers to choose a delivery provider. This way, customers
have the option to distribute their products by selecting from a list of
available delivery providers at the store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 211

Setting Up Delivery Options

Note: For uStore Connect stores, Disable Delivery is implicitly selected.

uStore is shipped with two out-of-the-box delivery carriers (FedEx and UPS)
and two additional configurable manual delivery options:

FedEx and UPS : Users belonging to the Superuser group can allow

Manual Mailing : Used for per-item delivery, where each product of the

Manual Shipping: Used for sending the entire order to a single address.
For example, customers may order sets of business cards and distribute
them themselves, instead of sending them directly to clients (that is,
manual mailing). Using manual shipping, superusers can set up the
prices for the delivery service.

customers to use FedEx or UPS as their delivery carriers for product

distribution. The prices for the delivery are generated online by the
respective delivery carrier (that is, FedEx or UPS) and sent back to the
store. In addition, you can apply Markup, which can be added to the cost
of the goods to cover the overhead expenses.
order is sent to a different address. For example, a customer may order a
set of postcards and distribute them to recipients directly using a mail
drop. Using manual mailing, superusers can set up the prices for the
delivery service.

Note: Disabling delivery will remove the delivery option from the Store
Setup as well as from the Store itself. Furthermore, the Delivery Services
tab (see Figure 184) will be disabled.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 212

Setting Up Delivery Options
Figure 182: Store Setup Page - Delivery Settings tab

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 213

Setting Up Delivery Options

The Delivery Settings tab includes the following options:

Option

Description

Disable/Enable
Delivery

Choose whether to enable or disable

delivery. Selecting the Disable
Delivery option, will remove the
delivery option from the Store Setup
as well as from the Store itself.
Furthermore, the Delivery Services
tab (see Figure 175) will be disabled.

Mailing Providers
Manual Mailing

Select Manual Mailing to use peritem delivery.

Shipping Options
Allow Shipping to
multiple addresses
(split shipping)

Select this checkbox to allow uStore

customers to split shipping by
selecting multiple addresses for their
order delivery. Split shipping is
allowed in the following cases:
When ordering more than one
product, a customer can select a
different shipping address for each
product.
For products that do not have a
Recipient List attached, a
customer can choose to select
multiple shipping addresses for
different quantities of the same
product.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 214

Setting Up Delivery Options
Select this checkbox to enable your
customers the to select shipping
addresses from a global address
book. Once this checkbox is selected,
you have the option to upload a
global address book.
The global address book can only
contain countries and states (or
provinces) marked as supported for a
given store in the Supported
Locations section of the Store
Setup page (see Figure 174).

Allow shipping
address selection
from a global list

Make sure that your Global Address

List file includes the codes of the
required countries and states (or
provinces).
In the Storefront, the customer will
be able to select shipping address
either from his shipping address list
or from a global address book. Once
a global address is selected, it is
automatically added to the
customers address list.
Address
Selection Title

Enter the name of the global address

book. This name will be displayed to
the customer in the Storefront.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 215

Setting Up Delivery Options
Upload and
replace list

Clicking this link will open the

Upload Address List window where
you can browse for the address book
file and upload it.

Figure 183: Upload Address List

Please note that the Country column

in the uploaded file must contain a
country code as it appears in the
System Setup Country table, for
example US for United States (see
Setting Up the Country Table).
Download
template

Click this link to download the global

address template file
(GlobalAddressTemplate.xls). You can
use this template to create your
global address book and then upload
it to uStore Back Office using the
Upload and replace list link (see
above).

Download
existing list

Click this link to download the

existing list for editing.

Account

Select the FedEx account you want to

use as defined in the uStore Presets.
See Setting Up Delivery Accounts.

Default Drop
Off Type

Select the default drop off type that

will be used for delivery fulfillment.

Shipping Providers
Fedex

UPS

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 216

Setting Up Delivery Options

Manual Shipping

Pickup Address

Account

Select the UPS account you want to

use as defined in the uStore Presets.
See Setting Up Delivery Accounts on
page 82.

Delivery
Confirmation

Select the delivery confirmation

method. Available options include:
No confirmation
Confirmation
Signature
Adult signature
Select Manual Shipping to use pershipment delivery.
Select the pickup address you want
to use for your store. Addresses are
defined in the Presets view >
System Setup > Global Address
table. See Setting Up the Global
Address Table on page 130.
You can also click the Add or Edit
links to add a new pickup address or
edit an existing one.
Note that the new address will be
available for this store only.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 217

Setting Up Delivery Services

Setting Up Delivery Services

In the Delivery Services tab you can determine which services of the delivery
providers set in the Delivery Settings tab you want to allow in your store.
Figure 184: Store Setup Page Delivery Services tab

The Delivery Services tab includes the following columns:

Column

Description

Show

Select the delivery service you want to allow in your store.

The services you select here are made available for selection
to the end customer during the purchase process.

Name

Name of the delivery service.

Display Name

The name of the delivery service as it appears in the store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 218

Setting Up Permissions
Markup:
Fixed Markup &
Markup %

Markup value can be added as a fixed price (Fixed Markup) or

as a percentage of the total delivery cost to cover overhead
expenses.
The total markup value is calculated as follows (in case both
percentage and fixed markups are used):

ActualPrice
Display Order

100 + Markup%
+ FixedMarkup
100

Use the up and down arrows to set the location of the

delivery service in the list that appears during store setup and
in the store itself.

Setting Up Permissions
The Permissions tab is composed of the following three sections:

Automatic Assignment to Stores: In this section you can assign registered

customers either to All Stores or to the selected Store (This Store Only).

Automatic Assignment to Groups: This section is displayed only if the

Enable Registration checkbox is selected in the General tab (see Enabling

Registration). In this section you can auto-assign registered and

anonymous users to User Groups.

Password policy: In this section you can define password settings, such as

Groups with permissions to this store: In this section you can specify

expiry policy, format and account lockout.

Pricing and Billing permissions for those Groups.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 219

Setting Up Permissions
Figure 185: Store Setup Page: Permissions tab

Once a new store is created, uStore automatically creates User Groups for this
store and assigns store users to them. The automatically created User Groups
inherit permission from the default User Groups for registered and
anonymous users.

Automatic User Assignment to Stores

The system automatically assigns registered customers to All Stores. When
assigning a user to all stores, this user cannot register to other stores using the
same email address.
Alternatively, you can assign registered customers to a specific store by
selecting This Store Only. In this case, uStore allows to register to different
stores with the same email address.
Assigning customers to a specific store or to all stores does not override the
permissions defined in the User Group. To ensure that customers can
successfully log in to the store, you need to edit the User Group's permissions
and make sure that the User Group is allowed to access the store.

Automatic User Assignment to Groups

For stores in which registration is enabled (see Enabling Registration), the
system will auto-assign a permission group to registered users in the
Registered Customers field. The name of the user group is <Store name>
(ID:<ID number>)- Registered Customers and it inherits permissions
from the default Customer Root User Group. To view the permissions of the

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 220

Setting Up Permissions

auto-assigned group, go Users>Groups, click the Group name in the User

Groups list and then, in the User Group Setup page go to the Permission tab
(see Assigning Permissions to the User Group). You may modify the group
assignment by selecting a different User Group in the Registered Users list.
Please note that only User Groups that are permitted to this store are allowed
for selection. To make a User Group available for selection, go to the
Permissions tab in the User Group setup page and grant the User Group
permissions for this store (see Assigning Permissions to the User Group).
For public stores (B2C), the system will auto-assign permission groups to
both registered and anonymous users.
You may modify the group assignment. The Anonymous Customers list will
appear only for public stores. The name of the anonymous User Group is
<Store name> (ID:<ID number>) - Anonymous Customers.

Password Policy
The Store administrator can set up a password policy for a store. This
password policy, including lockout, history and expiration, will be enforced
in the Storefront Login page where the customer is asked to enter a password
in order to login to the application. The password format is enforced only
when registering or updating the password.
Note: If a user is registered to several stores, the password validation is
performed according to the password policy defined in the first store the
user is registered to.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 221

Setting Up Permissions

The following password settings can be defined:

Password expires: This setting determines the password expiry

Never: Select this button if you do not want to enforce periodic

password renewal
After ... days: Select this radio button and enter the number of days
after which the login password will expire.

Enforce password format: This setting determines rules for password

composition

Minimum characters: Enter the minimum number of characters

allowed in a password

Maximum characters: Enter the maximum number of characters

allowed in a password

Minimum Lower Case characters: Enter the minimum number of low

case characters required in a password. This setting is valid for Latin

characters only.

Minimum Upper Case characters: Enter the minimum number of upper

case characters required in a password. This setting is valid for Latin

characters only.

Minimum Numeric Characters: enter the minimum number of numeric

characters required in a password.
Minimum Non-Alpha Numeric Characters: Enter the minimum number

of numeric characters (for example, !@#$%^&*())required in a

password

No reuse of historical passwords for ... password renewals: Enter the

number of password renewals during which the customer cannot

reuse the password. For example, if you enter 3, the customer will
not be able to use his current password during the next three
password renewals.

Password must not contain user name or email: Select this checkbox if

you want to block passwords containing user name or email. Neither

an entire email address nor parts of it (for example, only the person

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 222

Setting Up Permissions

name or the company name) are accepted. This ensures a higher

password security.

Enforce account lockout: In this section you define the account lockout

policy for the store. Please note that the account lockout is per user and
not per user and store.

Account locked after...invalid logon attempts: Enter the number of

invalid logon attempts after which the account will be locked.
Lockout counter reset: ...minutes after last logon attempt: Enter the
number of minutes after which the locked account will be unlocked.

Once the account is locked, the Store administrator can manually unlock
the user, by unchecking the User is locked out checkbox in the User Setup
page (see Figure 341).
Note: If you do not enter value into one of the Password Policy text boxes,
the empty policy will not be enforced during password validation process.

Groups with permissions to this store

This section lists the Groups with permissions to this store and enables the
administrator to limit the display of prices and billing information to the
selected Groups.
The default selection is to show prices and billing information to all allowed
User Groups.

Show Prices: Leave this checkbox selected if you want to show prices
for your store products, and clear it, if you want to hide them. You
may choose to hide prices when this information is not relevant for
the shopper.
Show Billing Address: Leave this checkbox selected if you want the
user to fill in the Billing Address section in the Checkout-Order
Summary page of the Storefront (Figure 186). You may choose to clear

this checkbox, if the user performing an order is not the one that is
actually performing the payment.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 223

Setting Up Permissions
Figure 186: Checkout - Order Summary Page, Order Options

Billing Address

In case the user has a limited budget but he is not the one who performs the
payment, you may choose to select the Show Prices checkbox and clear the
Show Billing Address checkbox.

Groups Billing Address: If you do not select the Show Billing Address

checkbox, you have to specify the default Billing Address for all the
orders performed by the users of that store. When you clear the how
Billing Address checkbox, a pop-up window is displayed to enable
you to enter a billing address to be used for all the selected group
members.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 224

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters
Figure 187: Billing Information pop-up

Fill in the billing address and click Submit. The billing address will be
displayed in the Groups Billing Address column.
Note: The Country list contains only countries marked as supported for a
given store in the Appearance tab > Supported Locations section of the
Store Setup page (see Figure 174).

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters

The Advanced tab enables you to:

Set a USAData account that will be used in your store.

Select a custom-made pricing model other than the default one.

Set the default proof type that will be available at the store.

Define the email provider you want to use for sending email messages
with uStore.

Replace the default XMPies uStore Users Guide with a context-sensitive

help file or any other online help mechanism.

Set security options (SSL)

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 225

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters
Figure 188: Store Setup Page: Advanced tab

The Advanced tab includes the following options:

Option

Description

Advanced
USADATA Account Select the USAData account to be used in this store.

Select No Selection if you do not want to use the

USAData services. Note that the selection of the USAData
recipient list will be displayed when setting up your
product recipient list, as described in Setting Up
Recipients (Dynamic, Composite and Email Documents
Only) although you will not be able to select it.
To add USADATA accounts, go to Presets > System
Setup > USADASTA accounts.
Pricing Model uStore provides one default pricing model.
Default Proof Type You can allow customers to proof their documents as

either PDF files or JPEG files. Select the default proof type
that will be presented to the customers at the store. The
selection you make here is applicable to the entire range
of store products. You can, however, override that
selection when you set up a product. See Setting Up
Products Saving your Product.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 226

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters
Email Provider Enables you to define the email provider you want to use

for sending email messages with uStore. By default, the

Email Provider list includes a predefined email provider:
uStore SMTP. Email messages that are sent using
uStore SMTP, are sent via uStore. To define additional
SMTP services, refer to Configuring the Email Server.
In addition, you can select an email provider from the
ones already defined in uProduce. For example, you can
use ExactTarget delivery or an SMTP service that was
previously configured in uProduce. For further information
on configuring email providers in uProduce, refer to the
uProduce Users Guide.
When you first create a store, you are required to enter
your uProduce credentials: username and password, in
order to establish a connection with uProduce (see
Setting Up General Information). To retrieve the most
recent list of email providers that are defined in uProduce,
click the Refresh Email Providers List in the
Advanced tab.
Insert Help Files

When customers click the stores Help button, uStore

displays an online help file. By default, this help file is the
uStore Storefront Guide. You can replace this file with a
general Custom Help File, or with Context Sensitive
Help per-page.
The path to your help file may be either absolute or
relative:

Absolute pathspecify the full URL to your help

file.

Relative path:

1.

Place your help file under the virtual directory of

the uStore Storefront application:

C:\XMPie\uStore\App\CustomerApp.
2.

Specify the relative path to this help file.

For example, simply write help.html.

Custom Help File Set your store with a general help file, which will be

shared by all pages. To point to your own help file, specify

its path in the Help File text box. Note that if you do not
specify a path, clicking the Help button displays an
Under Construction page.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 227

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters
Context Sensitive Set each page in your store with its own context-sensitive
Help help file (instead of a single file that is shared by all

pages):

1.

Click the Edit link to launch the Context

Sensitive Help Edit window (Figure 189).

3.

For each Originating Page in your store, enter

the relevant help files path into the Help File
text box.
To define a default help file for all pages that are
not associated with a specific help file, specify its
path in the Any Unassigned Page text box.

4.

When you are done, click OK.

Figure 189: Context Sensitive Help Edit window

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 228

Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters
Security Options
(SSL)

Specify how to use the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

protocol to secure the information users enter into your
online stores (for example, login or payment details).
Securing uStore using SSL requires one of the following
certificates, depending on the number of domains you
want to secure:
A regular SSL certificate secures a single domain.
This certificate is useful for securing a single store, or
several stores that share the same domain name, but
differ by their sub-folder name.
A Multi Domain SSL certificate secures multiple
domains. This certificate is useful for securing several
stores that have different domain names (friendly
URLs).
For information on requesting and installing an SSL
certificate, see Requesting and Installing an SSL
Certificate.
Once you have installed and configured SSL on your
websites Internet Information Server (IIS), you can
configure it in uStore by choosing one of the options
below.
Note: When a Proxy server is used in front of an
application server and all connections coming from the
web to the uStore server are routed through the Proxy
server, the SSL certificate must be installed on both
uStore and Proxy servers.

Not Secure This store is not secured by SSL. This option is useful

while you are working offline and are in the process of

setting up the store.
NOTE: Once you make the store available online, make
sure you change this setting to either Secure All or
Secure Critical Points.
Secure All Secures all pages in this store. This configuration may

significantly slow down the page loading. Use this

configuration only when absolutely necessary.
Secure Critical Points This option secures all the storefront pages that contain

passwords, personal information or payment details, such

as Login, Checkout - Order Summary, and Personal
Information pages.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 229

Saving your Store Settings

Saving your Store Settings

Figure 190: Store Setup Page Saving Your Store Settings

Once you are finished defining the stores properties, click Save. The new
store is added to the Store list page (Figure 191). You can also click Save &
Place Online if you want to make your store available to customers online.
Figure 191: Store List Page with New Store Listed

You can modify the store properties at a later stage by clicking Setup next to
the store you want to configure. If the Store is already online, click the Take
Offline link at the top left or bottom left sides of the Store Setup page, before
you modify the store properties (Figure 192).
Figure 192: Store Setup Page Take Offline Link

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 230

Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a Store

Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a

Store
A Store Administrator can determine whether orders made in the store
require approval prior to being processed. If the order approval process is
applied to the store, all orders made by customers will have to be approved
by users with approval permissions.

To set up an order approval procedure for a store:

1.

In the Stores view > Store : <Store Name> page, click Store Settings >
Order Approval process.
Figure 193: Order Approval Process button

Note: The Order Approval Process button is hidden for uStore Connect
stores.

The Order Approval page is displayed:

Figure 194: Order Approval Page - No Approval

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 231

Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a Store

The Order Approval process is not compatible with all the Clearing
options. For example, if a credit card is used for the order payment, no
order approval can be applied. In case you selected for your store a
clearing option that is incompatible with the Order Approval process, the
Order Approval page will show a warning message:
Figure 195: Order Approval page - Clearing Options Error

In this case you have to go back to Store Setup >Clearing tab (see Creating
a Clearing Model) and select Clearing options that are compatible with
the Order Approval process.
2.

To activate the Order Approval process in the store, select the Orders in
this store require approval checkbox. Once this checkbox is selected,
additional fields are displayed allowing you to configure the approval
process:

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 232

Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a Store
Figure 196: Order Approval Page - Approval Selected

Note: Once the Orders in this store require approval checkbox is selected,
all Clearing methods that are available in the mall but are not compatible
with the Order Approval process will be hidden in the Clearing tab of the
Store Setup to prevent errors. If you want to enable the use of a credit card
in the store, you will have to clear the Orders in this store require approval
checkbox for this store before making this Clearing option available.

3.

Select the type of the Approval Process you want to apply to your store:
a.

Same approval process for all store orders: there is a single approval
process for all orders in the store. In the Approvers Group list, select

the User Group that will be responsible for order approvals.

Note: User Groups that have no users cannot be assigned to

approve orders.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 233

Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a Store

If you want to enable the customer to select an approver, select the

User is allowed to select an approver checkbox. This selection will
have the following effect in the Storefront:

b.

The customer will have the option to select the specific approver
from the Approval Group. All the available approver names will
be listed in the Approver list in the Checkout Order Summary page.
The customer will be able to change the approver selection in the
Order History > Order Details page using the Change Approver
button. This option will be available for orders that are pending
approval.

Each user group permitted to this store has a different approval

process: there is a specific approval process for each User Group that

is allowed to this store. Once you select this option, additional fields
are displayed allowing you to select an Approver Group for each
Customer User Group:
Figure 197: Order Approval - Approval Process per User Group

Column

Description

Group Name

The name of the customer User Group.

Groups Priority

Use the arrows to set the priority of the customer User

Group. The highest priority is 1.
Setting the Groups priority is important for users that
are members in several customer User Groups with
different approval processes. In this case, the approval
process of the highest Group priority will be applied.
Note that changing the priority will not affect the
existing pending orders.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 234

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store
Approvers

The name of the Approvers User Group. In the

Approvers Group list, select the name of the
Approvers Group. If you do not want to apply an
approval process for a certain customer User Group,
select the No approval required option.
If you want to enable the customer to select an
approver, select the User is allowed to select an
approver checkbox.

The User Groups that can be selected as Approvers must satisfy the
following two conditions:

They must have permissions for this store -- that is, the name of the
store must be selected in the Allowed to Stores field in the User Group
Setup page of this User Group (see Assigning Permissions to the User
Group)
They must have the Approve Customer Orders permission selected for
the Storefront (see uStore Back Office Add New User Group
Permissions tabs).
Note: When you clear the Orders in this store require approval
checkbox, all Approvers Group assignments are deleted.

4.

In the Text Insertion section, you may edit the notification message
appearing in the Order Confirmation Text using approval process text box.
This message will be displayed to the customer in the Storefront Order
Summary page when the order status is Pending Approval.

5.

Click Save.

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store

uStore enables you to set up a customized receipt template for your store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 235

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store

Designing a New Receipt Template

To set up a Receipt template:
1.

In the Stores view > Store : <Store Name> page, click Store Settings >
Receipt Setup.
Figure 198: Receipt Setup

The Receipt Setup page is displayed:

Figure 199: Receipt Setup page

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 236

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store

This page shows the default uStore receipt template or the last receipt
template (if the default template has been modified).
2.

Click Edit to modify the receipt template. The receipt template is

displayed within a Text Editor and available for editing.
Figure 200: Receipt Template: Edit Mode

3.

Edit the content of your Receipt Template using the available editing
options.

You can edit the receipt template using either the Design or the
HTML mode.
To add variables, click the Insert Variable button on the toolbar and
select a variable from the list:
Note: In addition to the list of pre-defined variable, uStore supports adding
more variables that the user will be able to add to the HTML design. This
can be done by changing the SQL queries that are used to fetch the order
data, and the configuration of the variable fields. To add variables that do
not appear in the list, please contact XMPie Professional Services.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 237

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store
Figure 201: Receipt Template: Insert Variable

4.

To add an image, click the Insert Image button and upload an image.
The supported image formats are: JPEG, PNG and GIF. To edit the
image settings (for example, size), right-click the image and select
Properties. In the Properties dialog, edit the relevant settings.

Click Save.
The Save Receipt window is displayed:
Figure 202: Save Receipt

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 238

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store
.

Warning: Saving the modified receipt template will permanently

remove the previous receipt template.
You can click the Preview Receipt link to preview the receipt and approve
it. The preview can also be accessed at any stage during the receipt
template design by clicking the Preview button in the Receipt Template
page. The receipt preview will be displayed in a new browser window
(Figure 203 on page 239).

5.

If you approve the receipt design, select the I approve the receipt
checkbox in the Save Receipt window and click OK.

Previewing a Receipt
To preview a Receipt:
1.

In the Stores view > Store: <Store Name> page, click Store Settings >
Receipt Setup (Figure 198).
The Receipt Setup page is displayed (Figure 199).

2.

Click Preview to display the preview of the currently defined receipt.

The receipt preview is displayed in a new browser window.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 239

Setting Up a Receipt Template for a Store
Figure 203: Receipt Template Preview

The preview window will display the receipt for the last order made in
the store. You can preview receipts for any other order, by selecting the
Order ID in the Recent Orders list (showing the last 20 Order IDs) or by
typing a different Order ID from this store in the text box and clicking
View.
If the store has no orders, the preview will be empty.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 240

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store

Restoring the Default Receipt Template

To restore the default Receipt template:
1.

In the Stores view > Store: <Store Name> page, click Store Settings >
Receipt Setup (Figure 198).
Note: You can also restore the default receipt template while editing the
receipt.

The Receipt Setup page is displayed (Figure 199).

2.

Click Restore Default Receipt. The Receipt Setup page is opened in the
Edit Mode and the default receipt template is restored.

3.

Click Save.
The Save Receipt window is displayed:
Figure 204: Save Receipt

Warning: Saving the default receipt template will permanently

remove the previous receipt template.

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store

LivePerson is a world leader in online engagement technologies. LivePerson
provides you with tools to create meaningful, real-time customer connections
that help your business increase conversions and improve consumer
experience.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 241

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store

uStores partnership with LivePerson enables you to add a chat button to

your store. The LivePerson chat button will enable you to:

Help store visitors choose products and clarify any issues regarding the
checkout process.

Walk store visitors through document customizations or setting up

prepress workflows.

Engage with visitors who stall on a page for more than a predefined
period of time.

Answer questions in real-time about shipping and order delivery dates.

If you purchased the LivePerson Chat feature, contact your LivePerson

account manager to get more information on how to deploy the LivePerson
Chat solution. For more information, see the LivePerson Chat for XMPie page
at http://solutions.liveperson.com/promotions/xmpie/.

Adding a Chat Button to Your Store Pages

Before you set up your chat button on uStore, you need to set up the chat
button on the Page Code Builder section of your LivePerson Admin Console.
Figure 205: LivePerson implementation steps
On LivePerson

On uStore

Step 1:
Set up chat
button

Step 2:
Copy the button
tag code

Step 3:
Paste the button
tag

Step 4:
Copy the monitor
tag

Step 5:
Paste the
monitor tag

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 242

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store

On LivePerson: Setting Up the Chat Button in the

Admin Console
To implement LivePersons chat button on your store, you need to add two
code segments to your HTML pages:

Monitor tag: The monitor tag provides real-time tracking and monitoring
of all your stores visitors and enables additional functionality such as the
use of rules to proactively engage with store visitors. To be able to
monitor visitors in all your pages, you need to add the monitor tag to all
your HTML pages.

Button code: The button code determines the location of the chat button
on the HTML page and enables visitors to start a chat session with one of
your stores agents.

The required button and monitor code is generated on the Page Code Builder
page in the LivePerson Admin Console.

To open the Page Code Builder page:

1.

Go to www.LivePerson.com and sign in to the Customer Center.

2.

In the Customer Center, in the My LivePerson menu at the upper right

corner, select Admin Console.

3.

In the Admin Console, go to Account Set Up>Page Code Builder.

4.

Follow the steps for setting up the chat button and in the Get HTML Code
tab, copy the button tag and the monitor tag, respectively and paste the
code to the LivePerson page in uStore. uStore adds the code to every store
page. See On uStore Back Office: Adding the LivePerson Code to a Store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 243

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store
Figure 206: Get HTML Tags with sample codes

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 244

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store

For more information on how to set up the chat button on LivePersons

Admin Console, see the Code Page Builder user guide at http://
base.liveperson.net/hc/s-5296924/cmd/kbresource/kb1107264422380878742/!DOWNLOAD?entryid=346640&attachid=32511.
Consult your LivePerson account manager for details on the most up-to-date
documentation and training materials.

On uStore Back Office: Adding the LivePerson Code to a

Store
After you set up the chat button in the LivePerson Admin Console, the next
step is to add the required code to uStore. To make sure that you can track
and monitor all visitors in your store and that the chat button is available on
every page, uStore adds the monitor tag and the button code to all your
stores pages.

To implement LivePerson chat on your store:

1.

In the Stores view> Store: <Store Name> page, click Store

Setting>LivePerson.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 245

Implementing LivePerson Chat in Your Store
Figure 207: Adding the LivePerson code to uStore

2.

In the upper box, paste the button code that you copied from the Page
Code Builder page in the LivePerson Admin Console.

3.

In the second box, paste the monitor tag that you copied from the Page
Code Builder page in the LivePerson Admin Console.

4.

Click Save.
From now on, a chat button is displayed on all your stores pages
(Figure 208). In addition, you can monitor and track visitors on all your
stores pages through the LivePerson Agent Console.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 246

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store
Figure 208: A stores homepage with a chat button

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store

Google Analytics is a platform that enables you to assess the performance of
your online stores. It enables you to track traffic and usage of your store
pages and understand how visitors navigate the store.
Among other things, with Google Analytics, you can:

Get real-time statistics on your stores traffic and usage: How many
visitors are in the store and which pages they are viewing.

View your visitors navigation path and see where your visitors drop off.
You can see this in the Real-Time > Visitors Flow reports. These reports
show you on which pages visitors leave your store. Analyzing these
pages will help you improve the visitor experience on these pages.

Set up metrics to track sales and conversions.

View traffic and usage reports that will help you make decisions to
improve your stores performance.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 247

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store
Figure 209: Google Analytics implementation steps
uStore

Google Analytics
Step 1:
Set up Google
Analytics account

Step 2:
Copy Google
Analytics code

Step 3:
Paste code on
uStore

Step 4:
View statistics

On Google Analytics: Setting Up the Stores Account

To implement Google Analytics on uStore, first you need to have a Google
account, then you create a Google Analytics account for each store that you
want to track.
Note: You need to create a new Google Analytics account for each store
that you want to track.

To start tracking your stores statistics with Google Analytics, you need to
add a code segment to the stores HTML pages.

To get the required Google Analytics code:

1.

Go to the Google.com/analytics page and create a Google Analytics

account for your store. Alternatively, you can click the Google Analytics
logo on the Store Setup>Google Analytics page.
If you want to track several stores, it is recommended to name each
Google Analytics account according to the name of the store. This will
make it easy for you to find the relevant store, when you view the
tracking reports in the Google Analytics website.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 248

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store
Figure 210: Google Analytics: Creating a Google Analytics account for your store

2.

On the Account Administration page, set up the required parameters:

a.

Under What would you like to track?, select Web Site.

b.

Under Website Name, type a name for your website. For example,
you can name it uStore1.

c.

Under Web Site URL, type your organizations website. Note that you
need to use a real domain name.

d. In the Account Name box, type the name of your store.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 249

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store

When Google Analytics creates the account, it generates a Tracking

ID.

3.

Click Get Tracking ID.

On the Website Tracking area, select the Website Tracking parameters.

4.

Click Save.
Google Analytics generates the code required to track the store.

5.

Copy the tracking code snippet.

You need to paste this code on the Google Analytics page in the uStore
Back Office application.
Note: You need to generate a new account, with a new Tracking ID for each
store that you want to track. Each store uses a different code snippet.

Figure 211: Google Analytics code snippet

For more information on how to set up Google Analytics, see https://

support.google.com/analytics/bin/
answer.py?hl=en&utm_medium=et&utm_campaign=en_us&utm_source=Se
tupChecklist&answer=1008080

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 250

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store

In the uStore Back Office: Adding the Google

Analytics Code to the Store
After you set up the Google Analytics account and copy the code snippet
from the Google Analytics site, the next step is to add the required code to
uStore. To make sure that you can track the specific store, uStore adds the
Google Analytics code to all the stores pages.

To implement Google Analytics on your store:

1.

In the Stores view> Store: <Store Name> page, click Store Setting>Google
Analytics.

2.

In the upper box, paste the Google Analytics code that you copied from
the Tracking ID page in the Google Analytics website.
Figure 212: Adding Google Analytics code to the store

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 251

Implementing Google Analytics in Your Store

3.

Click Save.
Google Analytics immediately starts collecting the stores traffic and
usage data.

Viewing Google Analytics Reports

To view the statistics provided by Google Analytics:
1.

Go to http://www.google.com/analytics/

2.

On the top-right corner of the page, click Sign In.

3.

In the Account Home page, click the accounts profile. You may need to
expand the menu as required.

4.

On the left pane, select the reports you want to view.

To view real-time status, on the left pane, select Real-Time>Overview.

To view visitors navigation path and drop-off pages, select
Audience>Visitors Flow.

Figure 213: Google Analytics Real-Time reports

To learn more about how to read Google Analytics data, see http://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=mm78xlsADgc.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 252

Adding Custom JavaScript to Your Store

Adding Custom JavaScript to Your Store

With uStore Custom JavaScript Editor, you can customize the look and feel of
your store by adding rich, interactive content. JavaScript allows you to create
highly responsive interfaces that improve the user experience and provide
dynamic functionality. For example, you can use JavaScript to hide a button
or to change its behavior, to skip pages in the Storefront flow and more.
In addition to JavaScript, jQuery code is also supported.

To add custom JavaScript to your Store:

1.

In the Stores view> Store: <Store Name> page, click Store

Setting>Custom JavaScript Editor.

2.

In the Custom JavaScript Editor window, paste your JavaScript code.

Figure 214: Adding Custom JavaScript to Your Store

3.

Click Save.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 253

Previewing a Store

Important: Please read carefully the XMPie Disclaimer before adding

Custom JavaScript.

Previewing a Store
When editing a store in the uStore Back Office application, an administrator
can conveniently click a Preview link (Figure 191) to launch the uStore
Storefront application, automatically log in with his or her credentials, and
view the relevant store displayed.
When you log into the uStore Storefront application as an administrator, you
can experience your customers workflow and process an order.

Previewing the Store As Another User

uStore enables you to view what a store looks like to other users. This feature
is useful to check user permissions and make sure that the user sees only
products that are targeted at his user group.
In addition, this feature can also be helpful, if a specific user complains that
he cant find a specific product in the store, you can preview the store using
that users email address and troubleshoot the issue.
Note: Only users with superuser permissions can preview a store as another
user.
Figure 215: Preview store as another user

To preview a store using a specific user:

1.

On the store page, click the arrow (

) next to the Preview button.

2.

Type the users email and click the button (

) next to it.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 254

Duplicating a Store

Duplicating a Store
uStore supports duplicating a complete store with all its contents. This is very
useful if you want to reproduce several stores that differ from each other with
minor details such as the store skin, local language, etc.
The original and the duplicated stores are identical except for the following
differences:

The initial state of a duplicated store is offline (assuming it requires some

fine-tuning to distinguish it from the original store, before it is placed
online)

The Store ID is different.

The store name and friendly URLs store folder are preceded with Copy
[x].

The permissions of the original store are not kept for the duplicated store.
The Superuser must set new access rights to the store administrators,
whether new or the existing ones (see Assigning Permissions to the User
Group).

The Order Approval settings are not kept in the duplicated store.

To duplicate a store:
In the Stores page, select the store you want to duplicate and click Duplicate.
The duplicated store is added to the store list. In the example below, we
duplicated the store Store1. The duplicated store is added with the prefix
Copy[X], where X symbolizes the copy number in a consecutive manner.
Figure 216: Store List Page with a Duplicated Store

Localizing a Store
uStore enables you to localize the dynamic (store-specific) text of your store.
For example, you can localize the text of categories, groups and product
names.

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 255

Localizing a Store

For more information on the static text localization, see Localizing Your
Storefront and Back Office.

To localize a dynamic text of a store:

1.

Click the Localize link near it in the Stores view: Store List page. The
Culture Selections page is displayed:
Figure 217: Store Setup Page: Advanced tab

The cultures with missing localizations are marked with the

icon.

You can now edit, export or import localizations.

Note: The only available cultures are those you have added during the store
setup. See Defining the Store Locale.

2.

To edit the store localization definitions, click the Edit button

the selected language in the Localization Table.
The Culture Sections page is displayed:

next to

Chapter 5: Setting Up a Store 256

Localizing a Store
Figure 218: Culture Sections Page for the Store Localization

The Culture Sections page lists all available tables (available for the
selected store) that of can be localized. The tables that have missing
localizations will be marked with the
3.

icon.

To localize a table with missing localizations, click its link. The

Localization page for the selected system table is displayed.

4.

Enter the translations for the selected table as described in Localizing

System Tables.

5.

To export localizable strings to an Excel file, perform the steps described

in Exporting and Importing Localizations.

To import the translated strings from an Excel file, perform the steps
described in Exporting and Importing Localizations.

Chapter

Working with Product Profiles

This chapter describes how to work with Product Profiles and provides stepby-step instructions on how to create and manage Product Profiles.

Product Profiles: Overview

After you set up a store, the next step is to set up the products that will be
available in the store. To simplify maintenance and management of products,
uStore enables you to create Product Profiles. Product Profiles contain a set of
product properties that you can apply to several products. When you link
products to Product Profiles, you can easily edit product properties and make
global changes without the need to open each product separately. All your
changes are automatically applied to all products that are linked to the
Product Profile.
Product Profiles are useful if you need to update products properties often or
if you have groups of products that share the same set of properties.
For example, if you create a Product Profile for business cards, you can link
all the available business-card products in your store to that profile and
ensure that all business cards have the same parameters, such as stock type,
order quantities, and pricing, among others.
When you work with Product Profiles, it is recommended that you first set up
the Product Profiles and afterwards, set up the products themselves.
Figure 219: uStore workflow using Product Profiles
Set Up
Presets

Set Up
Store

Set Up
Product Profiles
(Optional)

Set Up
Products

Product Profiles enable you to define product properties, pricing and

prepress setup.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 258

Creating Product Profiles

When you work with Product Profiles you still need to set up products separately
to define properties that are not covered by Product Profiles and to link each
product to a profile.
Note that the Product Profile feature helps you maintain and update products in
an efficient and fast manner, but you can still set up products without creating
Product Profiles.
In case you do not need to create Product Profiles, you can skip directly to Setting
Up Products to learn how to set up products and make them available on your
store.

Creating Product Profiles

Lets say that your store sells brochures, calendars and business cards. All your
brochures have similar paper stock options and price structure. In such case, you
do not need to open every brochure product and set up its paper stock and
pricing parameters separately. You can create a Product Profile called Brochures
and link each brochure to this profile. After you link the brochure to the Product
Profile, you can update or modify the settings in the profile and all brochures that
are linked to this profile are automatically updated.
When you work with Product Profiles, you perform the following procedures:
1.

Create a new Product Profile: define the product name, provide a description
so that it is easy to understand which products should be linked to this profile
and define the profiles currency and setup language. See To create a Product
Profile:.

2.

Set up product properties: define all the parameters that will be available to
products that are linked to the profile. See Setting Up Product Properties.

3.

Set up product pricing: determine the pricing parameters for all products
linked to the profile. See Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters.

4.

Set up prepress workflows: define how and where the job will be printed.
You can send the job to workflows defined on the Xerox FreeFlow Core
software or Xerox Process Manager. In addition, you can set up manual
workflows that export the print job to a hot folder. You can also select to send
the job to a hot folder, by defining a manual workflow. See Setting Up
Prepress Workflows.

5.

Link product to Product Profile: after you finish setting up a Product Profile,
you can start linking products to use the settings defined in the profile. See
Linking a Product to a Product Profile.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 259

Creating Product Profiles

To create a Product Profile:

1.

In the Views tool bar, select Stores>Product Profiles.

Figure 220: Creating Product Profiles

2.

In the Product Profile List page, click the New Product Profile button.
The Product Profile Setup page opens.

3.

In the Product Profile Name box, enter a name for your profile. For example, if
you are creating this profile to be used for printing business cards, you can
call it Business Card Profile.

4.

In the Descriptions box, enter a significative description for the Product

Profile.

5.

In the Setup Language list, select a language.

Note: This product profile will be available for products in stores that use
the same language as the language that you select here.

6.

In the Currency list, select the currency that will be used for the products
linked to this profile.
Note: This product profile will be available for products in stores that use
the same language and main currency that you select here.
After setup, you cannot change the language of a Product Profile, but you
can change its currency, as long as the product profile is not linked to the
product.
After the product profile is linked to a product, you cannot change its
currency anymore.

7.

Click Save.
The Product Profile Setup page opens.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 260

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 221: Setting up a Product Profile

The next sections describe how to set up the following parameters:

Product properties Setup: define product properties such as binding, color and

Product Pricing Setup: configure the product price and cost as well as price

Prepress Setup: select the workflow required for printing the product. See
Setting Up Prepress Workflows.

paper stock. See Setting Up Product Properties.

and cost steps. See Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters.

Setting Up Product Properties

After you create a Product Profile with a name, currency and setup language, you
can start setting up the relevant product properties for the product profile.
Note: Setting up product properties for a Product Profile is similar to setting
up product properties for an individual product.

In the Product Properties page, you define the set of properties that will be
associated with the product when a customer views the product on the Storefront
and when the product is viewed in the back office. When you set up product
properties, you also define how the properties will be avail a be for customer

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 261

Setting Up Product Properties

selection. For example, you can define the type of stock, lamination, folding and
printing color that will be available for a specific product. In addition, you also
define if these options will be displayed to customers as a drop-down list or a set
of checkboxes.
Product Properties may affect various aspects of product pricing, delivery and
production. For example, a Paper Type property may affect price, whereas a
Paper Weight property may affect delivery. You can add product properties
that may affect product price.
Note: Setting up product properties for Product Profiles is similar to setting
up product properties for a single product.
Figure 222: Product Properties page

The Product Properties list includes the product properties that you define for the
Product Profile. These properties are available to all the products linked to this
profile.

To display all the available properties:

Click the Show Available Properties link.

The Available Properties list displays all the unassigned properties, including
properties that were defined as Global product properties.

For more information on how to define Global product properties, refer to Setting
Up Document Repositories.
The following table describes the information provided on the Product Properties
page and lists the actions that you can perform for each property.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 262

Setting Up Product Properties

Tab Item

Description

Add New Property

You can click this button to set up a new property and

add it to the list of properties. For more details on how to
set up a new product property, see To add a new product
property:
Deletes a product property.

Delete property

Remove/Add button

The pointing-down arrow removes a product property

from the list of selected properties. The property moves
to the list to the Available Properties list.
You can list the pointing-up arrow to add a property from
the Available Properties list to the Product Properties list.

Name link

Opens the Product Properties page in which you can

configure all the property parameters, such as Input
Control and Validation settings.

Control Type

Indicates how the property will be available for customer

selection. For more details on how to set up control
types, see Setting Up Customer Input Controls.

Visible link

Enables you to override the Product Profile visibility

settings, as well as change the default value of a property
option. For more information, see Overriding Product
Profile Settings.

Property details column

Indicates if the property can be edited and if it affects

pricing, delivery or aggregation parameters. It also
indicates if the property is supported by the JDF file
created during product production.

Dependent

Indicates if the property includes subproperties. For

example, the binding property may include several types
of binding under it.

Display Order

Enables you to define the order in which the properties

are displayed on the Storefront.

Show available properties

link

You can click the link to display the list of all the available
Product Properties.

Global

This icon appears in the Available Properties table and

indicates that the property is a global property.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 263

Setting Up Product Properties

To add properties from the list of available properties:

1.

In the list of properties, locate the property that you want to add, and click the
Add

button.

To add a new product property:

1.

Click the Add New Property button. The Product Properties page is displayed:
Figure 223: Product Properties Add Property

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 264

Setting Up Product Properties

2.

Fill in the Display Name and Description fields for the newly created product
property.
Note: If desired, you can design and display an icon to appear in the
Storefront next to the property name.
This icon should be placed in the folder:

\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons
It should be in PNG format and should be 20 x 20 pixels in size. The name
of the image for the selected status should be
PropertyName_selected.PNG and for the unselected status,
PropertyName.PNG. In the current version, this option is only available for
Composite Products

3.

Select whether the product property:

Is visible to customers (Visible to Customer)

Note: You can override visibility settings as well as default property options
when you set up a product. For more information, see Overriding Product
Profile Settings.

Is editable by customers (Customer May Change Values)

Is used in pricing calculation (Used in Pricing Calculation)

Is used in delivery calculation (Used in Delivery Calculation)

You can define a product property that affects delivery cost calculations.
For example, you can define several types of paper (for example, matte,
glossy and plain) where each paper type has a different weight and thus
affects the delivery cost.
Delivery prices are determined during product setup, as in Setting Up
Delivery.

Affects aggregation (Affects Aggregation). For more information on

aggregating orders, refer to Handling Orders.
Is used for Order Item Logical Name (Used for Order Item Logical Name):
this product property is used for tagging a product for reference
purposes. Logical names enable customers to create several occurrences
of the same product in an order thus distinguishing them in the Stores
Shopping Cart, Checkout page and Order History pages.
For example, customers may order the same product twice (for example,
a business card for personal use and for colleagues). The Used for Order
Item Logical Name property is used to name the two products in the order
with a unique name (for example, one will be called my business card
and the other toms business card, etc.).

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 265

Setting Up Product Properties

Is displayed in the Shopping Cart and Order History pages (Show in

Shopping Cart and Order History).

Can trigger split shipping (Split Shipping per Value Selection): when in the
Finalize Step of the ordering process a customer selects a Product
Property value, the system verifies that this value is identical to the
values selected for this Product Property in other products of the same
order. If the values are not identical, the system automatically triggers
split shipping. For example, if a customer ordered two products, both of
which have a Turnaround Time Product Property, and the value of this
property is different for each product (5 days for Product 1 and 10 days
for Product 2), then each one of these products will be shipped separately.
In the Storefront, when the Shopping Cart has items with properties that
are set to Split shipping per value selection, if these properties have the
same name but are assigned different values, the system will show a
warning. The warning will also be displayed if the Shopping Cart
contains one item with a property that is set to Split shipping per value
selection, and another item that does not contain this property.
Is a sub-property of another property (Sub-property of).
You can create a dependency between product properties. A property can
be a sub-property of any property that includes property options such as
Drop Down List, Radio Button List, Checkbox, Gallery List and Gallery
Grid View. A property option can have one sub-property and a subproperty can be dependent on one property option only. Select the
property on which the new property will be dependent from the dropdown list, and then select a property option from the list of options
available for that property. The property will be shown as being
Dependent on the selected property in the Product Properties page (see
Figure 222).
When ordering in the store, the sub-properties are only displayed once
you select the property option on which they are dependent. For
example, if you defined a property for Spiral Colors that was dependent
on the Binding Type being Spiral, the Spiral Color options would only be
displayed, if you selected Spiral from the Binding Type options.

4.

Select the type of Input Control required from the customer (see Setting Up
Customer Input Controls).

5.

Select the Validation Option. The available Validation options vary according
to the selected Input Control (see Validation Options).

6.

Click Save Changes to save the product property.

The product property appears in the Product Properties page (see Figure 222).

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 266

Setting Up Product Properties

Setting Up Customer Input Controls

The Input Control section contains the Input Control drop-down list and the When
the dial has no value, take values from section that enables you to specify the
values for the selected Input Control. The When the dial has no value, take values

from section is displayed differently according to the selected Input Control type.
The Input Control drop-down field enables you to select the type of input required
from the customer.
Note: You can assign JDF node sets to the following customer input
controls:
- Drop-down lists
- Radio buttons
- Gallery list or grid view lists
For more information, see the respective sections below.

Available options are:

Text Input (see Text Input and Multiline Text Input)

Multiline Text Input (see Text Input and Multiline Text Input)

Date Time Picker (see Date Time Picker)

HTML Generic (see HTML Generic)

Dropdown List (see Dropdown List and Radio Button)

Radio Button List (see Dropdown List and Radio Button)

(Popup) Image Selector (see (Popup) Image Selector)

Extended Image Popup Selector (see Extended Image Popup

Selector)

Gallery Image Selector (see Gallery Image Selector)

Get Order Properties (see Get Order Properties)

Checkbox (see Checkbox)

Gallery List/Grid View (see Gallery List/Grid View)

The available Input Controls depend on the Dial type you are editing. For
example:

If the Dial is a Text ADOR Object, the Input Control can be a Text
Input, a Multiline Text Input, a Radio Box List Advanced, a
Dropdown List Advanced or a Gallery List/Grid View.
If the Dial is a Graphic ADOR, the Input Control can be either an
Image Selector, a Popup Image Selector, an Extended Image Selector
or a Gallery Image Selector.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 267

Setting Up Product Properties

Note: For a full list of the Input Controls available per Dial type.
See Appendix A: Input Controls.

Text Input and Multiline Text Input

Text Input is a standard, single line text box that enables the customer to enter a
short, free text input value.
Figure 224: Text Input

Multiline Text Input is similar to the Text Input Control, but enables the
customer to enter several lines of text input.
Figure 225: Multiline Text Input

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 268

Setting Up Product Properties

Once the (Multiline) Text Input is selected, you can set each products Dial values
in the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values can be
one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source (see Take Values from Data Source)

Take Values from Predefined Value(s)

Default Value: the Dials default value, which may be overridden by the
customer. You can also create a list of values to be used as default values
when necessary. To add a fixed value to the Value List, enter the value
text in Text field and click Add.
Spell Checking: applies only to textual dials and properties that

implement text or multiline text input controls. To use the spell checker in
a textual control, select the Use Spell Check checkbox, and then select a
language from the Language list.

You can select both the Take Values from Data Source and the Take values from
Predefined Value(s) options. In that case, if a value is missing in the Data Source, it
will be taken from the values set in the predefined list.

Note: When a Text Input or Multiline Text Input control is defined for a
Dynamic document that is used as a Composite component, the Storefront
user will be able to enter a customized or a personalized value. If during
Customization, the Storefront user enters a value in the text box, it will be
used as customized value. However, if the user leaves this text box empty, it
will then be added as a column to the Recipient List, and he will be able to
enter different values for each recipient and personalize this field. (See
Personalizing Composite Products).

Rich Text Editor

For InDesign Documents (as opposed to XLIM Documents), the Text Input and
Multiline Text Input controls enable you to further enhance your text input by
using the Rich Text Editor. The Rich Text Editor enables customers to further
design and stylize the text they enter in the controls text box by using Rich Text
Format (RTF).
To enable customers to use the Rich Text Editor, select the Use Rich Text Editor
checkbox.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 269

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 226: Rich Text Editor

You can now:

Enable customers to use all fonts available in uProduce by selecting All fonts.
Alternatively, you can limit customers to fonts you select from the entire
range of available fonts by selecting Choose from list and then selecting the
fonts you want available for the customers.

Enable customers to set up the background color by entering the color RGB
code in the Background color (RGB) field. It is recommended to define the
same background color as in the printed document. Setting it enables the user
to preview the text as it will appear on the printed document.

Design the default appearance of the text input control by using the various
design controls available: font type, font size, font color, weight and
alignment.
Note: Available fonts are those that have been previously uploaded to the
relevant Campaign on the uProduce Server. For more details on how to
upload fonts to uProduce, refer to the uProduce Users Guide.
To refresh the list of fonts available to uStore, go to the relevant Product
Setup page (see Figure 13), select Campaign Fonts and then click Save.

The Rich Text Editor appears in the Storefront during product customization:

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 270

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 227: uStore Storefront: Rich Text Editor

Store shoppers are

able to enter their
text and format it as
required

Date Time Picker

The Date Time Picker control enables customers to specify a date and/or time
attribute for an order. You can set the Date Time picker to function as a Popup
(opens when clicked on) or as Inline (always visible). You can also set the date
picker to a predefined period of time by using the Earliest and Latest date options.
Use the Earliest and Latest date options to set predefined dates or dates relative to
an Order date (for example: X days after an order has been made).

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 271

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 228: Date Time Picker Input Controls

Once the Date Time Picker control is selected, you can set each products Dial
values in the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values
can be one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source: this option is disabled.

Take Values Predefined Value(s)

Use: select the date/time format. The following options are available:

Use date & time

Use date only

User time only

Date Picker Type: the picker type can be either Popup or Inline.

Default Value: the Date Pickers default value, which may be overridden

by the customer.

Fixed Date: open the calendar popup and select a fixed date.

Relative: n days/weeks/months before/after Order date.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 272

Setting Up Product Properties

Earliest Date: the earliest date that can be entered for this Dial (for

example, the earliest date for order delivery can be two days after
submitting an order).

Fixed Date: open the calendar popup and select a fixed date.

Relative: n days/weeks/months before/after Order date.

Latest Date: the latest date that can be entered for this Dial (for example,
the latest date for summer sale).

Fixed Date: open the calendar popup and select a fixed date.

Relative: n days/weeks/months before/after Order date.

Time Picker: the time picker format (12 hours: AM/PM or 24 hours)

Default Value: the Time Pickers default value, which may be overridden

by the customer. Open the time popup and select the default time.

Convert to Servers Time Zone: select this checkbox to enable conversion of

the time entered by the user to the servers time zone.

HTML Generic
HTML Generic Input Control enables you to embed personalized HTML in
uStore (in the Markup field) that will be rendered in real-time as the contents of
the Dial control. For example, you can embed a Flash object or a Web page. When
you embed a Flash object, make sure you fill in its Client ID in the Object ID field.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 273

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 229: HTML Generic Input Control

Once the HTML control is selected, you can set each products Dial values in the
When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values can be one of
the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source this option is disabled.

Take values from Predefined Value(s)

Default Value: the Dials default value, which may be overridden by the

customer.

Object ID in case you are embedding a Flash object, fill in its Clients ID.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 274

Setting Up Product Properties

Callback Function: you can define a Java Script Callback Function in the

Callback Function field, which will be available on the page, and call it to
return a value to uStore.

Markup: you can use the following parameters in the markup code:

#DIAL_VALUE#: will be replaced with the value of the dial as saved

in the database.
#DIAL_DISPLAY_NAME#: will be replaced with the name of the
dial as set in Display Name field. See Figure 223.

Dropdown List and Radio Button

Dropdown List enables the customer to choose a value from a list of predefined
options. This Input Control displays the choice list to the user as a standard dropdown control. In addition to defining the the format of the selection and the
values displayed, you can also define a JDF node for each value.
Figure 230: Dropdown List Input Control

Radio Button List is similar to the Dropdown List Input Control but displays
the choice list to the user as a set of standard radio-style inputs.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 275

Setting Up Product Properties

Similarly to the Dropdown list, when you select Radio Button List, you can also
define the JDF node for each value.
Figure 231: Radio Button List Input Control

Once the Radio Button or Dropdown List controls are selected, you can set each
products Dial values in the When the dial has no value, take values from section.
The Dial values can be one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source (see Take Values from Data Source)

Take values from Predefined Value(s)

To set the predefined values for the Radio Box List and the Dropdown List
input controls:
a.

Click the Add new value link and enter a value and a value text to be
presented in the selected control in the Value and Text fields respectively.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 276

Setting Up Product Properties

The text is displayed to the customer and the value is sent to uProduce as
the Dial value.
b.

To add a JDF node to the value, in the JDF node set list, select the
equivalent option.
Note: The list of JDF nodes display the nodes set in Presets>System
Setup>JDF Node Set. For more information, see Setting Up JDF Nodes.

c.

Click

to add the value to the Value List.

d. Repeat this step to add more values to the Value List.

e.

After you add all the required values, to set the default value, select the
checkbox in the Default column.

f.

To edit a value in the Value List, click the

want to edit.

g.

icon next to the value you

You can sort the drop-down list values alphabetically (select

Alphabetical), numerically (select Numerical) or chronologically (select

Creation time).

h. You can also download a template of a Value List Excel Spreadsheet

(click the Download Value List Template link) and upload it again once it is
fully prepared (click the Upload Value List link). The Value List will be
automatically populated with the values you defined in the Excel
Spreadsheet.
You will be notified if errors exist in your spreadsheet. For example:

If an existing value in the Value List has been defined in the

spreadsheet.
If an existing value text in the Value List has been defined in the
spreadsheet.
If the Value List Template is missing a value or a value display text.
If the Value List Template includes duplicates of values or values
text.

You can select both the Take Values from Data Source and the Take values
from Predefined Value(s) options. In that case, if a value is missing in the
Data Source, it will be taken from the values set in the predefined list.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 277

Setting Up Product Properties

(Popup) Image Selector

The Image Selector and the Popup Image Select enable customers to choose
images from the available Campaign Assets on the uProduce Server or to upload
their own pictures and use them in the Document. When these controls are
selected, store administrators can restrict the width, height and ratio ranges of the
uploaded graphic file to predefined measures. The Image Selector shows all the
images on the page, whereas the Popup Image Selector shows only the selected
image on the page together with a button that can be used to pop up a window
with all other images, from which customers can choose.
Figure 232: Popup Image Selector Input Control

Once the (Popup) Image control is selected, you can set each products Dial values
in the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values can be
one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source (see Take Values from Data Source)

Take values from Predefined Value(s) Allow Asset Selection enables

customers to choose images from the available Campaign Asset folders on the
uProduce Server.

Select Asset Source choose the Asset Source folder on the uProduce

Server, from which the images will be chosen for this Dial. The Asset
Source in uProduce is completely synchronized with uStore: if the
Asset Source is modified in uProduce, this change will be
automatically updated in uStore.

Select Default Asset from the above asset source, choose the image
to be displayed as the default picture.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 278

Setting Up Product Properties

Allow Upload enables customers to upload their own pictures and

use them in the document.

You can select both the Take Values from Data Source and the Take values from
Predefined Value(s) options. In that case, if a value is missing in the Data Source, it
will be taken from the values set in the predefined list.
The (Popup) Image Selector is displayed in Storefront:
Figure 233: (Popup) Image Selector

uStore Storefront displays a thumbnail image for the following image types: *.jpg,
*.bmp, *.png and *.gif. Images of unsupported file types can be previewed in the
customers default imaging software by clicking the Click to Preview link.

Extended Image Popup Selector

Extended Image Popup Selector in addition to capabilities offered by the Image
Selector and the Popup Image Selector (such as, selecting or uploading images),
this Input Control enables customers to crop the uploaded images.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 279

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 234: Setting Up the Extended Image Popup Selector Control Type

Once the Extended Image Popup control is selected, you can set each products
Dial values in the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial
values can be one of the following:

Take value from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source (see Take Values from Data Source)

Take values from Predefined Value(s)

Display Mode: the store administrator can select one of the two available
display modes: Slider View (for less than 16 images) and Library (grid)
View (for more than 16 images).
Allow Asset Selection: enables customers to choose images from the

available Campaign Assets on the uProduce Server.

Select Asset Source: choose the Asset Source folder on the uProduce

Server, from which the images will be chosen for this Dial. The Asset
Source in uProduce is completely synchronized with uStore: if the
Asset Source is modified in uProduce, this change will be
automatically updated in uStore.

Select Default Asset: from the above asset source, choose the image to

be displayed as the default picture.

Allow Upload: enables customers to upload their own pictures and use

them in the document.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 280

Setting Up Product Properties

Crop Aspect Ratio: specify the crop ratio (Width:Height) for the uploaded
images. This field is displayed only if the Allow Upload checkbox is
checked. In the Storefront Application, the customer will be able to enter
the Edit Mode for the uploaded images and perform Crop and Enhance
operations. The crop ratio will be as defined in the Crop Aspect Ratio field
in the Back Office. When clicking Enhance, the customer will be offered
several enhancing options with a preview and a possibility to compare
the uploaded image with the enhanced one. You can select both the Take
Values from Data Source and the Take values from Predefined Value(s)
options. In that case, if a value is missing in the Data Source, it will be
taken from the values set in the predefined list.

The Extended Image Selector is displayed in Storefront either as a Library View

((Figure 235) or as a Slider View (Figure 236):
Figure 235: Extended Image Selector: Library View

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 281

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 236: Extended Image Selector: Slider View

Gallery Image Selector

Gallery Image Selector in addition to capabilities offered by the other Image
Selectors (such as, selecting, uploading or cropping images), this Input Control
offers customers enhanced editing capabilities. For example, the customers can
adjust brightness and contrast, flip and rotate images and control the image
opacity.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 282

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 237: Gallery Image Selector

Once the Gallery Image Selector control is selected, you can set each products
Dial values in the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial
values can be one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source (see Take Values from Data Source)

Take Values from Predefined Value(s)

Allow Asset Selection: enables customers to choose images from the

available Campaign Assets on the uProduce Server.

Select Asset Source: choose the Asset Source folder on the uProduce

Server, from which the images will be chosen for this Dial. The Asset
Source in uProduce is completely synchronized with uStore: if the
Asset Source is modified in uProduce, this change will be
automatically updated in uStore.

Select Default Asset: from the above asset source, choose the image to

be displayed as the default picture.

Allow Upload: enables customers to upload their own pictures and use

them in the document.

Crop Aspect Ratio: specify the crop ratio (Width:Height) for the uploaded
images. This field is displayed only if the Allow Upload checkbox is
checked. In the Storefront Application, the customer will be able to enter
the Edit Mode for the uploaded images and perform the Crop operation.
The crop ratio will be as defined in the Crop Aspect Ratio field in the Back
Office. You can select both the Take Values from Data Source and the Take

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 283

Setting Up Product Properties
values from Predefined Value(s) options. In that case, if a value is missing

in the Data Source, it will be taken from the values set in the predefined
list.

The Gallery Image Selector allows you to select existing images (Select) or upload
images from your computer (Upload).
Figure 238: Gallery Image Selector: Storefront

Uploaded images can be edited by clicking the Edit icon on th gray bar (
The Image Editor window is displayed where you can edit various image
parameters:

).

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 284

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 239: Gallery Image Selector: Editing Uploaded Images

Get Order Properties

Get Order Properties: control enables you to add the Order ID or the Order Item
ID values, which are generated automatically, to your product. This way, an
order or an order item can be easily distinguished with an ID number.
Figure 240: Get Order Properties Control Type

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 285

Setting Up Product Properties

When the Get Order Properties control is selected, you can set each products Dial
values in the When dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values can
be one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source this option is disabled.

Take Values from Predefined Value(s)

Property select Order ID or Order Item ID.

Checkbox
Checkbox: enables you to add a checkbox as a product property.
Figure 241: Checkbox Control Type

When the Checkbox control is selected, you can set each products Dial values in
the When the dial has no value, take values from section. The Dial values can be
one of the following:

Take Values from Last Orders of (see Take Values from Last Orders of)

Take Values from Data Source this option is disabled.

Take Values from Predefined Value(s)

Value when Checked set the value that the dial/property is given when
that checkbox is selected.
Value when Unchecked set the value that the dial/property is given
when that checkbox is unselected.
Default Selection: select Checked or Unchecked.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 286

Setting Up Product Properties

Customer Must Check: you can define the checkbox input control as
mandatory by selecting the Customer Must Check checkbox. This way,
customers will not be able to continue shopping unless this checkbox is
selected. For example, you can add a EULA statement as a product
property and ask customers to accept it in order to continue the shopping
process.

Gallery List/Grid View

Gallery List/Grid View enables the customer to choose a value from predefined
options. The options are displayed as a list/grid of icons, with names and
descriptions.

Similarly to the Dropdown and the Radio Button lists, when you select Gallery List/
Grid List, you can also define the JDF node for each value.
Figure 242: Gallery List View Input Control

Each property option of a Gallery control may include the following images. All
images should be saved in folder:
\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons:

Property options icon: displayed next to the description.

For Gallery List View, the image should be 41 px X 35 px and for Gallery Grid
View the image should be 65 px X 33 px. The format should be PNG and the
image name should be PropertyName_OptionName.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 287

Setting Up Product Properties

Property option overlay image: a graphic display of the property that overlays
the document thumbnail for a more reliable product preview.

The image size should be W: 423 px, H: 527 px (document image size is W:
403, H: 507). The format should be PNG and the image name should be
Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_XXXXX. Four graphic overlays have
been defined:
Property

Icon Name

Long side binding on portrait

document

Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_
Long_Portrait.png

Short side binding on portrait

document

Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_
Short_Portrait.png

Long side binding on landscape

document

Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_
Long_Landscape.png

Short side binding on portrait

document

Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_
Short_Landscape.png

For more information see Creating Property Option Icons for Gallery List/Gallery
Grid View Input Controls.

To set the predefined values for the Gallery List/Grid View input
control:
a.

Click the Add new value link and enter a value and a value text to be
presented in the selected control in the Value and Text fields respectively.
The text is displayed to the customer and the value is sent to uProduce as
the Dial value.

b.

To add a JDF node to the value, in the JDF node set list, select the
equivalent option.
Note: The list of JDF nodes display the nodes set in Presets>System
Setup>JDF Node Set. For more information, see Setting Up JDF Nodes.

c.

Click

to add the value to the list.

d. Repeat this step to add more values to the Value List.

e.

After you add all the required values, to set one of the values as the
default value, in the checkbox in the Default column, select the checkbox.
Note: A default value must be selected.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 288

Setting Up Product Properties

f.

To edit a value in the Value List, click the

want to edit.

icon next to the value you

g.

You can sort the dropdown list values alphabetically (select Alphabetical),
numerically (select Numerical) or chronologically (select Creation time).

h. You can also download a template of a Value List Excel Spreadsheet

(click the Download Value List Template link) and upload it again once it is
fully prepared (click the Upload Value List link). The Value List will be
automatically populated with the values you defined in the Excel
Spreadsheet.
You will be notified if errors exist in your spreadsheet. For example:

If an existing value in the Value List has been defined in the

spreadsheet
If an existing value text in the Value List has been defined in the
spreadsheet
If the Value List Template is missing a value or a value display text
If the Value List Template includes duplicates of values or values
text

The product property icons are displayed in the Storefront as shown in Figure 243
and Figure 244.
Figure 243: Gallery List View

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 289

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 244: Gallery Grid View

Validation Options
The available Validation options vary according to the selected Input Control.
The following Validation options are provided:

Mandatory (available for all Input Controls except Checkbox): uStore must
confirm that a value is provided by the customer.

Regular Expression (available for Text Input, Multiline Text Input and HTML
Generic Input Controls): uStore supports industry-standard regular
expressions, which can be used to validate the user input in different ways,
from simple rules to highly sophisticated validation logic.

You can choose a regular expression template to validate the value provided
by the customer. The Select Template list provides common examples of
regular expressions (such as a Positive Integer, US Phone Number, etc.). You
can adapt this list to your needs by configuring it in the database.
For information on working with regular expressions, see:
http://www.regular-expressions.info/ and http://www.regexlib.com/.

Range (available for Text Input, Multiline Text Input and HTML Generic
Input Controls): specify the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
value provided by the customer.

If the selected Input Control is either an Image Selector, a Popup Image

Selector, an Extended Image Selector, a Gallery Image Selector or HTML
Generic (graphic Dial), the following options are displayed:

Image Height: provides you with the option to specify the allowed height

Image Width: provides you with the option to specify the allowed width
ranges for an uploaded graphic file.

Image Ratio: provides you with the option to specify the allowed ratio ranges
for an uploaded graphic file.

ranges for an uploaded graphic file.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 290

Setting Up Product Properties

Figure 245 shows an example of two product properties as they appear in the
store. The first product property (Paper Type) is of drop-down list type enabling
the customer to choose between various types of predefined paper types. The
second product property (Customer Notes) is a free text input control enabling the
user to add comments to the purchase process; these comments will be visible to
the store administrator when handling orders (as explained in Handling Orders)
and will be displayed later on during checkout.
Figure 245: uStore Storefront: Product Properties

Mandatory Email Product Properties

The Schedule Email Sending Time property is mandatory for Email products. It is a
Global Product Property (see Setting Up Document Repositories). Although you
cannot delete it, you can edit its basic parameters.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 291

Setting Up Product Properties
Figure 246: Email Product Properties Schedule Email Sending Time Edit

The Schedule Email Sending Time product property is displayed to customers at

the store when they finalize their order:
Figure 247: uStore Storefront Schedule Email Sending Time Product Property
Define the Schedule
Email Sending Time
product property

Fill in Recipients addresses

to proof the Email Product.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 292

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

In addition to defining the Schedule Email Sending Time product property,

which is mandatory for every email product, users can also test the email product
appearance and functionality by sending up to three email messages to selected
recipients. Recipients addresses are entered in the Send Email Proof to: fields.

Default Composite Product Properties

When you set up a profile that will serve Composite products, be aware that
Composite Products have a couple of default properties.

The Binding Type property is a selection of the different binding types. It can
be edited or removed.
Note: If you use Binding Type in the Preview Campaign (see Appendix H:
Creating a Preview Campaign), when defining a Composite Product, you
must use the same names for the property options that are used in the
Preview Campaign.

The Binding Side property is a Global Product Property (see Setting Up

Document Repositories). It determines on which side of the page the binding
will be, the long side or the short side. It can be edited or removed, but is
mandatory when Binding Type is used.

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

You define the price for most products by item, that is, you set the price of one
item and the system calculates the order value by multiplying that price by the
number of items ordered by the storefront customer.
Upload products are an exception. For Upload products, pricing is per page.
Because the number of pages of Uploaded documents is not known, the total
price is a multiple of the price per page and the total number of pages that are
uploaded.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 293

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters
Figure 248: Selecting Pricing Methods

uStore provides two methods for setting pricing parameters:

Set pricing using the Pricing Calculator Engine on the uStore Back Office, see
Setting Up Pricing with the Pricing Calculator Engine.

Set pricing using the Excel Pricing Engine Sample, see: Set Prices Using the
Excel Pricing Engine Sample

Setting Up Pricing with the Pricing Calculator Engine

You define pricing and cost setup in two steps: first you set up the pricing and
cost steps and then you set up the prices and costs accordingly.
If the product setup supports product pricing and cost, you are required to define
the products price and costs steps. Price/cost steps define price/cost levels
according to ordered quantities.
For example, a customer may be given a discount for an order of more than 1000
units, where a 1000-units order is defined as a price/cost step. Moreover, you can
add product properties that affect pricing/cost calculation. For example, you can
provide the customer with several paper qualities to choose from (for details, see
Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters).
After having defined the price/cost steps, prices should be assigned to the
product and its price/cost properties according to the defined steps.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 294

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

You set up a product pricing in four steps, each presented in a different tab, as
follows:

Setting Up Price Steps (Optional)

Setting Up Prices

Setting Up Cost Steps

Setting Up Costs

You can also enable the currency code display (see Enabling Currency Code
Display).

Setting Up Price Steps

The Set Price Steps tab enables you to set up ranges of minimum and maximum
number of copies a customer may purchase in one product order.
If you chose not to define price steps for a product, the products price tag will
include only a fixed cost and any additional product properties that affect the
product pricing.
Note: The total price of a Composite Product is the sum of the prices of all
its components.

Figure 249: Set Price Steps tab

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 295

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

To set up price steps:

1.

In the Product Units section, select Single Item if the prices are defined per
item and Pack if the prices are defined per pack.
Note: Composite Products cannot use Packs as a pricing unit of measure.

If you have selected Pack, you are required to specify how many items are
included in a one pack:
Figure 250: Set Price Steps: Pack definition

In addition, you can define a customized name for a pack and an item by
clicking the Change pack and item names link. The Edit Pack Name dialog is
displayed:
Figure 251: Edit Pack Name

You can select one of the pre-defined values in the Pack display name or Item
display name drop-down lists or select the Add New value to define a new
name:

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 296

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters
Figure 252: Edit Pack Name: Add New

For each display name, enter the singular and the plural forms and click OK.
In Storefront, each time there is a mention of price, there will be an indication
if the price is per item or per pack. In the Product Details page, in case the
price is indicated per pack, there will be an indication of how many items are
included in one pack (1 pack = X items).
Note: In the Orders page in the Back Office the quantity of ordered
products will be displayed as the total amount of items.

2.

In the Product Units section, fill in the From Value field and the Name field (if
you want to add a label to this step) and click Add Step (see Figure 249).
A step is given the default label X + Units, where X is the number you
entered in the From Value.

3.

Specify the Order Quantity parameters:

4.

The minimum number of units per order is automatically displayed in

the Minimum field and it corresponds to the number you entered in the
From Value field of the first pricing step.

You can configure a maximum number of units per order in the Maximum
field. Make sure that the number of units indicated in the pricing steps does

not exceed the maximum number of units. If you do not wish to specify the
maximum number of units, leave this text field empty. Once this maximum
number of units is defined in the Back Office, in the Storefront, in the final
step of the ordering process, if the order exceeds the indicated maximum
number of units, an error message is displayed, advising the customer to
reduce the number of copies of recipients, depending on whether each of
them is enabled for this product.
In the Shopping Cart, the maximum number of orders is validated and if it

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 297

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

exceeds the number indicated in the Back Office, the item displays a red x
next to it with an explanation of the problem. You may prefer to sell your
customers fixed numbers of copies (for example, batches of 50 or 75 copies),
instead of enabling them to purchase any random number of copies. To do so,
select the Let the customer select number of copies checkbox and then select
the Display as Dropdown checkbox. The uStore Storefront application will
display the available options in a drop-down list (which limits customers to
one of the specified options), instead of the standard text input format (which
enables customers to insert any desired number of copies, see Figure 253).
Make sure that the Name field of the Price step specifies a fixed value (for
example, 100 units) and not a values range (for example, 100+ units). In case
the Let the customer select number of copies checkbox is not checked, the
customer will be able to order only a single copy.
Note: The Minimum and Maximum settings of a Composite Product, override
the Minimum and Maximum limitations of all its components.

The Price Table on the Storefront provides a detailed list of all pricing
options, including the fixed numbers of copies and their multiples. Based on
this detailed information, customers can choose a desired fixed number of
copies from the Number of Copies dropdown list (Figure 253).
Figure 253: uStore Storefront: Price Review Section (example)

A price step range is considered to be the range between two consecutive

steps. This is true for steps that are not displayed as a drop-down list. For
example, when the From Value equals 1 and the following value equals
1000, the range of the this step is automatically defined to 1 999 units.
However, if a step is set to be displayed as dropdown, the From Value
presents a fixed number of copies.
The pricing table generally shows prices for a single item or pack. When you
choose to sell fixed numbers of copies, you can present the calculated total
price of each batch instead of the price per item/pack in a batch in the
Customer application price list. To do so, select the Display total prices instead
of unit prices checkbox (this checkbox is enabled only when using Display as

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 298

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters
dropdown checkbox). For example, if you set a price step of 100 units to 0.9
cents, the total price for this batch will show 100X0.9=90$.

5.

Click

to remove a price step.

Setting Up Prices
The Set Prices tab provides a detailed list of all pricing options, including the base
price, pricing steps and prices defined for product properties, if specified. Based
on these settings uStore displays the Pricing Table to customers.
Figure 254: Set Prices tab

Fill in the pricing table. Note the following:

Fixed Cost column is assigned to all pricing segments, whether base price or

Base is a mandatory property in every product.

Each price step is presented in a column and is calculated per copy. All prices
shown here are per one item, regardless of the configuration that appears in
the Set Price Steps tab. For further details on price step settings, see Setting
Up Price Steps.

special pricing defined for product properties, and is calculated per order.

Note: For each pricing step, you must select at least one option of a certain
property.

If you do not wish a property to be displayed in the Pricing table, clear the Display
in Table checkbox next to the Pricing Element option (for example, the product
property option). Note that product property options that are not displayed to
customers are not excluded from the order price calculation.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 299

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

If you change prices of a product that is already in the Shopping Cart, a Price
Change icon is displayed in the Storefront.
Figure 255: uStore Storefront: Shopping Cart

Setting Up Cost Steps

uStore enables the administrator to set a cost for each product. The cost of the
ordered product (item) is then calculated on the fly in the Storefront, and stored
per product order.
Setting up costs is useful to set up production cost thresholds. For example, you
can determine that above a certain number of prints, you can run the job on a
different printer or it is worthwhile to connect a finishing component to the
printing machine. This change may affect the price of the printed job and you set
the cost steps to reflect the difference in pricing.
Configuring the cost of a product is similar to setting up product pricing (see
Setting Up Price Steps and Setting Up Prices). The administrator can set up
product properties that affect the cost calculation, cost steps, and cost figures. The
cost figures are set per each product property option. For each of them, one cost
figure may be set for the whole order (fixed cost), or per unit according to the cost
steps.
The Set Cost Steps tab enables you to set up ranges for the product cost.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 300

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters
Figure 256: Set Cost Steps tab

To set up cost steps:

1.

Fill in the From Value field and click Add Step.

A step is given the default label X And Up, where X is the number you
entered in the From Value.

2.

Click

to remove a cost step.

Setting Up Costs
The Set Costs tab includes the Cost Table that provides a detailed list of all cost
options, including the fixed cost, cost steps and costs defined for product
properties, if specified. Based on these settings, a store administrator can view the
product cost in the Order Profit Margins report or in the OrderDetails.xml and
calculate the profit.
Figure 257: Set Costs tab

Fill in the cost table.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 301

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

Note the following:

Fixed Cost column is assigned to all cost segments, whether base cost or

Base is a mandatory property in every product. The Base property cannot be

edited.

Each cost step is presented in a column and is calculated per copy. All costs
shown here are per one item. For further details on cost step settings, see
Setting Up Cost Steps.

special cost defined for product properties, and is calculated per order.

Set Prices Using the Excel Pricing Engine Sample

uStore enables you to set up prices using a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. The Excel
spreadsheet provides more flexibility and enables you to set up more complex
price calculations, such as calculations that include discounts for specific product
property combinations.
uStore provides a sample Excel file for your use. You can find the sample file at:
\\[ServerName]\uStoreShared\ExcelPricingEngine\ or
\\[ServerName]\XMPie\uStore\App\uStoreShared\ExcelPricingEngine

For Static, Dynamic, Composite and Email Products, use the

PricesData_Default.xlsx sample file.
For Upload Products, use the PricesData_Upload_Default.xlsx sample file.
When you set pricing using an Excel spreadsheet, you need to perform the
following tasks:
1.

Set up Product Properties for a Product Profile or for a specific product. See
Setting Up Product Properties

2.

Select the Excel Pricing Engine Pricing Method in uStore Back Office. See
Selecting the Excel Pricing Engine Method in the Back Office.

3.

Set up the Excel file with pricing formulas for all the product properties that
affect pricing. See Setting Up the Excel Pricing Engine File
Note: You can use the Excel Pricing Engine method to set pricing for a
Product Profile or for individual products.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 302

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

Selecting the Excel Pricing Engine Method in the Back

Office
To select the Excel Pricing Engine Method:
1.

Select the Excel Pricing Engine:

a.

For Product Profiles, go to the Product Profiles>[ProfileName]>Settings

page and click the Product Pricing Setup link.

b.

For individual Products, go to the [StoreName] > Products List>

[ProductName] page and click the Product Pricing Setup link.

2.

Click the Set Prices tab.

3.

In the Pricing Method list, select the Excel Pricing Engine option (see
Figure 248).

4.

Click Save.

Setting Up the Excel Pricing Engine File

The Excel Pricing Engine enables you to upload an Excel file that contains all
pricing parameters and assign the file to a Product Profile or individual product.
Using an Excel spreadsheet to calculate the price of your products gives you more
flexibility and enables you to provide discounts based on different combinations
of product properties or to set prices according to customization values. For
example, you can decide that documents printed for the California branch of a
store will cost more than the documents printed in New York.

Excel Spreadsheet Structure

The default Excel spreadsheet provided includes two main tabs:

Instructions: this tab provides instructions about how to use the spreadsheet.

Info: you add the list of product properties and pricing formulas to this tab.

The spreadsheet includes all the values (input values) required for calculating the
minimum and the total price of a product order (output values).
Note: Only properties that were marked as Used in the Pricing Calculation
(see Figure 223) will be calculated.
Only Customization Dials and Variables of a selectable input controls (Dropdown lists, Radio Buttons, Checkboxes, Gallery List View or Gallery Grid
View) can be added to the Excel engine spreadsheet.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 303

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

Note: The provided Excel files are samples and should only be used as a
template. You should create your own Excel spreadsheet with the
parameters and the calculations required for your products. The cell naming
conventions should be as described in Naming Convention.

Info Tab Contents

For Static, Dynamic, Email and Composite Products
(PricesData_Default.xlsx)
Figure 258: Excel Pricing - Info Tab for Static, Dynamic, Email and Composite Products

The Info tab includes three main sections:

Inputs: Includes all the information required for making the price calculation.

The main item in the Inputs section is the list of properties that affect product
pricing. The Inputs section must include the following information:

Quantity: the number of items in the product order.

Recipients: the number of recipients in a Recipient List.

ProductID: this field maps the Excel spreadsheet to the Product Profile or

the individual product.

Properties: list of all the product properties that affect the products price.
Customizations: list of all the Customization Dials and Variables that
affect the products price.

Outputs: this section must include the products total price and minimum

Calculations: the sample file includes the Calculation section in the Info tab.
You can add all the calculation formulas in the Info tab (as it is done in the

price.

sample files), or create a separate tab that includes all the relevant pricing
calculations.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 304

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

For Upload Products (PricesData_Upload_Default.xlsx)

Figure 259: Excel Pricing - Info Tab for Upload Products

The Info tab includes three main sections:

Inputs: Includes all the information required for making the price calculation.

The main item in the Inputs section is the list of properties that affect product
pricing. The Inputs section must include the following information:

ProductID: this field maps the Excel spreadsheet to the Product Profile or

the individual product.

Property Options: list of all the product property options that affect the

products price.

Outputs: this section must include the products total price and minimum

Calculations: the sample file includes the Calculation section in the Info tab.
You can add all the calculation formulas in the Info tab (as it is done in the

price.

sample files), or create a separate tab that includes all the relevant pricing
calculations.

Naming Convention
To ensure that Excel reads the values entered in the spreadsheet correctly, you
need to rename some of the cells. The following tables describe how to rename
cells for the input and output values.
Note: When naming the cell, use the property option's Value and not its
Display name. Check the Product Property page to verify the propertys
value.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 305

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

Input Values for Static, Dynamic, Email and Composite Products

Cells that include the input values should be renamed following the naming
convention below.
Table 2: How to rename cells that include the input values
Value

Cell Name

Quantity

inQuantity

Recipients

inRecipients
inProductID

ProductID

<Property>

inProperty_<PropertyName>

<Dial> or
<Variable>

inCustomization_Name

Comments

This value can be either a

Profile ID or a Product ID.
The naming convention is
inProductID for both.

Note: When you name a cell, replace dashes and spaces with the
underscore character (_).

Example:
Lets say that one of the properties that affect the products pricing is Folding. In
the Excel sheet, in the Inputs section, under Properties, add a row for the folding
property, and rename the cell next to it to inProperty_Folding. This cell will receive
the value of the selected option for the Folding property.
In the sample file, the options for the Folding property and their prices appear in
a table in the Instructions tab. Using the information in this table, the price for this
Property is calculated.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 306

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters
Figure 260: Sample of property price with options

Cell name:
inProperty_Folding_Middle_Fold

To rename cells including the input value:

1.

In the pricing Excel file, go to the Formulas tab.

2.

Click Name Manager in the toolbar.

The Name Manager dialog is displayed.

3.

Click New to add a new value name.

The New Name window is displayed.

4.

In the Name field, write the value name using the naming convention in
Table 2 .

5.

Click OK.

Input Values for Upload Products

Table 3: How to rename cells that include the input values
Value

Cell Name

ProductID

inProductID

<Property Option>

inQuantity_<PropertyName>_<OptionValue>

Because Upload productss pricing is set per number of pages and not per
number of items, the naming convention is slightly different for Upload products.
Instead of inProduct_<PropertyName>, rename the cell to
inQuantity_<PropertyName>_<OptionValue>.
This cell will show not which property was selected by the Storefront customer,
but the number of pages that are affected by the selected property.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 307

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

If there are several options, you need to rename each options cell as follows:
inQuantity_<PropertyName>_<OptionValue>.
Example:
Lets say that one of the properties that affect the products pricing is Lamination.
In the Excel sheet, in the Inputs section, under Properties, add a row for each
Lamination property option, and rename the cell next to the property option
name to inQuantity_<Property>_<Property Option>. This cell will receive the
value of the number of pages in which this property option is used.
For example, if the property Lamination includes two options: Gloss and Matt,
then rename each option's cell as follows:

For the Gloss option: inQuantity_Lamination_Gloss

For the Matt option: inQuantity_Lamination_Matt

In the sample file, the options for the Lamination property and their prices appear
in a table in the Info tab. Using the information in this table, the price for this
Property is calculated.
Output Values
Cells that include the output values should be renamed following the naming
convention below.
Table 4: How to rename the cells that include the output values
Value

Cell Name

Comments

outTotalPrice

The outTotalPrice will be displayed in

the Storefront > Finalize page
>Total Price field.
The Price Per Item field value in the
Finalize page will be calculated as
follows: outTotalPrice/number of
recipients.

outMinPrice

The outMinPrice will be displayed as a

Minimum Price in the Storefront >
Product List page.

Total Price

Min Price

Setting Up the Excel Spreadsheet

To set up the Excel spreadsheet:
Important
To use the Excel Pricing Engine method, you must be familiar with Excel
terminology and know how to set up Excel formulas.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 308

Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters

1.

Locate the sample Excel file on the uStore server:

For Static, Dynamic, Composite and Email Products:
\\[ServerName]\uStoreShared\ExcelPricingEngine\PricesData_De
fault.xlsx sample file.
For Upload Products:
\\[ServerName]\uStoreShared\ExcelPricingEngine\PricesData_Up
load_Default.xlsx sample file.

2.

Open the Excel file (PricesData_Default.xlsx or

PricesData_Upload_Default.xlsx according to the product type) and save it

with another name based on the Profile ID or Product ID:

For Product Profiles: save it as PricesData_<ProfileID>.xlsx or

PricesData_Upload_<ProfileID>.xlsx in the same location. To find the
Profile ID, go to the Product Profile List page and look in the ID column.
All Products linked to the selected Product Profile will be priced
according to the Excel file.
For individual Products: save it as PricesData_<ProductID>.xlsx or
PricesData_Upload_<ProductID>.xlsx. To find the Product ID, go to the
Product List page and look in the ID column.
If you wish to use this file as a default for all Products whose price is
based on the Excel Pricing Engine, leave the default file name.

3.

On the Excel file, click the Info tab.

4.

In the Inputs section, under Properties, add a list of all the properties that
affect the products price and rename the cells following the naming
convention described in Naming Convention.

5.

(Optional, for Static, Dynamic, Email and Composite products only) In the

Inputs section, under Customizations, add a list of all the Customization Dials

and Variables that affect the products price and rename the cells following
the naming convention described in Naming Convention.
Note: Only Customization Dials of type Drop-down list, Checkbox, Radio
Button, Gallery List View and Gallery Grid View support pricing based on
Excel engine.

6.

In the Outputs section, rename the cell that will show the total product price
to outTotalPrice and add the required calculation for the products total price.

7.

In the Outputs section, rename the cell that will show the minimum product
price outMinPrice and add the required calculation for the minimum price.
Note: You can check the sample calculation section in the
PricesData_Default.xls or PricesData_Upload_Default.xls to see some
examples of calculations.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 309

Setting Up Prepress Workflows

8.

Save the file.

After you save the Excel file, uStore starts using its parameters for calculating the
products price that is displayed in the following Storefront pages: Product list,
Checkout and Finalize.

Enabling Currency Code Display

The currency code is a three-character code that includes the country's twocharacter Internet country code followed by the character used for the currency
unit. For example, the United States dollar code (USD) is made up of the United
States Internet country code ("US") followed by a currency designator ("D").
You can have uStore display the currency code in addition to the currency symbol
whenever prices are displayed, for example, on the Shopping Cart page (see
Figure 255).

To enable currency code display:

1.

Go to: ...\uStore\app\customerapp and open the web.config file

2.

Change the value of the ShowCurrencyCode list to true.

Setting Up Prepress Workflows

When you set up a Product Profile or a specific product, you can associate the
profile with one or several prepress workflows. Prepress workflows determine
how the product will be printed after it is ordered by a Storefront customer.
uStore provides two types of prepress workflows:

Seamless integration with Xerox FreeFlow automation module: You can

define multi-step workflows that automate imposition, the addition of crop
marks, color bars, watermarks, page rotation, page insertions on your
FreeFlow Core application and these workflows will be available on uStores
Back Office.
Note: FreeFlow Core is an optional module that you can purchase with
uStore.

Manual workflows: You can create hot folders for sending purchased
products to production on 3rd-party print servers.

Before you set up prepress workflows, you need to create workflow providers
and select the available workflows in the Presets>System Setup page.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 310

Setting Up Prepress Workflows

1.

First you create your workflow providers. For more details, see Setting Up
Prepress Workflow Providers.

2.

Then you set up prepress workflows. For more details, see Creating Prepress
Workflows.

After you set up the prepress workflows that will be available for your uStore
account, you can associate a prepress workflow to a product profile or to a
specific product.

To add a new prepress workflow:

1.

In the Prepress Setup page, click the Add workflows button.

The Add workflows dialog box is displayed. The Add workflows dialog box lists
all the workflow providers and their respective workflows. For more
information on how to set up workflow providers, see Setting Up Prepress
Workflow Providers.
Figure 261: Add workflows dialog box

2.

In the Add workflows dialog box, select the workflows that you want to make
available for the product profile.
Note: You can select several workflows.

3.

Click OK.
The selected workflows are added to the Prepress Setup page.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 311

Linking a Product to a Product Profile
Figure 262: Prepress Setup page with workflows

4.
5.

To define which of the workflows in the list is the default workflow, select the

Default checkbox.

If the list includes only one workflow, you can select the Auto-run to prepress

production.

The Auto-run to prepress production feature automatizes the jobs

production and sends it directly to production. When you select this option,
when ordered, the job skips the Ready for Prepress queue and goes directly to
the Prepress in Progress queue.

Linking a Product to a Product Profile

After you finish setting up your Product Profile, you can start linking products to
the profile.

Linking New Products to a Product Profile

When you set up new products, you link the product to a profile during product
setup. For more information on how to set up products, see Setting Up Products.

Linking Existing Products to a Product Profile

To link a product to a profile:
1.

In the uStore Back Office, select the store that houses your product and then
select the product.

2.

On the Product Setup page, click the Edit Product button.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 312

Linking a Product to a Product Profile
Figure 263: Edit Product

3.

In the General area, in the Link to Product Profile list, select the Product Profile
that best fits this product printing requirements.
Note: The list displays only the product profiles that have the same
language and currency as the store that hosts the product.

4.

Click Save.
A message appears warning that the current product properties will be
replaced with the properties defined in the Product Profile.
Note: Any weight settings defined in the Delivery Setup>Shipping section
will be deleted.
Note that you cannot undo this action.

5.

To link the product to the Product Profile, click OK.

The product is now linked to a Product Profile. All product properties,
pricing and prepress parameters for this product can be managed via the
Product Profile.
Note: Note that on the Product Setup page, a link icon appears next to the
properties and setups that are inherited from the Product Profile.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 313

Overriding Product Profile Settings
Figure 264: Link icon indicates that product is linked to a Product Profile

Unlinking Products to Product Profiles

To remove the link to the Product Profile:
1.

In the Product Setup>General section, in the Link to Product Profile list, select
None.
The product is not linked to a profile and will be printed according to the
specific product settings selected for this product.

Overriding Product Profile Settings

When you link a product to a profile, you can override some of the settings
defined in the Product Profile. For example, if according to the Product Profile,
saddle stitch is the default type of binding, you can select perfect binding as the
default option for a specific product. In addition, you can deactivate a property in
a product, so that it will not be available when a storefront customer purchases
the product, even though the property is active in the Product Profile.

Differentiating Between Hidden and Deactivated

Properties
It is important to understand the behavior of the properties that you deactivate or
hide.

Deactivating a property: When you deactivate a property, it does not exist for
the specific product. After you deactivate a property, the property is not

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 314

Overriding Product Profile Settings

available for editing in the Back Office and it is not considered during the
products price calculation.

Hiding a property: When you hide a property, the property is still part of the
product setup and is available for editing in the Back Office. After you hide a
property, it is not displayed on the Storefront for store customers selection,
but the property is considered during price calculation.

To override Product Profile settings:

1.

In the uStore Back Office, select the store that houses your product and then
select the product.

2.

On the Product Setup page, click the Product Properties Setup link.
Figure 265: Product Properties page

3.

To deactivate a property, clear the Active checkbox next to the property name.
This property will not be available for this product.

4.

To modify property visibility and default options, click the Visible link.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 315

Overriding Product Profile Settings
Figure 266: Property Visibility options

5.

In the Property Visibility and Active Options dialog box, you can set the
property visibility options for the product. you can do one of the following:

6.

To keep visibility as defined in the profile, select the Keep Product Profile
visibility settings.
To show or hide the property regardless of what is defined in the Product
Profile, select one of the override options.

To set a property options availability:

To make a property option available, select the Active checkbox next to

the option.
To deactivate a property option, clear the Active checkbox.
Note: The option will not be available for customer selection on the
Storefront. For example, if the paper type property includes the glossy,
matte and recycled options and you deactivate the glossy option, customers
will still be able to select the matte or recycled options.

7.

To set a different default option for the property, select the Override default
checkbox.

8.

Select the Default checkbox next to the property option that will be the default
option.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 316

Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles

Note: To revert to the profile default option, clear the Override default
checkbox.
Note that you cannot deactivate an options that is set as default.

9.

Click Save.
The product is linked to the Product Profile, but some of its properties are
now different from the settings defined in the Product Profile.
Note: You can force full linkage to all the Product Profile settings on the
Product Dependency List page. See Viewing Products Linked to a Profile.

Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles

uStore Back Office provides several tools that will help you manage and maintain
your Product Profiles.

To view a list of all the existing Product Profiles:

1.

In the Views tool bar, select Stores>Product Profiles.

The Product Profile List is displayed.
Figure 267: Product Profile List

In the Product Profiles List page you can perform the following actions (see
numbers on Figure 267):

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 317

Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles

1.

Duplicate a profile. See below.

2.

Delete a profile. See Deleting Profiles.

3.

Edit profile settings. See Editing a Product Profile.

4.

View a list of the products that are linked to a profile. See Viewing Products
Linked to a Profile.

Duplicating Profiles
If you need to set up profiles with similar parameters, after you set up the first
profile, you can duplicate it, make the required modifications, and then save it
with a new name.

To duplicate a profile:
1.

In the Product Profile List page, locate the profile that you want to use as the
base for the new profile and then click the Duplicate
profile row.

icon on the same

A new profile is added to the list with the following naming convention:

copy[n]<BaseProfileName>. You can edit the new profile name later.

Note: You can change the currency of a duplicated profile, but you cannot
change its language.

Deleting Profiles
Only product profiles that have not been linked to products can be deleted.

To delete a Product Profile:

1.

On the Product Profile List page, locate the Product Profile that you need to
delete and then click the Delete
icon on the same profile row.

2.

In the warning message, click OK.

The profile is removed from the Product Profile List page.

Editing a Product Profile

You can edit a Product Profile details only, or your can edit the product
properties, pricing and prepress settings.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 318

Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles

To edit a Product Profiles details:

1.

On the Product Profile List page, locate the Product Profile whose details you
want to edit and click its name.

2.

On the Product Setup page, click the Edit Product Profile Details button.

3.

On the Product Profile Setup page, in the Product Profile Name box, enter a
new name for your profile.

4.

In the Description box, enter a description that reflects the profiles usage.
Note: When you duplicate or edit an existing profile, you cannot change its
Setup Language.

5.

In the Currency list, select the currency that will be used for products linked to
this profile.

6.

Click Save.
The Product Setup page is displayed with the new profile details.

To edit a Product Profiles product settings:

1.

On the Product Profile List page, locate the Product Profile that you want to
edit and click its name.

2.

On the Product Setup page, you can edit the following settings:

Product Properties (For more details, see Setting Up Product Properties.)

i.

To edit product properties such as paper stock, folding and binding,

click the Product Properties Setup link.

ii. When you finish, click Back.

Pricing (For more details, see Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters.)

iii. To make changes to the pricing settings, click the Product Pricing
Setup link.
iv. When you finish, click Save.

Prepress (For more details, see Setting Up Prepress Workflows.)

v. To select different prepress workflows, click the Prepress Setup link.
vi. When you finish, click Save.
Note: Profiles updates take effect immediately. You do not need to take a
product offline for the change to take effect.

Chapter 6: Working with Product Profiles 319

Managing and Maintaining Product Profiles

Viewing Products Linked to a Profile

In the Product Profile List page, you can view all the products that are linked to a
Product Profile.

To view the products that are linked to a profile:

1.

On the Product Profile List page, in the Used in Products column, click the
number that appears on the row of the relevant profile.
Figure 268: Product Dependency List: Viewing products linked to a profile

The Product Dependency List page opens with a detailed list of all the
products that are linked to the Product Profile. Products are grouped by store.
The Product Dependency List page provides a detailed list of the products that are
linked to a profile, in addition, it enables you to:

Open a products setup page to edit product properties settings.

Force full linkage to a Product Profile: When you set up products, you
can override some of the parameters defined in the Product Profile. On
the Product Dependency List page, you can cancel any overrides by
clicking the Force Full Linkage button.
Note: When you force full linkage to a profile, any changes made to the
properties of a specific product are overridden.

Click the View only overridden products link to see products that are not
fully linked to the profile.

Chapter

Setting Up Products
This chapter describes the different types of products you can sell in an online
store and provides step-by-step instructions on how to add products to your
store.

uStore Products: Overview

To manage the stores products, a user must be assigned to the following Root
User Groups or to User Groups that inherit permissions from these Root User
Groups:

Superuser Root: Manages the products of all stores in the system.

A user assigned to this User Group is able to log in to uStore Back Office
for the first time and set up a new store.

Administrator Root: Only manages the products of specific stores for

which the uStore superuser has granted him access permission.

For details on the different types of uStore User Groups, see Setting up Users
and User Groups.
An online store can currently sell the following types of products: Static
Documents, Dynamic Documents, Email Documents and Composite
Products.
Note: The components that make up Composite Products are not visible in
the online store.

To simplify maintenance and management of products, uStore enables you to

create Product Profiles. Product Profiles contain a set of product properties
that you can apply to several products. When you link products to Product
Profiles, you can easily edit product properties and make global changes
without the need to open each product separately. All your changes are
automatically applied to all products that are linked to the Product Profile.
Product Profiles are useful if you need to update products properties often or
if you have groups of products that share the same set of properties.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 321

uStore Products: Overview

For more details on how to create and manage Product Profiles, see Working with
Product Profiles.

Working with Static Documents

Static Documents, as their name implies, consist of fixed contents. Since they
include no dynamic objects, these documents cannot be altered by your
customers, nor adapted to each recipients data. Instead, all recipients of a static
document get identical instances of this product.
Static Documents can be loaded to uStore from any computer.
In addition to the product itself, uStore requires loading its proof file and a
thumbnail image.
You can track Static Documents using an inventory.

Working with Dynamic Documents

uStore supports three types of Dynamic Documents:

Dynamic InDesign Document: a document that can be modified by

customers, using personalization, customization or both.

Dynamic XLIM Document: a document that can be personalized and

customized online using uEdit.

Dynamic Email Document: an Email document that can be personalized,

customized and scheduled. An Email document is part of the Email Blast
Campaign.

Dynamic Documents contain dynamic objects and can, therefore, be adapted to

each customers and recipients needs. This is done using two different processes:
customization and personalization. To add Dynamic Documents to your store
and set up their properties, it is important to understand what each process
entails and make the distinction between the two.
Customization is a process that reflects the Customers input. It is performed on
Dials: ADOR Objects and Variables that are included in the dynamic document
and were selected for customization in the Customization Wizard. Customers can
manually specify fixed values for these Dials and the specified values are
common to all recipients and all dynamic document instances of an order. For
example, a customer may customize a dynamic business card by specifying the
logo and company contact details to be displayed on all business card copies
(regardless of their recipients).

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 322

uStore Products: Overview

Personalization is a process that reflects the Recipients data. It is performed on

ADOR Objects and Variables that are included in the dynamic document, but are
not selected for customization in the Customization Wizard. These dynamic
objects are automatically populated with recipient-specific values, which are
unique to each dynamic document instance. For example, a customer may
personalize a dynamic business card by uploading a Recipient List that contains
the first and last name, address, etc. for each recipient.
The main differences between customization and personalization are
summarized in Table 5:
Table 5: Working with Dynamic Documents: Customization vs. Personalization
Customization

Personalization

Performed on

ADOR Objects and Variables

that were marked as
Campaign Dials to make
them accessible via uStore.

ADOR Objects and Variables

that were not selected for
Customization in uStore Back
Office.

Enabled/disabled by
uStore administrators

Yes via the optional

Customization Wizard.
See Setting Up the
Customization Wizard
(Dynamic and Email
Documents Only).

Yes. Via the Recipient List

section of the basic Product
Setup page. See Adding
Products to your Store.

Yes: in uStore Back Office,

by uStore Superusers and
Store Administrators. These
administrators choose which
of the available Campaign
Dials are to be accessible to
customers and group them
into logical steps for the
customers convenience.

No, Fine tuning is done via

XMPies uPlan or uDirect Rule
Editor, which enable their
users to set the logic of the
Plan or the Content Objects.

Values are determined

by

The Storefront user

(customer), using the
Customization Wizard.

The customer, by uploading a

Recipient List.

Values are

Common to all order copies. Unique to each recipients

copy.

Example

The company contact details The recipients contact details.

in a business card.

(uStore Superusers and

Store Administrators)

Fine-tuned by uStore
administrators (uStore

Superusers and Store

Administrators)

Dynamic Documents can only be loaded to uStore from the uProduce Server.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 323

Adding Products to your Store

Working with Composite Products

Composite Products include one or more components combined together as a
single product. The components can be Static Documents, Dynamic Documents
and Upload Products.
An Upload Product is a set of definitions used as a base for uploaded files. If the
Composite Product includes an Upload Product, end-users will be able to upload
their own documents and print using the uStore store owner (print shop). A
Composite Product can only include one Upload Product.
Note: End-users can upload documents with doc, ppt and pdf file
extensions.

The individual components are defined in Components Groups. These groups are
hidden and are not visible in the online store (see Managing Product Groups and
Group Hierarchy).
For more details see Appendix I: Creating Composite Products.

Adding Products to your Store

To add products to your store, you are required to perform the following steps,
described in:

Managing Product Groups and Group Hierarchy

Adding Products to the Product Groups

Setting Up Your Products: Overview

(Optional) Editing Products

Note: A product may be added to multiple groups (see Saving your
Product).

Managing Product Groups and Group Hierarchy

You can define a group of products as well as associated sub-groups in a store. A
group of products contains products of the same nature, brand, etc.
There are two types of groups:

Storefront Groups: groups of products available in the online store.

Component Groups: groups of products that can be included in Composite

Products. These groups are hidden and are not visible in the online store.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 324

Adding Products to your Store

To add groups of products to your store:

1.

Click the

icon on the Views toolbar.

2.

Click the store name from the list of stores.

The Store Details page is displayed, listing both the Storefront Groups and
Component Groups in a hierarchical order.
You can select a specific group to view and manage the products it contains.
Note: Each new store must include at least one Storefront Group, which by
default is, Group 1, which contains no sub-groups and no products
(Figure 269). The number of products in a group is indicated in parenthesis
next to the group name.

Figure 269: Store Details Page

Visible in online store

Not visible in online store

Managing Product Groups

The Manage Groups link enables you to add new root groups to the group tree and
define additional sub-groups in each root group. A root group is the main group
in the group hierarchy that may include additional sub-groups. You can also edit
existing product groups.

To add groups of products to your store:

You can create root groups and then add sub-groups to each of the root groups.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 325

Adding Products to your Store

1.

To create a new root group, click the Manage Groups link. The Product Groups

List page is displayed.

Figure 270: Product Groups List Page

Product Group Hierarchy

The number of products

in the Group

2.

Click the Add Root Group link and fill in the following information.

Field

Description

Group Name

Enter a meaningful name that indicates the type of products

the group will contain (for example, Books). The product
group name will be displayed in the Storefront store.
The name of each root group must be unique.

Description

Optional: Description of the group. The description will not be

displayed in the Storefront.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 326

Adding Products to your Store
Field

Description

Custom Header
(Storefront
Groups only)

Optional: You can also define a custom header that will be

displayed for that group in the store. In the Custom Header
field, enter a local path that points to the header you want to
use. You can use HTML for static content display or ASCX for
dynamic content that is personalized for every customer.
Make sure the file you are using, whether an HTML file or an
ASCX file, resides in the uStore application installation folder
which is located, by default, in:
D:\xmpie\ustoreapp\customerapp.
In the Custom Header field, enter the name of the file and
its extension. For example: StoreHeader.html. If you
located the file in a sub-folder within the customerapp
directory, add the path addition before the file name. For
example, if the file StoreHeader.html is located in:
D:\xmpie\ustoreapp\customerapp\MyFolder,
enter the following path in the Custom Header field:
D:\xmpie\ustoreapp\customerapp\MyFolder\StoreHeader.htm.
For further explanations on how to use ASCX files, refer to the
uStore SDK documentation.

Search Engine
Optimization
(SEO)
(Storefront
Groups only)

Search Engine optimization enables you to improve the

volume and quality of traffic to your website from search
engines. SEO definitions include three main meta tags: Title,
Description and Keywords. The SEO configuration will take
action at the Storefront in Product Group pages, and will
appear the same as defined for the store setup (see
Figure 272).
Use default values select this option if you would like
to use the default SEO definitions. The default values are as
follows:
Title: <Product Group Name> - <Store Name>
Description: <Product Group Description>. If no

description is available, this field is empty.

Keywords: No keywords are defined by default.

Use customized values select this option if you would

like to set up customized values for SEO. Then, click the
Customize link. The SEO: Customize Meta Tags
window is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 327

Adding Products to your Store
Field

Description

Figure 271: Manage Groups SEO: Customize Meta Tags

Modify the default values:

Title: Mandatory. <Product Group Name> - <Store

Name>. You may modify the <Product Group Name> part

of the title.
Description: Mandatory. The default value is < Product
Group Description>. If no description is available, this field
is left empty. You may enter a customized description (up to
300 characters).
Keywords: Optional. This field is empty by default. You
may enter keywords, separated with comma. The Keywords
field may contain up to 300 characters.

Warning: The names of groups or sub-groups of the same hierarchy must

be unique. You cannot use the same name for two root groups or two subgroups of the same hierarchy within a root group.

The Product Groups List page displays the updated product group name.
You can now add sub-groups to the root group, delete a group and change the
group list hierarchy using the Manage Group Options menu.
3.

To open the Manage Group Options menu, click the small triangle ( ) next to
the group you want to manage.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 328

Adding Products to your Store

The Manage Group Options menu is displayed.

Figure 272: Manage Group Options Menu

The Manage Group Options menu enables you to:

Add a sub-group (Add Sub-Group)

Warning: The names of sub-groups of the same hierarchy must be unique.

Delete a root group or a sub-group (Delete)

Move a group up or down in the group tree (Move Up/Move Down)

Adding Products to the Product Groups

Warning: Before you add a Dynamic Document type of product to your
online store, it must first be produced by the uProduce Server. For each
document, you must perform at least one proof job and one process
(production) job, each consisting of at least one record. If you add an Email
type of product to your online store, it must first be tested and sent by the
uProduce Server. For detailed instructions, please refer to the uProduce User
Guide. Make sure you logged on to uProduce using the same username and
password that you entered in the Store Setup page.

Note that the proof settings and production settings you specify at this stage will
be used whenever the product is proofed or produced via uStore.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 329

Adding Products to your Store

To add products to a particular Product Group:

1.

In the Store Details page, go to the Store Groups list and select the desired
group.
Figure 273: Store Details Page

2.

In the Product Group list, hover over the New button and select a product type
in the menu that opens (see Product Type).
Figure 274: New Product Type (Storefront Group)

Note:

For Storefront Groups you can select Static, Dynamic, Email or

Composite products.

For Component Groups you can select Static, Dynamic or Upload

products. These products can be part of a Composite product.

The primary Product Setup page is displayed (Figure 275).

3.

Specify the desired product definitions (see Setting Up General Information)

and click Save.
The new product is added to the Products Group list.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 330

Adding Products to your Store

Some product definitions are inherited by default from the store setup (for
example, the Proof Type). However, the definitions may be overridden perproduct.

Product Type
uStore supports the following types of products:

Dynamic Document: is linked to a product on the uProduce Server and

enables customization and personalization (see Working with Dynamic
Documents). For each Dynamic Document, you must perform at least one
proof job and one production job in uProduce.
Static Document: can be uploaded from any computer and cannot be
customized or personalized (see Working with Static Documents).
Email Document: uploaded from the uProduce Server and enables you
to launch email Campaigns. Email Documents are Dynamic Documents
with a different production method: unlike Dynamic Documents that are
generated using the Process job, Email Documents are created using
Email Activities in uProduce. In uStore, Email Documents are defined as
Dynamic Documents with an additional option to set up automatic order
scheduling. When you use Email Activities on the uProduce Server, make
sure the email was tested and sent. Email Documents are only available
in Storefront Groups.
Composite Product: one or more components combined together as a
single product. The components are defined in the Component Groups
and can be Static Documents, Dynamic Documents or an Upload
Product. Composite Products are only available in Storefront Groups.
Upload Product: a set of definitions used as a base for uploaded files,
enabling end-users to upload their own documents, and print using the
uStore store owner (print shop). Upload products can only be defined in
Component Groups.

The following product setup sections vary, depending on the product type:

If you choose a Dynamic Document (as shown in Figure 275), you are
required to select the relevant Account, Campaign, Document to be loaded
from the uProduce Server and you may edit the Proof Job ID, the Process
Job ID and the Thumbnail Image fields.
If you choose a Static Document, you are required to specify the location
of the Document File, Proof File and Thumbnail Image.
If you choose Email, you are required to select the relevant Account,
Campaign and Email Document to be loaded from the uProduce Server.
You can also select the Schedule Order Automatically checkbox to send the

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 331

Adding Products to your Store

Email Document directly to the Scheduled Emails queue. Once the Email
Document is in the Schedule Emails queue, it will be automatically sent at
the scheduled time. If this checkbox is not selected, the Email Document
will be placed in the Pending queue and will be sent only after the
operators approval. For more information on scheduling orders, refer to
Managing Email Product Orders.

If you choose Composite, you are required to specify a Thumbnail Image

and to select an Account, Campaign, Document of a Preview Template. The
Preview Template should include all the available properties that you
want to show of the components of the Composite Product as described
in Appendix H: Creating a Preview Campaign. You may verify the Proof
Job ID.
If you choose Upload, you are required to select an Output Paper Size from
a list of preset options and determine whether to enable Product Pricing.
Note: You can select a different document only for products or duplicated
products that have not yet been ordered.

Setting Up General Information

Figure 275: Product Setup Page: General Information

The General section of the product setup includes the following:

Product Name: The name to be displayed to customers in the online store (as

Catalog No.: You can assign a catalog number to the product and then make it
visible to customers by selecting the Visible to Customer checkbox and the

opposed to the documents name on the uProduce Server).

display format from the dropdown list aside it.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 332

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 276: uStore Storefront Products Name and Catalog Number
Product Name and Catalog
Number

Warning: It is recommended to assign a unique Catalog Number for each

product.

Link to Product Profile: You can link the product to a Product Profile. Product
Profiles include a set of predefined parameters that can be applied at once to
several products. To learn more about Product Profiles, see Creating Product
Profiles.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 333

Adding Products to your Store

Setting Up Product Information in Storefront

(Dynamic, Static, Email and Composite Products only)
Figure 277: Product Setup Page: Product Information in Storefront

The Product Information in Storefront specifies product details that will be

displayed in the Storefront.

Show Minimum Price: You can display a minimum price for a product. A
product price is based on its Base price plus additional product properties
that may affect the product pricing. See Setting Up the Product Pricing for
Single Products. uStore will calculate the minimum price offered and will
show it in the product description as From <Currency>X where X is the
price and <Currency> is the currency used in the store (if the price is fixed,
the <Currency>X string will be displayed).

Note: This option is not available for Composite Products.

Short Description: Add a description to the product that will be available to

customers in the Product List page at the store.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 334

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 278: uStore Storefront Product Description and Minimum Price Indication

Minimum Price
Indication

Product Short Description

Inventory
Indication

Show Product Details Step: You can shorten the purchasing process by

Full Description: Add a description to the product that will be available to

customers in the Product Details page at the store.

removing the Product Details Step and enabling the customer to go straight to
the Finalize step. The Show Product Details step option is selected by default.
To skip the Product Details Step, clear the checkbox.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 335

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 279: uStore Storefront: Full Product Description in Product Details Page
Full Description in the
Product Details page

Keywords: Allows you to add words or phrases that can be used by customers
to easily find products at the store using the Product Search Bar (Figure 280).

You can add several key words and separate them by a comma (,), a
semicolon (;) or space. You can also check your spelling by clicking the Check
Spelling link.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 336

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 280: uStore Storefront Product Search Bar and Defined Keywords

Search Bar

Defined Keywords

The keywords you define are visible to customers on the Product Details page.
Customers can click any of the keywords to find related products.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 337

Adding Products to your Store

Setting Up Documents or Document Templates

Setting Up Dynamic Documents
Figure 281: Product Setup Page: Document Template (Dynamic Document)

Select Account, Select Campaign and Select Document: Select the account, the

Use Production Parameters from: This field indicates the Proof Job ID and
Process Job ID used for production. The system automatically retrieves the
last job performed by the uProduce user as defined in the Store Setup page.

Campaign and the specific Document you want to use. Only the Accounts,
Campaigns and Documents that are available for the uProduce user set in the
Store Setup page are displayed in the corresponding drop-down lists.

You may modify the Job ID if you want to use production parameters from a
different job. In case you modified the Job IDs, click the Verify link to check if
the entered ID is correct.

Thumbnail Image: Select one of the following options for displaying the
thumbnails for Dynamic Documents:

Use uDirect auto-created thumbnail: Use the default thumbnails created in

uDirect. The thumbnail image is taken from the Documents DPKG. This
is the default selection.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 338

Adding Products to your Store

Select thumbnail from a recent job: Choose this option if you want to
select a thumbnail of a specific job to be presented in uStore for a product.
When selecting this option, you have to enter the Job ID. Using the Job ID,
uStore will retrieve the thumbnail from uProduce, save it and display it
in the Storefront Preview page (see Figure 283).

Figure 282: Product Setup Page: Select thumbnail from a recent job

Click the Preview link to see the selected product thumbnails. The Proof
window is opened where you can browse through product thumbnails.
Figure 283: Product Setup Page: Thumbnail preview

Upload thumbnails: Select this option if you want to use one or more

uploaded images as thumbnails for a product. Each thumbnail is

uploaded separately. When uploading more than one thumbnail, the user
can reorder them.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 339

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 284: Product Setup Page: Upload thumbnail

Click the Upload link to start uploading the thumbnails.

Figure 285: Product Setup Page: Upload thumbnail dialog

In the Upload Thumbnail dialog, click Browse to locate an image for

upload and click OK. The image thumbnail will be uploaded and
displayed in a table. To upload more images, repeat the procedure
described above. The uploaded images will be displayed in the order of
uploading:
Figure 286: Product Setup Page: Uploaded thumbnails

You may hover over the thumbnail to preview the enlarged image.
For each image, you have the following information displayed:

Order: Reflects the order of upload

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 340

Adding Products to your Store

Thumbnail: Product image thumbnail preview

Display Name: The default name for uploaded thumbnails is Page

[page number]. If you want to rename the uploaded product images,

select the Set the thumbnail displayed name checkbox above the table.
Once this checkbox is checked, the Display Name column becomes a
text box and you may edit it:
Figure 287: Product Setup Page: Uploaded thumbnails

If you clear the Set the thumbnail displayed name manually checkbox, the
Display Name will be restored to default name: Page [page number].
Note that when the Set the thumbnail displayed name manually checkbox
is selected, the page number will not be corrected when reordering the
thumbnails.
You can reorder the thumbnail by clicking the up and down arrows.
To delete thumbnail, click the

icon.

Update Local Cache: uStores local Assets Cache can be refreshed as needed, to
reflect the latest changes in the uProduce Server. You can set uStore to update
local cache only when you edit a product; when you create a new product,
this option will not be displayed (see Editing Products).

Use Recipient List (Dynamic and Email documents only): Leave this checkbox

selected if you want to personalize your document using a Recipient List,

clear it if you only want to customize it. If you clear this checkbox, the
Recipients page is omitted from the Products purchasing steps options in the
Storefront. Accordingly, customers will not be asked to use or to upload a
recipient list.
Note: Once an order has been placed for the product in the Storefront or
the product is in Draft mode in a shopping cart, the Use Recipient List
checkbox can no longer be cleared.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 341

Adding Products to your Store

Allow Download after Purchase: Select this checkbox to enable the customer to

download output files, such as generated PDF files. The output download is
available in the Order Details page at the store and in the Order Confirmation
email (detailed template) after the purchase order has been submitted.

Download the Composed Document: Select this option to enable the

shopper to purchase the production output files (rather than having the
print provider printing them).
Download another file: Select this option to enable the administrator to
upload a file that will be available for download by the shopper.

Please note that the possibility to download an output of the product that has
been placed offline or deleted may have an expiration period configured in
the ProductDownloadExpirationDays property in Presets>System
Setup>Global Configurations (see Editing the
ProductDownloadExpirationDays Global Configuration). uStore will start
counting the expiration period when the product is placed offline or deleted.
When the download period expires, the download icon will be disabled.
When hovering over the icon, a tooltip will be displayed, with an explanation
about the expiration of the download period. If the product is placed online
again, the expiration will be turned off.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 342

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 288: uStore Storefront: Downloading Product Output

Click to download
product output

Click to download
product output

Note: If the customer clicks the Download icon and the composition of the
downloadable file has not completed yet, an error message will appear
asking the customer to try later.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 343

Adding Products to your Store

Setting Up Static Documents

Figure 289: Product Setup Page: Document Template (Static Document)

Document File: Click Browse to specify the location of the Document File.

Proof File: Click Browse to specify the location of the proof file.

Thumbnail Image: Click the Upload link to start uploading the thumbnails. The
thumbnails upload procedure is the same as the one described for the
Dynamic Documents above (see page 339).

Allow Download after Purchase: Select this checkbox to enable the customer to

download output files, such as generated PDF files.

Download the Composed Document: Select this option to enable the

shopper to purchase the production output files (rather than having the
print provider printing them).
Download another file: Select this option to enable the administrator to
upload a file that will be available for download by the shopper. The
output download is available in the Order Details page at the store after
the purchase order has been submitted.

Please note that the possibility to download an output of the product that has
been placed offline or deleted may have an expiration period configured in
the ProductDownloadExpirationDays property in Presets>System
Setup>Global Configurations (see Setting Up the Global Configurations Table).
uStore will start counting the expiration period when the product is placed
offline or deleted. When the download period expires, the download icon will
be disabled. When hovering over the icon, a tooltip will be displayed, with an
explanation about the expiration of the download period. If the product is
placed online again, the expiration will be turned off.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 344

Adding Products to your Store

Allow Download of Proof File as a Sample: Select this checkbox to enable the

customer to download a low resolution version of a proof file.

Figure 290: uStore Storefront: Static Product View

Setting Up Template for Email Documents (Storefront Groups

only)
Figure 291: Product Setup Page: Email Template (Email Document)

Select Account, Select Campaign and Select e-mail Activity: Select the account,

Take Production Parameters from: This field indicates the ProofTest Job ID and
Send Job ID used for production. The system automatically retrieves the last

the Campaign and the Email Activity you want to use.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 345

Adding Products to your Store

job performed by the uProduce user as defined in the Store Setup page. You
may modify the Job ID if you want to use production parameters from a
different job. In case you modified the Job IDs, click the Verify link to check if
the entered ID is correct.

Thumbnail Image: Click the Upload link to start uploading the thumbnails. The
thumbnails upload procedure is the same as the one described for the
Dynamic Documents above (see page 339).

Schedule Order Automatically: Select this checkbox if you want the order
process to be scheduled automatically.

Use Recipient List (Dynamic and Email documents only): Leave this checkbox

selected if you want to personalize your document using a Recipient List,

clear it if you only want to customize it. If you clear this checkbox, the
Recipients button is omitted from the Products purchasing steps options in
Storefront. Accordingly, customers will not be asked to use or to upload a
recipient list.
Note: Once an order has been placed for the product in the Storefront or
the product is in Draft mode in a shopping cart, the Use Recipient List
checkbox can no longer be cleared.

Setting Up Upload Products (Component Groups only)

Figure 292: Product Setup Page: Document (Upload Product)

Max uploaded no. of pages: Enter a value to limit the number of pages that can

Output Paper Size: Select a paper size from the list of values. The paper size
options are set in Presets>System Setup>Paper Size (see Setting Up the Paper
Size Table). You can add more paper sizes to the list of values. When

be uploaded per document.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 346

Adding Products to your Store

uploading products in the Storefront, the paper size is verified and if it does
not fit the printable paper size, conversion to the correct size is suggested.

Enable Upload from Local Drive: selecting this option allows Storefront

Enable Upload from External Directories: select this option if you wish to allow
uploading Documents from external Document Repositories defined in
Presets (see Setting Up Document Repositories). In the Include List of
Repositories section, select the Document Repositories from which you wish
to allow document upload. If you wish to rename a Document repository,
type its name in the Display Name textbox.

customers to upload Documents from a local directory. This option is checked

by default.

Setting Up Composite Products (Storefront Groups Only)

Figure 293: Product Setup Page: Document (Composite Product)

Thumbnail Image: click the Upload link to upload a thumbnail image. The

Preview Template: The user must first create a Preview Campaign to include

thumbnails upload procedure is the same described for Dynamic Documents

(see page 339). You must upload at least one thumbnail image.
available properties of all the components of the Composite Product as
described in Appendix H: Creating a Preview Campaign. The campaign
should be uploaded to the uProduce server, using the Account that is
connected to the store and should go through Proof and process procedures
before being made available for use in uStore. Select Account, Select Campaign
and Select Document of this Preview Campaign. Only the Accounts,

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 347

Adding Products to your Store

Campaigns and Documents that are available for the uProduce user set in the
Store Setup page are displayed in the corresponding drop-down lists.

Take Production Parameters from this field indicates the Proof Job ID used

for production. The system automatically retrieves the last job performed by
the uProduce user as defined in the Store Setup page. You may modify the
Job ID if you want to use production parameters from a different job. In case
you modified the Job IDs, click the Verify link to check if the entered ID is
correct.
Use Recipient List select this checkbox if you want to enable clients to

personalize the product using a Recipient List. If this checkbox is not selected,
the personalization option is omitted. You must select this option if you wish
to add a personalized URL to a Dynamic or Email Document (see Setting Up
Cross Media Website (Dynamic and Email Products)).
Note: Once an order has been placed for the product in the Storefront or
the product is in Draft mode in a shopping cart, the Use Recipient List
checkbox can no longer be cleared.

Allow Download after Purchase: Select this checkbox to enable the customer to

download output files, such as generated PDF files.

Download order output: Select this option to enable the shopper to

purchase the production output files (rather than having the print
provider printing them).
Download another file: Select this option to enable the administrator to
upload a file that will be available for download by the shopper. The
output download is available in the Order Details page at the store after
the purchase order has been submitted.

Please note that the possibility to download an output of the product that has
been placed offline or deleted may have an expiration period configured in
the ProductDownloadExpirationDays property in Presets>System
Setup>Global Configurations (see Setting Up the Global Configurations Table).
uStore will start counting the expiration period when the product is placed
offline or deleted. When the download period expires, the download icon will
be disabled. When hovering over the icon, a tooltip will be displayed, with an
explanation about the expiration of the download period. If the product is
placed online again, the expiration will be turned off.

Setting Up Cross Media Website (Dynamic and Email

Products)
Note: The Cross Media Website settings are available only for users that
have the XMPie Cross Media license key.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 348

Adding Products to your Store

For Dynamic and Email Products, you have an option to include a personalized
URL for each recipient. uStore creates personalized URL addresses based on the
information provided by the uProduce Port which was selected to be used for the
Documents Proof/Process or Send.
For pre-requisites and detailed instructions on creating a cross-media uStore
product, see Creating Products with Personalized URLs.
Figure 294: Product Setup Page: Cross Media Website

Document Includes a Personalized URL: select this checkbox to include a

Use Dial as Part of the URL Address: select a Dial that you wish to include in
the personalized URL address. This drop-down list contains Campaign Dials
only. The Campaign Dial must be a Text input or a Dropdown (it cannot be
an Image, Rich Text Editor or a Date). Adding a Dial in addition to the
XMPieRecipientKey (the XMPie auto-created Primary Key) ensures that a
unique URL will be created for each Order.
Once the customer selects a Dial, a Port with the Dial value name is created in
the Campaign.

Enable Proof XMPieRURL Web Content Object: select the checkbox to enable
proof preview of a personalized website in Storefront. The Proof Web button
will be added in the Finalize step of the Order.

personalized URL in a Document.

When you save a Document with a personalized URL, its type changes:

Dynamic --> Dynamic & Web

Email --> Email & Web

Setting Up a Proof
Note: You do not need to set up a Proof for Upload Products.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 349

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 295: Product Setup: Proof (Dynamic Documents)

Let the User Generate a Proof: Select this checkbox to enable customers to
proof the product before purchasing it.

Once this checkbox is selected the following options are displayed:

Proof Type (Dynamic documents only): You can enable customers to

proof their documents as either PDF files or JPEG files. A default Proof
Type is defined when setting up the store (see Setting Up the Stores
Advanced Parameters). You can select value to override the default proof
type.

Note: For Composite Products the proof format is PDF only. This format
overrides the proof format settings of all Component products. The Proof
Type option is not available.

Number of records: Enter the number of records per proof.

Allow User to Select No. of Records per Proof: Select this checkbox to

enable users to define a number of records per proof and enter the
number of records in the Max No. text box.

Note: The Number of Records option is not available for Static Documents.

Enable Proof Approval: Select this to have customers approve a document

proof before they submit a purchase order. You can change the text used
for customer approval in the Proof Approval Text text box, and the text
used when a document proof has failed in the Proof Approval Error text
box.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 350

Adding Products to your Store

Including the Product in Product Groups

Figure 296: Product Setup Page: Include in Product Groups

Include in Product Groups: although you have already selected the Product Group
to which this product will be added, you can take this opportunity to include this
product in additional groups in your store. For more information on managing
Product Groups, refer to Managing Product Groups and Group Hierarchy.

Note: Component Groups are groups of products that can be included in a

Composite Product. The groups are not visible in the online store.

Setting Up Pricing and Tax

Figure 297: Product Pricing and Tax

Enable Product Pricing: Shows the stores default Pricing Model (for further

details, see Setting Up a Store) and product assignment to a Tax Group. If the

Enable Product Pricing option is selected, you will be required to define the

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 351

Adding Products to your Store

relevant product price tables at a later setup stage. If this checkbox is

unchecked, no pricing will be set for this product

Pricing Model: select the pricing model applied to this product.

Tax Group: select the Tax Group assigned to this product.

Note:

Composite Tax Group settings will override Tax Group settings of all
Component Products.

You cannot assign a Tax Group for an Upload Product.

Setting Up Advanced Parameters

Note: Upload Products do not have Advanced Parameters.

Figure 298: Product Setup: Advanced Parameters

External ID: Enables you to distinguish your product with an identification

number. This is useful when creating custom made plug-ins for uStore.

Product Manufacturer: Assign your product to a Manufacturer by selecting

one of the predefined Manufacturers (see Setting Up Manufacturers) in the
drop-down list. If you are not using an external manufacturer and
manufacture your products yourself, select produced internally. If you want to
assign your product to a new Manufacturer, click the Add new manufacturer
link. The Add Manufacturer window is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 352

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 299: Add manufacturer window

Fill in the required fields (see page 103) and Save. The Manufacturer details
will be saved in the Manufacturer Setup table in the Presets view (see Setting
Up Manufacturers). Please note that the manufacturer's address you enter in
the Address section will be considered as the Pickup Address for this product
when ordering it.
Note: Composite Manufacturer settings will override Manufacturer settings of
all Component Products.

Search Engine Optimization (SEO): Search Engine optimization enables you to

improve the volume and quality of traffic to your website from search
engines. SEO definitions include three main meta tags: Title, Description and
Keywords.

Note: Searches on the plural form of a keyword will also yield results that
include the singular form of it and vice versa.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 353

Adding Products to your Store

Use default values: Select this radio button if you would like to use the
default SEO definitions. The default values are as follows:

Title: <Product Name> with/without a suffix or a prefix, as defined

in the Search Engine Optimization (SEO) section of Store Setup page.
Description: <Product Description>. If no description is available, this
field is empty.
Keywords: By default, this field contains the keywords defined in the
Keywords field. If no key words are available, this field is left empty.

Use customized values select this radio button if you would like to set up
customized values for SEO. Then, click the Customize link. The SEO:
Customize Meta Tags window is displayed:

Figure 300: Product Setup: SEO: Customize Meta Tags

Modify the default values:

Title: Mandatory. You may modify the <Product Name> part of the
title.
Description: Mandatory. The default value is <Product Description>.
If no description is available, this field is left empty. You may enter a
customized description (up to 300 characters).
Keywords: Optional. By default, this field contains the keywords
defined in the Keywords field. If no key words are available, this field

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 354

Adding Products to your Store

is left empty. You may enter keywords, separated with comma. The
Keywords field may contain up to 300 characters.

Top Navigation Buttons Visible: select this checkbox to display the top
navigation buttons (for example, Customize, Recipients, uEdit, Finalize) in the

Storefront. Clear the checkbox to hide them.

Saving your Product

Figure 301: Product Setup Page: Saving Your Product

Once you are done setting up the products definitions, click Save.
The main Product Setup page is displayed. the main Product Setup page enables
you to customize the product (Dynamic Documents only) and set up its pricing
and delivery options. See Setting Up Your Products: Overview.
Note that the Save button is disabled when editing the online product. You
should take the product offline before saving any changes made in the Edit
Product page.

Setting Up Your Products: Overview

After saving the primary product setup (described in the previous section), the
main Product Setup page is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 355

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 302: Product Setup Main Page (sample)

This page contains links to the following procedures:

Note: These procedures can be performed only if the product is Offline;
otherwise all changes in these procedures will be discarded.

Composite Components Setup: Add components to a Composite Product (see

Product Properties Setup: Define product properties that may affect product

Customization Wizard Setup: An optional procedure that enables you to setup

Setting Up Component Products (Composite Products Only)).

pricing, the delivery price calculation and more. Setting up properties for a
single product is similar to setting up properties for a Product Profile. For
information on how to set up product properties, see Setting Up Product
Properties.

a customization wizard. This wizard guides customers through the

customization of selected dynamic objects (Dials) included in this document.
For details, see Setting Up the Customization Wizard (Dynamic and Email
Documents Only).

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 356

Adding Products to your Store

uEdit Setup: Enable or disable uEdit at the store as well as set up uEdits

default settings for XLIM1 documents. uEdit enables administrators as well as

end-users to edit their document and its objects (text boxes and graphic
boxes) using clear, intuitive tools. Administrators can also change the
documents layout. For information on how to set up uEdit properties, see
Setting Up uEdit HD (XLIM Documents Only).
Note: uEdit is not available for Email products.

For a complete description of uEdit usage and functionality, see the uEdit
User Guide.

Recipients Setup: Enable or disable the recipient list models (see Setting Up
Recipients (Dynamic, Composite and Email Documents Only).

Product Pricing Setup: Set up product price and cost as well as price and cost

Delivery Setup: If the product setup supports shipping pricing and if the
delivery was enabled in the store setup, you are required to define the
shipping pricing ranges. Each range consists of a minimum and maximum
number of copies a customer may ship per-order, and the price for each
shipping option. For information on how to set up delivery, see Setting Up
Delivery.

steps. Setting up pricing for a single product is similar to setting up pricing

for a Product Profile. For information on how to set up product pricing
properties, see Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters.

Note: Delivery is not available for Email products.

Product Inventory Setup: Enable inventory management of the static product.

Keep track of the products inventory levels, set safety inventory levels and
define inventory display policies in the storefront. In addition, you can set a
trigger for notifications when the inventory level reaches a limit. For
information on how to set up product inventory, see Setting Up Product
Inventory (Static Products Only).

Prepress Setup: Set up printing workflows for a seamless integration with

JDF-enabled printers. Setting up prepress workflows for a single product is
similar to setting up prepress workflows for a Product Profile. For

1.

XLIM (pronounced slim) is an acronym that stands for XMPie Less is More. This
proprietary solution significantly increases the speed of generating print output streams for
graphically simple (print) designs. Such designs are exported by uCreate as .xlim files and can be
uploaded to a uProduce Campaign. uProduce includes the algorithms that process XLIM dynamic
documents for generating print streams in an extremely speedy and efficient way.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 357

Adding Products to your Store

information on how to set up prepress workflows, see Setting Up Prepress

Workflows.

Place Online: after completing the product setup, make the product available

to the stores customers by placing it online (for details, see Placing the
Product Online).

These procedures are described in detail in the following sections. Bear in mind
that the product must be taken offline before performing any of these procedures.
Important! If the product is linked to a profile, the following parameters
are defined by the Product Profile:
- Product Properties
- Product Pricing
- Prepress Workflows

Setting Up Component Products (Composite Products

Only)
Composite Products may include one or more components, combined together as
a single product. The individual components appear in the store under
Component Groups. Component groups are not visible in the uStore Storefront.
The Components can be Static Documents, Dynamic Documents and Upload
Products. There are certain limitations on Dynamic and Static Documents so that
they can become valid components for a Composite Product. Dynamic
Documents must not use Recipient Lists, the proof format is limited to PDF
format only and Packs cannot be used as a pricing unit of measure. For Static
Documents, the output and proof format is limited to PDF format only and Packs
cannot be used as a pricing unit of measure.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 358

Adding Products to your Store

To add a Component:
1.

In Product Setup page, click Composite Components Setup. The Composite

Components page is displayed:
Figure 303: Composite Components

2.

Select whether to Include Upload product. An Upload Product includes a set of

definitions used as a base for uploaded files.

3.

If Include Upload product is selected, choose an Upload product from the list.
A Composite Product can only include one Upload product. This will be the
set of definitions for all future files that are uploaded for this Composite
Product.

4.

Select whether to Allow upload of more than one document. If this option is
selected, the end-user will be able to upload several documents. All uploaded
documents will conform to the definitions of the selected Upload product.

5.

Click Add Component.

The Add Components page is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 359

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 304: Composite Components: Add Component

6.

Select the Component Product Groups to add to the Composite Product and
click OK.
Note: When selecting a Component Group, all its components are selected.
Any sub groups should be selected manually. If you add or remove products
from the Component Group, they will be added or removed from the
Composite products that use them

The selected components are displayed under Product Group. If any of the
documents in a Product Group do not fit the composite settings, Notification
is given:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 360

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 305: Composite Components: Added Components

7.

Click Notifications to display incompatibility information about products that

do not fit the composite settings:
Figure 306: Composite Components: Notifications

Products with the following definitions will not be added to the Composite
Product:

The document includes use of a Recipient List

The document output and/or proof format is not PDF

The document pricing is set using <Packs> as a pricing unit of measure

For other definitions, the Composite Product settings will override the
original product setting.
8.

To run all composite components using the same workflow settings, select the

Merge all components and use the Composite Prepress Setup checkbox. When

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 361

Adding Products to your Store

you select this option, the prepress workflow settings defined for each
component are overridden.
9.

Click Save.
Note: At least one Component or Upload Product must be added to the
Composite Product.

Setting Up Product Properties for Single Products

A Product Property is a parameter that may affect various aspects of product
pricing, delivery and production. For example, a Paper Type property may
affect price, whereas a Paper Weight property may affect delivery. In most
cases, the Product Properties are available for selection to the Storefront customer
during product order.
In addition, uStore offers a number of Global Properties that either are, or can be,
applied to all products (see Setting Up Document Repositories). For example, the
Base property which refers to the product base price, is mandatory for all
products. Schedule e-mail sending time is a global property that is mandatory for
Email products only. This property cannot be deleted, but its basic parameters
can be edited, as explained in Mandatory Email Product Properties.
Note: Setting up product properties for a single product is similar to setting
up product properties for a product profile.

For more information on how to set up product properties, see Setting Up

Product Pricing Parameters.

Mandatory Upload Product Properties

Upload products have the following mandatory product properties. These
properties cannot be deleted or edited, but you can change the default displayed
option and select whether it is visible to the customer or not. The properties are
Global Product Properties (see Setting Up Document Repositories).

The Color property enables you to select whether to print in black and white
or whether to use color.

The Double Sided Printing property enables you select whether to print on one
side of the paper or on both sides.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 362

Adding Products to your Store

Setting Up the Customization Wizard (Dynamic and

Email Documents Only)
This optional step, which is exclusive to Dynamic and Email documents, enables
administrators to create a Customization Wizard. The wizard is used to guide
customers who order this product through a customization process in which they
can specify values for a selection of dynamic objects included in the product.
Dynamic objects that can be customized in uStore are known as Dials. There are
two types of Dials: ADOR Objects, which are directly included in the Document
(for example, a text or a picture); and Variables, which are not directly included in
the Document, but involve an operation (for example, a calculation) whose result
is shown the Document (for example, a discount percentage). Each Document
includes a predefined list of available Dials and the administrator selects the Dials
to be included in the wizard.
Note: All Dials have default values (which may be null), defined in the
Plan file. Dials that are not included in the wizard automatically use their
default values during Proofing or Production.

For the customers convenience, the administrator can divide the Customization
Wizard into several logical steps. For example, you may create a wizard that
consists of two steps: a Personal Details step, followed by a Picture Selection
step.
Note: The customization wizard enables you to use a single Dynamic
Document to create several products, which vary in terms of their
customization-level and address different types of customers (for example,
novices vs. advanced users).

Customization Workflow
To setup the customization wizard:
1.

Click Customization Wizard Setup.

The Customization Wizard is displayed.
Note: By default, each new product includes a single step, Step 1, with no
linked Dials.

2.

To give the default step a meaningful name (for example, ContactDetails),

click Edit Step. The Step Details page is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 363

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 307: Step Details Page

3.

Edit the Step Name, provide a Step Description (optional) and click Save.

4.

On the Customization Wizard page, specify which Dials should be linked to

this step:
a.

From the Available Dials list, choose the type of Dials you want to display:
ADOR Objects (for example, text or graphic objects) or Variables (for

example, calculations).
b.

Once the desired type of Dial is displayed, move each relevant Dial from
the Available Dials list to the Dials Linked to Step list, by clicking the
icon.
To disconnect and remove a Dial from the step, click the

icon.

You can change the display order of dials in the Dials linked to Step list by
clicking the up
c.

and down

arrows.

Repeat Steps a and b above to move additional Dials from the Available
Dials list to the Dials Linked to Step list.

Figure 308 shows a sample Customization Wizard in which the selected text
Dials have been selected for the Contact Details step.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 364

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 308: Customization Wizard

The linked Dials icon indicates its editing status as follows:

5.

: edited Dial

: unedited Dial, whose default settings are currently used

: Dial that must be edited

To edit a linked Dial, click its name or click Edit.

The Dial Details page is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 365

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 309: Dial Details Page

6.

Configure the desired definitions of each Dial and click Save.

The customizable definitions are divided into three sections:

General Dial Information (see General Dial Information)

Input Controlspecific information (see Setting Up Customer Input Controls)

Validation Options (see Validation Options)

General Dial Information

The general customizable properties include:

Display Name: Name to be displayed to customers (as opposed to the Dial

Name in the Plan file).

Description: Brief description of this Dial.

External ID: Enables you to distinguish the Dial with an identification
number. This is useful when creating custom made plug-ins for uStore.
Appears on Steps: Displays the Customization Wizard step in which this

Dial appears.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 366

Adding Products to your Store

Visible to Customers: When selected, this Dial is displayed as part of the

product customization process at the store. A possible use of this feature

would be to create several products using a single design. For example,
you can create a design with several layers where each layer has a
different layout and assign a different Dial to each layer (for example, by
using a Visibility Dial). Then, you can create several products using that
same Document and the Dials you have created by exposing the layer
you want to make visible to customers. Customers will see only the
resulting design as they cannot customize the Dials you omitted from the
product customization stage.

Sub-property of: If one of the Dials in a particular Step has a Gallery List/

Grid View Input Control (see Gallery List/Grid View), you can create a
dependency between it and any of the other Dials in the same Step. Select
the Dial on which the new Dial is dependent from the drop-down list and
then select its value from the list of available options.

Setting Up uEdit HD (XLIM Documents Only)

Setting up uEdit HD is exclusive to XLIM Documents. This procedure enables
administrators to:

Enable or disable uEdit for customers at the store:

Select the Enable uEdit for the customer checkbox to let customers modify a
product design using uEdit tools.

Set up uEdits Display Mode:

You can select between two available Display Modes. The Display Mode
defines the set of tools a customer is given to modify a design. The Display
Mode you select here cannot be changed by the Storefront customer.

Simple Mode: allows editing the existing text and graphic objects.
Advanced Mode: allows adding and removing objects and editing shapes
in addition to editing the existing objects.

Set up uEdits default View Mode

In web browsers that support HTML 5, the Document preview will display
either the resolved Content Object value as it appears in the Proof or, a
customization value, if the product has been customized. If you wish to
display the Content Object name, such as First Name, you must write First
Name as a default Content Object value in the Plan.
For web browsers that do not support HTML 5, you can specify the default
way Content Objects are displayed at the store in the Customer View Mode
field:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 367

Adding Products to your Store

My Values: The default mode used to distinguish between two types of

Content Objects:

Content Objects that are personalized with unique values per

recipient show their names, indicated by double curly brackets: {{}}.
Content Objects that are customized with the same values for all
recipients show their fixed values.

Note that setting uEdit to this mode will display only the values
customized by the customer, either text or graphics.

Samples shows what an instance of the final document would look

like, by populating all Content Objects with sample values. Content

Objects that were customized show the customization value. Content
Objects that were not customized show the sample value/image. Content
Objects sample values include:

Personalized values that are unique to this recipient.

Customized values that are common to all recipients.

Note: In both the My Values mode and the Samples mode, textual Content
Objects that were customized with fixed values and are currently being
edited are indicated by double square brackets, [[]], to differentiate them
from Content Object names (indicated by double curly brackets: {{}}).

Fields shows all Content Objects using their names (whether they have
been customized or not), indicated by double curly brackets: {{}}.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 368

Adding Products to your Store

Enter the uEdit Help Text:

This text is displayed on the title bar of the uEdit page at the store. You may
enter a descriptive text that will guide customers in their first steps to modify
a design.
Figure 310: uEdit Help Text

Allow customers to use the entire range of fonts available in uProduce by

selecting All fonts or limit customers to specific fonts by selecting Choose from
list and then selecting the fonts you want available for the customers.

Edit the XLIM document and its objects. As an administrator, you can:

Modify the document layout (that is, move text and graphic boxes).

Scale images.

Change static text and replace image resources.

Note that you cannot change values that are customizable (that is, Text
and Graphic Content Objects).
Note: If you are using a Dynamic Document that is a component of a
Composite Product, uEdit Setup is not available.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 369

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 311: uEdit Setup Page

For a complete description of uEdit, refer to the uEdit User Guide.

Setting Up Recipients (Dynamic, Composite and Email

Documents Only)
Setting up Recipients is available for Dynamic, Email and Composite Products
when Use Recipients List is checked when setting up the product. For Composite
Products, the Recipient list is created online after all the components have been
added (see Personalizing Composite Products).
Setting up Recipients enables administrators to:

Enable upload of Recipient list files such as Excel spreadsheets (*.xls) and
Access (*.mdb). See Allowing Customers to Upload Recipient Lists.

Enable Data Source selection. See Allowing Customers to Select Recipients

from Data Sources.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 370

Adding Products to your Store

Enable USAData services for purchasing targeted mailing lists and sales
leads. See Allowing Customers to Use USAData Services.

Allow users to use the Recipient List Manager. See Using a Previously
Uploaded List. For Composite Products as well as Dynamic and Email
Documents with a personalized URL, this is the only available option.

Use Recipient lists that reside in a predefined database. See Retrieving a

Recipient List from a Database.

Set the desired number of records per proof. See Setting Up the Product
Pricing for Single Products.

Each of the above options includes the Display Name field that can be used to
change the default text of the corresponding radio button label at the store:
Figure 312: Recipients Setup Page

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 371

Adding Products to your Store

Allowing Customers to Upload Recipient Lists

Back Office: Uploading Recipient List Template

As a default, the Original Campaign Template is used for managing Recipient Lists.
The administrator may modify the default Recipient List template by adding
notes and comments, emphasizing headlines, using various colors in the recipient
list schema, rearranging the order of the fields or pre-populating the list with
data.
Note: No new fields can be added and field names cannot be modified
unless the administrator makes the necessary adjustments in the campaigns
Plan, Data Source and Document.

To upload an alternative Recipient List template:

1.

Select the Upload your Recipient List checkbox.

2.

In the Display Name field, enter the name of the uploaded Recipient List.

3.

Click the Download Template in Use link to download the template in use.

4.

Edit the downloaded template offline by adding notes or comments or

changing the fields order.

5.

Click the Upload Template link to upload the modified template. The Upload
Recipient List Template window is displayed:
Figure 313: Upload Recipient List

6.

Click the Browse... button to locate the template.

7.

Click the Upload button.

It is always possible to revert to the original template by clicking the Reset to

Original Template link.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 372

Adding Products to your Store

Storefront: Uploading Recipient List

In the Storefront, customers may be given the option to upload a predefined
Recipient List. A Recipient List can be saved in Excel or Access data files (.xml,
*.xls or *.mdb file extensions accordingly).
The customer can edit the predefined template (configured by the administrator
in the Back Office) and design a custom recipient list that will best suit his
business needs. For example, you may want to emphasize a headline or use
various colors in your recipient list schema, rearrange the order of the fields or
pre-populate the list with data. To use an alternative recipient list template, you
have to first create it using MS Excel and then copy the resulting .xml or *.xls file
to the following path:
CustomerApp\uStoreShared\Products\Product_<X>\RecipientListTemp
late.xml (or.xls) where Product_<X> indicates the Product ID name.
Figure 314 shows the Upload your Recipient List options at the store.
Figure 314: uStore Storefront: Upload your Recipient List

To upload a recipient list at the store:

1.

Click Browse to locate a recipient list file.

If you have no recipient list ready to upload, you can click Download Recipient
List Template to download a template of a recipient list. Make sure to fill in
the recipient list with the proper data before uploading it.

2.

In List Name, enter a name for the list you are uploading and click Next.

3.

If the fields in the uploaded recipient list do not match the fields in the
recipient list template, the following page is displayed to enable customers to
match their field names with the templates field names by choosing the
proper fields in the Match To list.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 373

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 315: uStore Storefront Recipient List Mapper

For fields in the template to which customers did not find corresponding
fields in the recipient list file they uploaded, they should select Fixed value
and enter a value that will be used for all recipients in the Data Source.
4.

If the customers recipient list includes more than a single table, they will be
prompted to select their primary table.
Figure 316: uStore Storefront: Upload your Recipient List, Select Table

5.

When customers click Next, the recipient list is displayed to enable customers
to edit columns, delete columns and proof their product.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 374

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 317: uStore Storefront: Recipient List Editor Page

6.

If customers want to use a different recipient list, they should click the Change
Recipient List link. Note that customers cannot use your browsers Back button
to go back and select a different recipient list.

7.

Customers are able to edit a record in the recipient list (

from the recipient list ( ) proof a record (
results by using the filter (

8.

), delete a record

) and narrow down search

).

To add multiple recipient list records, customers should click the Add New
button. The Add New Records page is displayed to enable customers to add up
to 10 recipients to the recipients list.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 375

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 318: uStore Storefront Add New Records Page

9.

Customers should click Save to add the recipient to the recipient list.

10. In the Recipient List Editor page (Figure 317), customers should click Next to
go to the Finalize Order page.

Allowing Customers to Select Recipients from Data Sources

Back Office
Customers can be given the option to access their Data Sources in real time and
either choose a filtered Data Source or choose a relevant table to be used as a
Recipient List (instead of uploading a predefined Recipient List). For example, a
travel agent may resend the same offer with slight changes to different Recipient
Lists, each time choosing the same Data Source with a different country filter (for
example, USA_Customers, Japanese_Customers, etc.) to target recipients who
are celebrating their holiday season.
The ability to support server-based Recipient Lists is enabled per-product in the
uStore Back Office application. Each Product Setup page features a new
Recipients Setup page, in which administrators mark the Data Sources, Filters
and Data Source Tables to be made available for selection as Recipient Lists.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 376

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 319: Recipient List Setup: Select Recipient from Data Source

Storefront
Figure 320: uStore Storefront: Select Recipient from Data Source

Allowing Customers to Use USAData Services

Back Office
Customers can be given the option to use the services of USAData for purchasing
targeted mailing lists and sales leads (Figure 321). To enable this option, you must
first set a USAData account in the System Setup table and then select it in the Store
Setup>Advanced tab (see Setting Up the Stores Advanced Parameters).
When purchasing a list from USAData, the cost is added to the total cost of the
order and is visible in the ordering workflow final step.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 377

Adding Products to your Store

Storefront
Figure 321: uStore Storefront USADATA Selection

Click Launch Leads Module from USADATA to open the USAData Leads module,
which will guide you through the process of purchasing a recipient list.
For more information on USAData services, go to:
http://www.usadata.com/

Using a Previously Uploaded List

Note: For Composite Products as well as Dynamic and Email documents
with a personalized URL, this is the only available option for setting up
recipients (see Setting Up Cross Media Website (Dynamic and Email
Products) on page 347).

Back Office
Customers can be given an option to use a previously uploaded recipient list. To
enable this option, select the Use a previously uploaded List checkbox and enter the
recipient list name in the Display Name field.
Figure 322: Recipient List Setup: User a previously uploaded List

Storefront
The Recipient List Manager utility (found in the My Account section in the
Storefront) stores a list of all previously uploaded recipient lists and recipient lists
purchased from USAData. During the ordering process, the Recipient List
Manager displays only recipient lists that match the recipient list schema as
determined by the Campaigns Plan. More on uploading your recipient list can be
found in Allowing Customers to Upload Recipient Lists.
Figure 323 shows the Recipient List Manager as it appears in the store.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 378

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 323: uStore Storefront Use a previously uploaded list

Select the recipient list of your choice and click Next.

Retrieving a Recipient List from a Database

Back Office
You can configure uStore to pull recipient lists from tables of an existing SQL
Server database whether it is the database in which uStore resides or any other
database.
Figure 324: Recipient Setup: Data Base

To use a database as your source for recipient lists:

1.

Select Data Base in the Recipients Setup page (Figure 324).

2.

Fill in the following fields:

Field

Description

Server Name/IP

Name of the server on which your database resides

(followed by the Database Instance, if applicable).

User Name, Password User name and password that are used to access
this server.

3.

Click Connect to retrieve a list of the available databases in the selected server.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 379

Adding Products to your Store

4.

Select the database you want to use from the Database Name list.

5.

Select a database table of the selected database from the Table Name list.
You are presented with all of the fields in the selected database. You can now
select the fields that will later be visible to customers at the store and can be
used as filters when selecting a database as the source for recipient list.
Figure 325: Recipient Setup: Data Base, Selecting the Database Fields

6.

Select the fields you want to let the customer use for filtering the database in
the Storefront and click Save.
Note: Database tables are retrieved in full with all of their fields (that is,
table columns). If you want to filter down the number of table fields visible
to customers, you should create a Database View and select it as your
database table.

Storefront
At the store, customers are given the option to filter down their recipient list by
selecting the filters that were defined by the store administrator in the uStore Back
Office application. Each filter field shows all of the distinct values in this field.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 380

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 326: uStore Storefront: Selecting Data Base as the Source for a Recipient List

When selecting a field (for example, the field Age, as in Figure 326), a distinct
value list appears next to the selected field, to enable customers to narrow down
their selection by choosing only several values from the list. A customer can select
a number of values by either dragging the mouse or using the <Shift> or the
<Ctrl> keys.
The resulting recipient list appears in the recipient list editor that follows, which
enables the customer to further edit the recipient list.

Personalizing Composite Products

Storefront
Storefront customers can personalize copies of Composite Products by creating a
Recipients list. They can decide which components of the Composite Product and
which customization fields to include for different recipients. Personalization is
determined in the Storefront and no administrator involvement is required.

To personalize a copy of a composite product at the store:

1.
2.

From the uStore Storefront, select a Composite product and click Place an

Order.

Click Continue. The Document Builder page is displayed:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 381

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 327: uStore Composite Product Order: Document Builder Page

3.

Click Edit your Recipients List in the panel on the right. The Recipients List is
displayed. By default, the Recipient list includes one recipient.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 382

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 328: uStore Composite Product Order: Recipients List

4.

Customers are able to select which components to include for different

recipients and to enter personalized information in the customization fields.

5.

To delete a record from the recipient list click ( )

6.

To add more recipients to the list, customers should click the Add button.
More recipients are added to the list.

7.

Customers should click OK to continue with the order.

For more information on ordering Composite products see Composite Flow.

Setting Up the Product Pricing for Single Products

Setting up pricing for a single product is similar to setting up pricing for a
Product Profile. For details on how to set up product pricing, see Setting Up
Product Pricing Parameters.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 383

Adding Products to your Store

Setting Up Delivery
You can set up uStore to enable customers to choose a delivery provider. This
way, customers have the option to distribute their products by selecting from a
list of available delivery providers at the store.
uStore is shipped with two out-of-the-box delivery carriers (FedEx and UPS) and
two additional configurable manual delivery options:

Fedex and UPS: superusers can enable customers to use FedEx or UPS as their

Manual Mailing: used for per-item delivery, where each product of the order is
sent to a different address. For example, a customer may order a set of
postcards and distribute them to recipients directly using a mail drop. Using
manual mailing, superusers can set up the prices for the delivery service.

Manual Shipping: used for sending the entire order to a single address. For
example, customers may order sets of business cards and distribute them
themselves, instead of sending them directly to clients (i.e., manual mailing).
Using manual shipping, users with Superuser permissions can set up the
prices for the delivery service.

delivery carriers for product distribution. The prices for the delivery are
generated online by the respective delivery carrier (i.e., FedEx or UPS) and
sent back to the store. In addition, you can apply Markup, which can be
added to the cost of the goods to cover the overhead expenses.

Note: The Manual Shipping price of a Composite Product overrides the

Manual Shipping price of all of its components.
Note: If a delivery provider has been defined for the store, as in Setting Up
Delivery Options, then you must select at least one delivery provider in the
Delivery Setup>General tab (Figure 329).

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 384

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 329: Delivery Setup>General tab

Delivery providers available on the Delivery Setup>General tab are the ones you
previously defined during store setup, as described in Setting Up Delivery
Options.
The Delivery Setup-General tab includes the following options:
Option

Description

Mailing, Shipping

Select whether this product will be shipped or mail

dropped. Choosing either Mailing or Shipping enables the
Provider that is selected for this product during the store
setup.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 385

Adding Products to your Store
Option

Description

Pickup Address

Displays the address of the Manufacturer to which this

product is assigned. This is a view-only field.

Weight
(Shipping Only)

The Weight section includes all of the product properties

that affect delivery. For more information on how to set up
product properties, refer to Setting Up Document
Repositories and Setting Up Product Properties for Single
Products.Select the weight units from the Units list and
then enter the weight of each product property (that
affects delivery) in the Weight column.
You can set the Base weight to zero and then enter the
actual weight of each product or you can set the Base
weight to a fixed value and then each product property
that affects the total weight will define the addition to the
Base weight.
For example, the product properties may be the following
paper types: Glossy, Matte and Plain. In addition you may
want to define a Base product property, for example,
attached stickers on the paper. You can set the product
properties weight to include the Base weight and, in this
case, you should set the Base weight to zero. Alternatively,
you can exclude the base weight from each products
weight, set the Base weight to its actual value, and then
set each product propertys weight separately.
Note: For Upload Products, the Weight value is set per
page. The total weight of an Uploaded document, is a
multiple of the weight per page and the total no of pages
uploaded.
Note: The total weight of a Composite Product, is the sum
of the weight of all its components.

Package Capacity
(Shipping Only)

You can set up uStore to automatically calculate the

number of packages required for shipment based on the
total weight of all products, divided by the weight that a
selected package can carry (the product weights are
defined in the Weights section above). Alternatively, you
can select the packages you want to use for shipping the
product and then define how many product items fit into
the selected delivery carriers packages (provided that a
delivery carrier has been selected).
For more information on delivery providers, refer to Setting
Up Delivery Options.
Note: Composite Delivery Package settings will override
the Delivery Package settings of all its components

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 386

Adding Products to your Store

When you have finished setting up general delivery parameters, click the Pricing
tab to define prices for weights. This tab is available only if Manual Mailing and/or
Manual Shipping were selected as delivery providers in this store.
Figure 330: Delivery Setup>Pricing tab

The Delivery Setup>Pricing tab enables you to define the delivery prices when
using Manual Mailing or Manual Shipping services. Note that Online Shipping
such as FedEx delivery services gets quotes online and do not require your
intervention in the process.
The mailing and shipping prices are given in the stores currency and are used to
price stacks of items. The Manual Mailing prices are set for units and the Manual
Shipping prices are set for shipments as implied by the nature of these services. For
more information on delivery providers, refer to Setting Up Delivery Options.

To add a price for delivery:

1.

Click the Add New Item link in the relevant section: Manual Mailing or
Manual Shipping.
Ranges are determined by specifying the lower delimiter of a range in the
From Quantity entry field, in such way that the subsequent delimiter of the
next range determines the higher delimiter of the previous one.
For example, by entering the lower delimiter 1 for the first range, you define
the range boundaries from 1 to infinity. Setting the subsequent delimiter to

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 387

Adding Products to your Store

100 defines the first range boundaries from 1 to 99 and the next stack from
100 to infinity, and so forth.

2.

For Manual Mailing service and any other mailing services you created,
define the price for ranges in the Mail Drop entry field.
For Manual Shipping service and any other shipping services you created,
define both the Standard shipping price and the Overnight shipping price
in the relevant entry fields.

Click the

sign to the left to put your settings into effect.

Note: Manual Shipping price settings for a Composite Product override the
Manual Shipping settings of all its components.

Setting Up Product Inventory (Static Products Only)

uStore provides you an inventory management feature that enables you to keep
track of the stocks of your static products. uStore inventory management settings
help you control your on-shelf inventory, set a safety inventory level and display
product inventory information in the storefront.
The inventory management setup page includes the following sections:

Inventory levels:

On-shelf inventory level: Displays the current inventory level. When you
set up a product inventory, you type here the number of items (or packs)
that are currently in stock. The on-shelf inventory level is updated only
after a customer completes the checkout process or, if an approval
process is defined, the purchase is approved by the order approver.

Note: On-shelf inventory level is displayed in the Order Details page.

Safety inventory level: Here is where you set the minimum number of
items (or packs) that should be always kept in stock. You can fill in a
negative number to enable customers to order more items than the
number of items that are available according to the on-shelf inventory
level.
Storefront inventory level: This value represents the number of items (or
packs) that are available for purchase in the storefront. The value
displayed is the result of the following calculation:
Storefront inventory level = (on-shelf inventory) - (safety inventory)
This is the inventory level that is displayed in the storefront.

Ordering Policy: Select the Display inventory level in storefront option to enable

customers to see the availability of the product. If you select to display the

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 388

Adding Products to your Store

inventory level in the storefront, you can select whether or not to enable
customers to order products that are out of stock.
Note: If you enable customers to order products that are out of stock,
product delivery dates may be affected. In addition, customers will be able
to purchase the product even if the on-shelf inventory reached its limit.

If the Display inventory level in storefront option is not selected, uStore still
updates the on-shelf inventory and the storefront inventory when the product
is purchased, but the inventory status does not appear in the storefront.

Notification Policy: Select the Trigger Inventory Level Is Low even when
current inventory level reaches option to be notified when on-shelf inventory

level reaches a predefined limit. When you select this option, you also need to
define the number of items that will trigger the notification. The notification
is sent out only once.
You set up the trigger on the Presets>Trigger Setup page.

Inventory Triggers
You can set up rules to be informed about inventory changes. There are two
events available for setting up inventory triggers:

Inventory Changed: A notification is sent every time product purchase.

Inventory Level Is Low: A notification is sent when the on-shelf inventory
reaches the predefined limit. When you update the inventory, the resets
and a new notification is sent out when the inventory reaches its limit
again.

You set up triggers at Presets>Trigger Setup.

To learn more about how to set up triggers, see Setting Up Triggers.

Inventory Reports
The Inventory Levels report provides the current inventory levels of all products
that are tracked
To generate the Inventory Levels report, go to Presets>Reports.
To learn more about uStore reports, see Generating Reports.

To set up inventory management parameters:

1.

Take the product offline.

2.

Click Inventory Setup.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 389

Adding Products to your Store

3.

Select the Enable inventory management for this product checkbox.

Figure 331: Enabling Inventory Management

4.

In the On-shelf inventory level field, enter the number of items (or packs)
currently in stock.
Note: Make sure to update the on-shelf inventory level when you get a new
stock.

5.

If required, in the Safety inventory level field, enter the number or items that
you want to keep always in stock.
The Storefront inventory level is automatically filled in.

6.

To display the current storefront inventory level in the storefront, select the
checkbox Display inventory level in storefront.

7.

To enable users to order the product when it is out of stock, select the
checkbox Allow customers to order a product that is Out of Stock.

8.

To be notified when the inventory level reaches a certain number of items,

select the checkbox Trigger Inventory Level is low event when current inventory
reaches, and fill in the inventory level at which you would like to be notified
about.

9.

Place the product online.

See below an example of a store with products that use inventory management.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 390

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 332: Products with inventory management

Ordering Policy Selection

Result
uStore tracks inventory, but
storefront inventory levels are not
displayed.

Storefront inventory levels are

displayed in storefront, but
customers cannot order products
that are out of stock. Customers can
select the product and purchase it
later, when the inventory is renewed.
See Figure 332.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 391

Adding Products to your Store
Ordering Policy Selection

Result
Storefront inventory levels are
displayed in storefront and
customers can order products that
are out of stock. Product delivery
dates may be delayed. See
Figure 332.

Setting Up Prepress Workflows for Single Products

Setting up prepress workflows for a single product is similar to setting up
prepress workflows for a Product Profile. For details on how to set up prepress
workflows, see Setting Up Prepress Workflows.

Placing the Product Online

When you finish setting up the product, you can make it available for purchasing
when you place your store online. See Making your Store Available Online.

To place a product online:

Click Place Online.

You are notified that your product is now online.

Managing your Products

Editing Products
You can modify the above product setup at any later stage.

To edit a product:
1.

Click the arrow (

) next to the selected product on the Store Details page.

2.

Select Take Offline and Edit in the context menu.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 392

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 333: Edit Product

The primary Product Setup page is displayed.

3.

If you are editing a dynamic document, the Product Setup page now includes
additional, Update Local Cache options:
Figure 334: Editing the Product Setup: Local Cache Options

Select from the following checkboxes and click Save to update the uStore
cache.

Document and Resources: Updates the Document XML in case of a XLIM

document and caches uProduce resources.
Document Thumbnails: Updates the Document thumbnails after using
uProduce to check the document out and in.
Recipient Schema: Updates the Recipient List schema used by the

Document, after a change was made in the Plan in uProduce.

Campaign Fonts: Updates the Campaign fonts used by the Document.

For detailed description of product editing options, see Adding Products to the
Product Groups.

Copying Products between Stores

You can copy products with all their properties from one store to another.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 393

Adding Products to your Store

To copy a product from one store to another:

1.

In the Store Details page, select a product, click the arrow ( ) next to the
selected product to open the context menu and click Copy to store.
The Copy to Store dialog is displayed:
Figure 335: Copy Product to another Store Select Store

2.

Select the store to which you want to copy the selected product. You can
select one store only. If you want to copy the selected product to more than
one store, you will have to repeat this procedure again. If you select to copy a
product to the same store, you can then modify the copied products settings
(for example, Product Group assignment, Pricing, etc.)

3.

Click Next.

4.

In the next screen, select the Product Group in the destination store to which
you want to copy the selected product:

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 394

Adding Products to your Store
Figure 336: Copy Product to another Store Select Product Group

At least one Product Group must be selected.

5.

Click Finish.
If the Product has been successfully copied, a success message will be
displayed:
Figure 337: Copy Product to another Store Select Product Group

The product is copied to another store while preserving the product setup
(including its Customization Wizard, Recipients, Product Pricing and
Shipping Pricing properties). If the destination store already has a product
with the same name, a prefix will be attached to the copied product name: for
example, if the copied product name is Happy New Year postcard, the
copied product name will be copy[copy number]Happy New Year
postcard.
The copied product appears offline in the destination store, since it probably
requires some fine-tuning before it is placed online.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 395

Adding Products to your Store

6.

Click Go to copied product, to go to the Product Setup page of the copied

product in the destination store (Figure 302), where you can edit the Product
definitions.

7.

Click Copy to another store, if you want to copy this Product to more stores.
The Copy to Store dialog will be displayed. Repeat the steps 1-5.

8.

Click Close, to quit the Copy To Store wizard.

If the settings of the copied product conflict with the settings of the store to which
it is copied, a warning message will be displayed. You will still be able to copy the
product by selecting the suggested workaround Solution. In some cases manual
adjustments will be required after the product has been copied to the destination
store.
A warning will be displayed in the following cases:

Data Source incompatibility

Problem:

The Data Source used in the product customization properties of the

copied product is not enabled in the destination store.

Solution:

Check the Allow using the used data source to the destination store
checkbox and click the Copy product link at the bottom of the page.

Recipient List Provider incompatibility

Problem:

The copied product uses the Recipient List provider (for example,
USAData) that is not set up in the destination store.

Solution:

Check the Copy the USAData account from the origin store to the
destination store checkbox and click the Copy product link at the bottom of
the page.

Different Delivery Options

Problem:

The delivery options in the original store are different from the delivery
options in the destination store.

Solution:

Check the Dont copy delivery definitions for options that are not used in
the destination store checkbox and click the Copy product link at the
bottom of the page. Only delivery definitions that exist in both origin and
destination stores will be copied. In case there are no matching Delivery

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 396

Adding Products to your Store

Providers, the product will be copied with no delivery definitions and the
user will have to edit the Delivery Provider in the destination store before
placing the product online.

Different Setup Culture

Problem:

The setup culture in the original store is different from the setup culture
of the destination store.

Solution:

Check the Copy <Culture Name> text to the English text fields
(Destinations setup culture) checkbox and click the Copy product link at
the bottom of the page. The Setup Culture of the copied product will be
the same as in the original store.

Missing Localization Cultures

Problem:

Some of the localization cultures that are defined for the destination store
are missing for the copied product.

Solution:

Click Copy Product and once the Copy procedure is completed, localize
the copied product to the missing cultures.

Different Currency
Problem:

The currency used in the original store is different from the currency used
in the destination store.

Solution:

Select Dont copy prices. There will be no prices for this production the
destination store and click Copy Product. You will have to define the
prices manually after the product has been copied to the destination
store.

Select Copy the products prices anyway and click Copy Product. The
product will be copied with the prices of the original store. You will have
to update the prices and the currency manually after the product has
been copied.

In case you do not want to select the suggested Solution, you may either try to
copy the product to another store by clicking the Select another store link or
cancel the copying by clicking Cancel.

Chapter 7: Setting Up Products 397

Adding Products to your Store

Warning: When copying a Composite Product to another store, its

components will not be copied with it. Each component must be copied
separately and then setup again as a component of the Composite Product
(see Setting Up Component Products (Composite Products Only))

Duplicating Products
To duplicate a product, click the arrow (
the context menu and click Duplicate.

) next to the selected product to open

Figure 338: Duplicate Product

The product is duplicated while preserving the product setup (including its
Customization Wizard, Recipients, Product Pricing and Shipping Pricing
properties).The duplicated product is named copy[copy number]<Product
Name>, for example, copy[1]Summer Promotion.
The only differences between the original product and its duplicate are that a
duplicated product is created offline, since it probably requires some finetuning to distinguish it from the original product before it is placed online.
The duplicate is included in a single product group that was selected when
the original product was duplicated, as opposed to the original product,
which may belong to multiple groups.

Chapter

Setting up Users and User Groups

uStore system offers an approach to control store users in a centralized
fashion via User Groups. The uStore administrator has the ability to control
the user access by allowing or disallowing users of particular User Groups to
do the following:

In the Storefront:

Checkout Orders

See all Products and Product Groups in the store

In the Back Office:

See/edit Back Office Users and Storefront Users

See Orders

See Reports

See Store list

Create user

Create store

See Presets tab

See all Order Queues

See all Order Actions

Access Web Service API

Users
All uStore users must be assigned to User Groups from which they inherit
access permissions to Storefront and Back Office stores.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 399

Users

Users Main Page

This page is divided into two sections:

Search

Allows you to filter the Users List by entering or selecting the searched
values in one or more filter fields (First Name, Last Name, Email, Member
in Group and Can log into store drop-down lists) and clicking the Search
link. The search results will be displayed in the Users list in the bottom
section of the page.

Users List

Displays a list of all users in the system. From this section, you can
perform the following actions:

Create new users (see Adding a New User).

Import users (see Importing Users).

Download users (see Downloading Users).

Delete users (see Deleting Users).

Add users to a User Group (see Adding Users to Groups).

Change user assignment to a Store (see Changing Store Assignment).

Searching the Users List

Figure 339: Searching Users List

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 400

Users

To search the User List:

1.

Enter the search value in one or more of the following search filter fields:

First Name: filters/searches users according to the first name

Last Name: filters/searches users according to the last name

Email: users email address: filters/searches users according to users

email address
Member in Group: filters/searches users that are members of the
specified User Group. It is also possible to search users that are not
assigned to any Group by selecting No Group in the drop-down list.
Such users should be either deleted or assigned to a User Group,
otherwise they will not have permissions to any store.
Can log into Store: filters/searches users that are included in User

Groups that have access to the specified Store Name.

Assigned to Store: filters/searches users that are assigned to the

specified Store Name.

Note: Member in Group and Can log into store fields are mutually exclusive:
if you select one, the other is disabled.

2.

Click the Search link.

If a match has been found, it is displayed in the Users List section.

3.

To return to the unfiltered Users List view, click the Clear Search link.

Adding a New User

To create a new user:
1.

Hover over the Users icon (

Create New User

Figure 340: Create New User

Or else,

) on the Views toolbar and select

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 401

Users

Click Users under the Users icon (

click New User.

). Then, in the User List page,

The User Setup page is displayed:

Figure 341: User Setup Page

2.

Configure the following user properties:

Note: The list of fields displayed in the User Setup page is defined in
Presets>User Details Setup. For more information, see Setting Up User
Details Fields.
First Name: users first name (mandatory).
Last Name: users last name (mandatory).
Assign to Store: determines if the user credentials are valid for all allowed

stores or for a specific store only. In the latter case, uStore allows you to
have several users with the same email address assigned to different

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 402

Users

stores. User assignment to a store does not override the permissions

setup in the User Group.
Include in Groups: lists all User Groups defined for this user in the uStore
system (mandatory). By selecting the desired User Group, you can
determine which stores this user will be able to access. To start using
uStore, a user must be part of at least one User Group. To add a user to
one or more User Groups, click the Add link. The Add to Group window is
displayed:

Figure 342: User Setup Page Add to Group

From the Add to Group drop-down list, select the User Group to which
you would like to add the user and click OK. The selected User Group will
appear in the User Setup page under the Include in Groups field.
Email serves as this users user name when logging into uStore Back

Office or uStore Storefront. See uStore Back Office Application Overview.

Password serves as this users password when logging into uStore

(mandatory). The password format must match the password format
settings defined in the Permissions tab of the Store Setup page (see
Password Policy). Note that it is automatically concealed by ten
characters, regardless of its actual length.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password that you entered in the

Password field (mandatory).

You can optionally enter the following fields: Phone Number, Mobile
Number, Fax Number, Company Name, Department, Job Title.
External ID: Enables you to distinguish a user with an identification
number. This is useful when creating custom made plug-ins for your
store.

3.

User is locked out: this checkbox is available for locking out a user. The
lockout may happen automatically if the password policy of the store to
which the user registered is set to lock out users after a certain number of

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 403

Users

invalid login attempts. Once the user is locked out, this checkbox is
automatically checked and the User is locked out message appears in
red. The Store administrator can unlock the users account by unchecking
this checkbox. When you are done defining the users properties, click
Save. You can later change these properties by clicking Edit or remove the
user by clicking Delete.
This process enables you to create and maintain the different types of users in
your uStore environment.
The Users view lists up to fifteen users per page. You can easily locate a
specific user by searching for a sub-string that appears in that users Login
(which is usually an email address), First Name or Last Name properties.

Importing Users
The uStore Back Office application enables you to efficiently create all
required users by uploading a User List instead of manually defining one
user at a time.
The Users view now includes the Import button, which enables you to browse
to the location of your user list. To make sure your list is compatible with the
required user list structure, download the User List Template (available
through the same page).
Note: 1. Only XLS files are accepted for User List upload.
2. Emails should be unique in the list.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 404

Users

To import a User List:

1.

In the Users main page, click the Import button. The Import User List
window is displayed:
Figure 343: Import User List

Browse for your custom User List file (in Excel format). To prepare your
User List, you can first download a User List template
(UserListTemplate.xls) by clicking the Download a User List Template link,
filling it in and then uploading it to uStore.
2.

In the Assign to Store field, select the Store to which you would like to
assign the imported users. This is a mandatory step: users cannot be
granted permissions in the application without being assigned to a
particular Store.

3.

In the Add to Group field, select the User Group to which you would like
to add the imported users.This is a mandatory step: users cannot be
granted permissions in the application without becoming members in a
certain User Group. Make sure that the selected User Group has
permission to enter the assigned store.

4.

Click Upload.

You can also import users from the User Group Setup page (see Assigning
Users to the User Group). In that case, the imported users will be
automatically added to the selected User Group.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 405

Users

Downloading Users
The uStore Back Office application enables you to download a list of users.
Clicking the Download button will download a UserList.xls file. This file
contains a list of users with all their fields.
This file can be used to update user information outside uStore and can later
be re-imported back to uStore using the Import option (see Importing Users).
Note:
1. If several Billing or Shipping Addresses are defined, this file will display
only the first address (one Billing Address and one Shipping Address).
2. The Password field, being confidential, is exported as empty. When
importing this file back to uStore, the administrator must fill the Password
field manually.

Deleting Users
To delete a User:
1.

In the Users main page, click the Delete button. The confirmation
message will be displayed.

2.

Click OK. The user will be deleted from the list.

Adding Users to Groups

To add users to User Groups:
1.

In the User List page, select the users that you would like to assign to a
User Group.

2.

Click the Add to Group button. The Add to Group window is displayed:
Figure 344: Adding Users to Group

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 406

Users

3.

In the Add to Group drop-down list, type or select the User Group.

4.

Click OK.
Note: You may also add users to Groups from the User Setup page by
clicking the Add link next to the Include in Group field (see Figure 341). In
that case, you will be assigning one user to one or more Groups whereas in
the scenario described in this section you can assign one or more users to
one User Group.

Changing Store Assignment

To change Store assignment for a user:
1.

In the User List page, select the users for which you wish to modify the
Store assignment.

2.

Click the Change Store Assignment button. The Change Store Assignment
window is displayed:
Figure 345: Changing Store Assignment

3.

In the Assign to Store field, select a store to which you wish to assign the
selected user.

4.

Click OK.
Note:
1. Only users belonging to User Groups that have permissions to the specific
store can be assigned to it. Make sure that the assigned store is allowed to
be accessed by the User Group to which the user belongs.
2. Two users with the same email address cannot be assigned to the same
store.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 407

User Groups

User Groups
There are two types of User Groups:

Default User Groups

Pre-defined User Groups with a given set of permissions. uStore has 5
default User Groups:

Customer

Operator

Administrator

Superuser

Anonymous

The default User Groups are described in Table 6 .

Table 6: uStore Default User Groups

Default User
Groups

Customer
(Registered
Users)

Description

Uses the
uStore
Storefront
application to
connect to
online stores,
and
customize
and order the
desired
product(s).

Managed
Users
None

Available
uStore Admin
Views
None (cannot
access the uStore
Back Office
application, only
the uStore
Storefront
application)

Accessible
uStore
Storefront
Stores
Stores to which
the superuser or
store
administrator
granted access

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 408

User Groups
Table 6: uStore Default User Groups
Store
Operator

Prioritizes the
orders
received from
the uStore
Storefront
application
and adds
them to the
uProduce
Servers
production
queue.

None

Orders: can only

view and process
the orders of
stores the store
operator has
permission to
access

Stores to which
the superuser
granted access

Store
Administrator

Edits stores
the
administrator
has
permission to
access (which
were created
by the uStore
Superuser)
and manages
the products
and
customers of
the stores the
administrator
has
permission to
access.

The
customers
of the
stores that
the
administra
tor has
permission
to access.

Stores: can
only view and
edit the stores
the
administrator
has permission
to access.
Orders: can
only view and
process the
orders
received from
stores the
administrator
has permission
to access.
Users: can
only manage
customers of
stores the
administrator
has permission
to access.
Reports
Presets Can
only access
Messages
setup.

Stores to which
the superuser
granted access

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 409

User Groups
Table 6: uStore Default User Groups
uStore
Superuser

The only User

Group whose
users have
permissions
to create new
stores and
administratortype users.
Has access to
all entities in
the system,
and specifies
which stores
can be
accessed by
each user.

All
(both
customers
and other
administra
tors)

All

All stores

Anonymous

Can see all

products and
product
groups in a
store, but
cannot
execute
orders unless
registered.
Has no access
to the uStore
Back Office.

None

None

Public stores to
which the
Anonymous user
Group is granted
access

User Groups created based on the default User Groups

User Groups can be created either automatically, upon creation of a new
store, or manually, by the uStore administrator. Each new User Group is
based on a default User Group and inherits all its permissions. uStore
administrators can edit existing or add new User Groups and control
their permissions. Each user is then assigned to a certain User Group and
inherits all the permissions of that Group.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 410

User Groups

User Groups Main Page

The User Groups main page displays the list of all User Groups.
Figure 346: uStore Back Office User Groups Page

This page is divided into two sections:

Search
Allows you to filter the User Groups List by entering the searched valued
in the Group Name, Description and/or Allowed to store fields. This section
can be closed by clicking the
icon.

icon and reopened by clicking the

User Groups List

Displays a list of all User Groups in the system or User Groups returned
as search results.
From this section, you can perform the following actions:

Create new User Group (see Adding a New User Group).

Delete non-default User Groups (by clicking the Delete icon

).

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 411

User Groups

Searching the User Groups List

To search the User List:
1.

Enter the search value in one or more of the following three search filter
fields:

2.

Group Name: searches the User List according to the Group Name.
Description: searches the User List trying to match the entered search
value with the values defined in the Group Description field in the
General tab of the User Group Setup windows (see Figure 348).
Allowed to store: select the available store name from this drop-down
list. The system will search the User List trying to match the selected
value with the value defined in the Allowed to store field in the
Permissions tab of the User Group Setup windows (see Assigning
Permissions to the User Group).

Click the Search link.

If a match has been found, it is displayed in the User Groups List section.

3.

To return to the unfiltered User Groups List view, click the Clear Search
link.

Viewing the User Groups List

The User Groups list can be viewed in two modes:

Grid (table) view (default)

Tree view

The User Group List grid view displays the following information:

Group Name:

The name of the User Group. The default User Groups appear first in
the list.

Number of members

The number of users assigned to that User Group.

View in a tree

Clicking this link switches the User List display from the default grid
view to a hierarchical tree view:

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 412

User Groups
Figure 347: uStore Back Office User Groups Tree View

The tree view displays all User Groups and Sub-Groups in a hierarchical
order. The number of users in the Group is indicated in parenthesis next
to the Group Name.
The default User Groups are displayed as the Root directories. Under
each Root directory, you may see the non-default User Groups that
inherit permissions from the given default User Group. The non-default
User Groups can also contain Sub-Groups that inherit permissions from
them.
The User Group whose position in the hierarchy we wanted to see when
clicking the View in a tree link appears highlighted in blue.
Clicking the User Group name opens the User Group Setup page of the
selected User Group (see Figure 348).
To return to the table view, click the Back to Grid View link.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 413

User Groups

Adding a New User Group

User Groups can be created in one of the following ways:

Automatic User Group creation upon new store creation: each time a new
store is being set up, the system automatically creates new Customer and
Administrator groups based on the default Customer and Administrator
permissions Groups (see Setting Up Permissions).

Manual User Group creation (described below):

To add a new User Group from the User Groups window.

1.

From the Users tab > User Groups page, click the New Users Group link.
The User Group Setup page is displayed.
Figure 348: uStore Back Office New User Group

The User Group Setup page contains three tabs:

2.

General

Users

Permissions

In the General tab, fill in the Group Name and the Group Description fields.
Note: When you create user groups for LDAP users, you must follow this
naming convention: [Group Name Prefix].[domain controller group name].
To learn more about LDAP login, see Enabling LDAP Login.

In addition, the User Group Setup page displays the following information
(in case a new Group is created, this information is missing):

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 414

User Groups

Users: the number of users assigned to the Group (0 Users in case a

new Group is created).

3.

Child Groups: lists the groups that inherit permissions from the
current Group (None in case a new Group is created)
Store Front Stores: the storefront stores to which the current Group is
granted access permissions (No Stores Selected in case a new
Group is created).
Back Office Stores: the back office stores to which the current Group is
granted access permissions (No Stores Selected in case a new
Group is created).

Click Save.
Note: When a new User Group is created, it does not include any of the
existing users. You must first save the store and then import a Users list or
add the relevant existing users and assign them to the new User Group.

Creating User Groups that Match LDAP Groups

Creating a user group to match existing LDAP groups is similar to creating
regular groups on uStore. The main difference is that you need to name the
new group following this naming convention: [Group Name Prefix].[domain
controller group name].
When your store is configured to use LDAP authentication, to ensure that
users who enter the store are provided the required permissions, you need to
create new groups using the Group Name Prefix that you defined when you
set up the store. See Enabling LDAP Login.
When a customer logs in to the store using LDAP credentials, uStore tries to
match the users LDAP domain-controller groups to existing groups in
uStore. Group names that are found on both uStore and the domain controller
are associated with the logged in user.
For example, if John is a member of the following groups: NorthAmericaUsers,
Accountant, and CarOwners, uStore tries to match the user John to these
groups.
First, uStore tries to find a group named NorthAmericaUsers, if one exists, it
maps John to this group. Next, uStore looks for a group named Accountant
and then a group called CarOwners.
If the Group Name Prefix is "ACME", uStore tries to match the user John to
ACME.NorthAmericaUsers, then ACME.Accountant, and then
ACME.CarOwners.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 415

User Groups

Note: When you creating the LDAP matching groups on uStore, make sure
that you use the exact Group Name Prefix that you defined in the store
setup.

To add a new User Group that matches an LDAP group:

1.

From the Users tab > User Groups page, click the New Users Group link.
The User Group Setup page is displayed.
The User Group Setup page contains three tabs:

2.

General

Users

Permissions

In the General tab, fill in the Group Name and the Group Description fields.
Figure 349: uStore Back Office New User Group

Note: When you create user groups for LDAP users, you must follow this
naming convention: [Group Name Prefix].[domain controller group name].

3.

In the Group Description box, type a description. For example, type the
original name of the group in the LDAP system.

4.

Click Save.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 416

User Groups

Assigning Users to the User Group

After having created a new User Group, you have to assign users to it. For
existing User Groups, you may modify the user assignment.
Note: When users log in to uStore with LDAP credentials, they are
automatically assigned to predefined user groups.
To learn more about LDAP login, see Enabling LDAP Login.

To assign users to a User Group:

1.

In the User Groups page, click the Group Name to modify the user
assignment.
Figure 350: uStore Back Office User Group Setup Users tab

The Users tab of the User Group Setup page displays the detailed
information about all users that are part of this Group.
The window is divided into two sections:

Search
Allows you to filter the Users List by entering or selecting the
searched values in one or more filter fields (First Name, Last Name,
Email, Member in Group, Can log into store and Assigned to Store drop-

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 417

User Groups

down lists) and clicking the Search link. The search results will be
displayed in the Users list in the bottom section of the page.

Users list
Displays a list of all Users assigned to this Group.

2.

Select one of the following options to manage user assignment to a User

Group:

Import: import users to this User Group

Download: download a list of users assigned to this User Group

Add Existing User: assign existing users to this User Group.

Remove from Group: remove users from this User Group

Change Store Assignment: change store assignment of the users

assigned to this User Group. Note that a user in a User Group can
be either assigned to all stores or to stores that are allowed for the
User group (see Permissions tab).

Importing Users to a User Group

You can import a list of users you wish to assign to the selected User Group.

To import users from an external Excel file:

1.

Click the Import button.

The Import User List dialog is displayed.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 418

User Groups
Figure 351: uStore Back Office User Group Setup Users tab Import User List

2.

Browse for your custom User List file (in XSL format).

3.

In the Assign to Store field, select a Store to which you wish to assign the
imported users. Make sure you assign the users to stores which are
accessible for the User Group (see Permissions tab)

4.

Click Upload.
To prepare your User List, you can first download a User List template
(UserListTemplate.xls) by clicking the Download a User List Template link,
filling it in and then uploading it to uStore.

Downloading Users Assigned to a User Group

Clicking the Download button will download a UserList.xls file. This file
contains a list of filtered users with all their fields.
This file can be used to update user information outside uStore and can later
be re-imported back to the selected uStore User Group using the Import
option (see Importing Users to a User Group).

Adding Existing Users to a User Group

You can add users that already exist in the system to the selected User Group.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 419

User Groups

To add existing users to a User Group:

1.

Click the Add Existing User button.

The Add Users page is displayed.
Figure 352: uStore Back Office Assigning Users to the User Group Users tab
Add Users

This page displays the detailed information about all the uStore users.
The window is divided into two sections:

Search
Allows you to search Users by entering or selecting the searched
values in one or more filter fields (First Name, Last Name, Email,
Member in Group, Can log into store and Assigned to Store drop-down
lists) and clicking the Search link. The search results will be displayed
in the Users List in the bottom section of the page.

Users List
Displays a list of all existing Users.

2.

Select users and click the Add Users button. The selected users will be
added to the Users List in the Users tab of the User Group Setup page.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 420

User Groups

Removing Users from a User Group

To remove users from a User Group:
1.

Select a user in the Users List.

2.

Click the Remove from Group button.

Changing Store Assignment for Users in a User Group

You can change the store assignment for users in the selected User Group.

To change Store assignment:

1.

Select a user in the Users List.

2.

Click the Change Store Assignment button. The Change Store Assignment
window is displayed:
Figure 353: Changing Store Assignment

3.

In the Assign to Store field, select a store to which you wish to assign the
selected user.

4.

Click OK.

Assigning Permissions to the User Group

A User Group is defined by a set of access permissions for its member users.
uStore offers a list of permissions that can be allowed or denied for each User
Group. The permissions are defined in the Permissions tab of the User Groups
Setup page.
Note: If you enable users to log in to your store using LDAP credentials,
make sure that you assign the appropriate permissions to the LDAP groups
that you create.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 421

User Groups

To set up User Group Permissions:

1.

Go to the Permissions tab.

Figure 354: uStore Back Office Add New User Group Permissions tabs

2.

In the Inherit Permissions from drop-down list, select an existing User

Group from which the selected Group will inherit permissions.

3.

Click Edit next to the Allowed to stores field to set up User Group
Permissions for specific stores. The Manage Stores window is displayed:

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 422

User Groups
Figure 355: uStore Back Office Add New User Group Permissions tabs
Manage Stores

4.

In the Manage Stores window, select the permissions for Storefront and
Back Office stores.

Option

Description

Store Front
All Stores Select this option to grant permission to all online stores.
Selected Stores Select this option to grant permission to specific stores. When

this option is selected, the list of available stores is displayed.

Check the stores to which you want to grant access.
Note that you cannot deny permissions to store for a User
Group that is selected as Approver for orders made in this
store (see Setting Up an Order Approval Procedure for a
Store).
Back Office

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 423

User Groups
Same as store front Select this option if you want to grant the same permissions as
stores for the Storefront stores.
None Select this option if you want to block access to Back Office

stores.
All Stores Select this option if you want to grant access to all Back Office

stores.
Select Stores Select this option to grant permission to specific stores. When

this option is selected, the list of available stores is displayed.

Check the stores to which you want to grant access.

5.

Click OK. The store permission will be updated in the User Group Setup
page.

6.

If you want to modify the inherited permissions, proceed to define

permissions in the Permissions table.
The permissions are split into two sections: Storefront and Back Office.
The Storefront permissions are store-related, whereas most of the Back
Office permissions are general. There are two kinds of permissions:

Individual: refers to an individual item or action (for example,

Checkout Orders, See Reports, etc.)
Gross: refers to the totality of items or actions (for example, See All
Order Actions, See All Order Queues, etc.). Gross permissions can
contain exceptions.

For each Permission, select one of the following options:

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 424

User Groups

Option

Description

Allow

Select this radio button to grant the selected permission to

the User Group.

Deny

Select this radio button to deny the selected permission from

the User Group.

Inherit

If the User Group inherits permissions from another User

Group, all the permissions will be marked as inherited from
the parent User Group: the Inherit checkbox will be checked
and the Allow or Deny radio button will be selected and
disabled. If you want to modify the inherited selections, clear
the Inherit checkbox and select the Allow or Deny radio
button.

Inherited From

This field displays the name of the User Group from which the
permissions are inherited. This field is enabled only if the
Inherit checkbox is checked.

Chapter 8: Setting up Users and User Groups 425

User Groups
Add exception /
Remove exception

For gross permissions, referring to a totality of settings, it is

possible to define exceptions. For example, if the permission
is See All Products, you can define new permissions: See
All Products except products in Group 1.
Click the Add exception link to define exceptions for the
gross permissions. A pop-up window is displayed showing
the tree of stores and User Groups assigned to them.

Figure 356: uStore Back Office Permissions tabs

Add Exceptions

Browse
the tree, select the items that will be defined as exception
and click OK.
The exceptions will be added under the main Permission in
the Permissions tab:

Figure 357: uStore Back Office Permissions tabs

Added Exceptions

To remove the exception, click the Remove Exception link.

7.

Click Save or Save & Close.

Chapter

Making your Store Available

Online
Now that you created a store, set up its products and gave the relevant users
access permission, it is time to make the store available online.

To make the store available online:

1.

Click the

icon in the Views toolbar.

2.

Click Store Setup to the right of the relevant store.

The Store Setup page is displayed.

3.

Click Save & Place Online.

Back in the Store List page, the stores offline icon (
online icon (

) is replaced by an

Chapter

10

Handling Orders
When a customer orders a product using the Storefront application, the
ordered items are automatically added to the uStore production center (under
Orders view): the Print products are added to the Pending queue and the
Email products are added to the Pending Email queue. These queues are
shown on the Orders List page of the Orders view (as in Figure 358). The
Orders List display lists up to fifteen orders per page. You can select the
queue type you want to view, whether Print Queues, Email Queues or All
Queues, from the Queue list on the top left. You can also select the parameter
according to which the queues will be grouped in the Group By field.
If you want to search queues according to the Order number, enter the Order
number in the Order ID field and click the Filter ( ) icon.
To search for an order, select All Queues in the Queue list. Once selected, you
will see the list of all the ordered products and the queues to which they are
assigned.
Note: Orders are not processed as a whole, but at the product or item level.
Therefore, the default view displays the data by individual items. To view the
data of a specific queue grouped by order, choose Order ID from the Group
By list.

Clicking the Advanced Search link opens additional search filter fields where
you can search the queues that belong to the queue type selected in the Queue
field. In the Advanced Search, you can filter queues according to Product,
Order Item ID, Store Name, Customer Name and Date Range.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 428

Figure 358: Orders View: Orders List Page, Grouped by Aggregation

When a specific administrator logs in to the application, the Orders view is

automatically filtered according to that administrators permissions, and
shows only orders from stores the administrator has permission to access.
The administrator (usually the Store Operator, although this view can also be
accessed by users that are part of the Administrator and Superuser User
Groups) reviews the orders and prioritizes them. To do so, the administrator
considers the print priority given by the customer and the printers needs for
Print products (for example, the type of printer that is currently running) and
the scheduled sending time for Email products. See Mandatory Email
Product Properties. A pending item goes through several queues until it is
successfully completed. The transition between queues is performed by the
administrator, who selects the desired item(s), and either clicks the default
Action link in the item row or chooses a queue-specific action from the Action
drop-down list, and clicks Go.
This section provides detailed explanations on how to manage Print product
orders (see Managing Print Product Orders) and Email product orders (see
Managing Email Product Orders).

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 429

Managing Print Product Orders

Managing Print Product Orders

The following diagram illustrates the default item queues supported by
uStore for print product orders, and the actions that enable queue transitions.
Figure 359: Ordered Item Queues and Actions Print Product

First, the administrator extracts the items intended for processing from the
Pending queue, by selecting the Prepare action. This action moves the item to
the Ready to Produce queue, which effectively serves as a processing
candidate queue.
The administrator can also send selected items back to the Pending queue
using the Revert action. Note that when you revert grouped items
(aggregated items), the group of items is broken apart and each of the ordered
products is sent back to the Pending queue.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 430

Managing Print Product Orders

Optionally, merged recipient lists of aggregated items can be downloaded for

mail sorting.
a.

To do that, select an item in the Ready to Produce queue and click the
Download link in the Orders List page to download a *.csv file that
contains the proper merged recipient lists with customization values.

b.

You can sort the mailing list manually or by using any third party
software available. Make sure to maintain the *.csv file data scheme
when sorting the mailing list.

c.

When you are finished, click the Replace link in the Orders List page
to replace the existing mailing list with the one you created.

Next, the administrator chooses the items to be processed from Ready to

Produce queue and selects one of the Process actions. This action moves the
items to the Producing File in Progress queue. Successfully produced items are
automatically sent to the next queue based on the following conditions:

Items that do not have a prepress workflow are sent to the Ready for
Delivery queue.
Items that are associated with a prepress workflow are sent to the
Ready for Prepress queue.
After the prepress queues, items are sent to the Ready for Delivery
queue.

Print Queues
Following is a detailed explanation of the Print Queues:

Delayed Payment: this queue lists the orders that are still pending

approval by the clearing service. After the payment is cleared, the order
automatically moves to the Pending Prints queue for processing.
Administrators can approve or reject orders manually. Just like with
other e-commerce experiences, orders that use delayed clearing methods
are confirmed and an order confirmation message is sent to the customer
(if it was previously configured). De
Note: This feature is only available for clearing services supporting delayed
payments, such as MultiSafepay.

Pending Prints: this queue includes the following types of ordered items:

Items that have been received from the uStore Storefront application
and have not been processed yet via the uStore Back Office
application.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 431

Managing Print Product Orders

Items that were moved back to the beginning of the processing cycle
from the Ready to Produce, Ready for Prepress, Cancelled or Failed
Jobs queues.
To add a pending item to the list of items intended for processing, go
to the Action list and choose Prepare. You can also choose Cancel to
abort the production process of the item.

Pending Recipient List--Prints: this queue is relevant for documents whose

recipient list has been ordered using USAData services (see Allowing
Customers to Use USAData Services). The order items reside in this
queue until their recipient lists are ready and retrieved from USAData.

Aggregating: this optional queue enables you to select items that share the

same document and product properties selections and group them into a
single cluster (see Setting Up Document Repositories and Setting Up
Product Properties for Single Products). You can benefit from
aggregating items for production by:

Sorting your recipient lists and thus reducing mailing costs.

Making the production process more efficient by providing stacked
print jobs to the printing press.

Aggregating items is possible when all of the following conditions take

place:

The items are in the Pending queue.

The items are based on the same document (for example, have the
same design).
The items share the same property (or properties). Documents may
be assigned several properties that affect aggregation (as described in
Setting Up Document Repositories and Setting Up Product Properties
for Single Products). The properties and the value selected for each
property should be identical in all documents that are intended for
aggregation. Note, the algorithm that verifies aggregation is case
sensitive; for example, Paper Type is not equal to paper type.
Note: If you plan to group a number of products in a store, you should
create Global Pricing Properties (as in Setting Up Document Repositories) for
those products to avoid product mismatching properties.

To aggregate items in the Pending queue:

1.

Select Aggregation ability from the Group By list.

The view will now show the items grouped by their document and
product properties.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 432

Managing Print Product Orders

2.

Select items that share the same aggregation possibilities (i.e., items
under the same group).

3.

Select Aggregate from the Action list at the top of the page.

4.

Click Go.
The items you selected will move to the Aggregating queue under a new
aggregation group, as shown in Figure 360. You can group several
corresponding Print product items into one group.
Figure 360: Orders List, Grouped Items Page

Grouped items are automatically added to the list of items intended for
processing immediately after their recipient lists were merged (i.e., the
Ready to Produce queue).

Ready to Produce: serves as a queue for items intended for processing.

In this queue, you can select the following actions:

Process (1 Copy): sends dynamic documents to the uProduce server

for processing or opens static documents for printing.

Process (all copies): sends dynamic documents to the uProduce

server for processing or opens static documents for printing, but
when you select this queue, the output job consists of multiplications
of the content of the source document per number of copies. For
example, 100 copies of a single-page document will result in a 100page document.

Note:
For aggregated print jobs, you can only choose the Process (all copies)
action.
For Composite and Static documents, you can only choose the Process (1
copy) action.

Revert: This action sends selected items back to the Pending queue.

Note that when you revert grouped items (aggregated items), the

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 433

Managing Print Product Orders

group of items is broken apart and each of the ordered products is

sent back to the Pending queue.
Note: Moving an item to the Ready to Produce queue does not imply that
the document is actually going to be produced. The purpose of this queue is
to enable the administrator to narrow down the processing candidates by
filtering out items not relevant to the current processing task.

Producing File in Progress: includes items that are in the process of being

produced.

Successfully produced items are automatically sent to the next queue

based on the following conditions:

If a prepress workflow is associated with the product, it goes to the

Ready for Prepress queue.
If no prepress workflow is associated with the product, it goes to the
Ready for Delivery queue.

Items whose jobs failed or were deleted are sent automatically to the

Failed Jobs queue and a notification email is sent to the Superuser. The

email shows the OrderID, OrderProductID, error messages from

uProduce and a link to the Order Product Details page (Figure 370). In the
Order Product Details page, the user can move the item to the Pending
queue and retry the processing.
Note: The link to the Order Product Details page is displayed only if a
friendly URL has been configured for the store in the Store Setup
page>General tab>Enable Store Friendly-URL checkbox (see Enabling
Store-Friendly URL).

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 434

Managing Print Product Orders

You can also send items manually to the Ready for Delivery queue by
selecting Prepare for Delivery from the Action list.

Ready for Prepress: includes items that were associated with a prepress

workflow. From this queue, you can select the following actions:

Run: sends the item to its prepress workflow. Only items that are

associated with a prepress workflow can be run.

Important!
If the selected item is a Composite product that is made up of components
whose workflows were not merged to one Prepress Setup, then each
component will run according to its own workflow.
If you want all the Composite components to run using the same workflow,
in the Orders List, in the item row, select View list, and change each
components workflow.

Select Workflow: enables you to change the workflow defined for an

item. When you select this action, a dialog box with the workflows
that were defined for this item is displayed. You can select a different
workflow and run the job.

To see more workflows, click the Show all workflows link.

To toggle back to the list of predefined workflows, click Show
predefined workflows.

Figure 361: Select Workflow dialog box

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 435

Managing Print Product Orders

Note: For aggregated print jobs, you can select the workflow directly in the
Orders List page, in the Workflow name column. All aggregated print jobs
run using the same workflow.

Prepare for Delivery: skips the prepress stage and moves the item to
Ready for Delivery queue.

Prepress in Progress: includes items that are in the prepress stage. Items

will automatically move to the next queue when a complete notification is

received from the prepress workflow provider. Items that fail or items
that wait in this queue for longer than one hour are automatically moved
to the Failed Jobs queue.
Note: If the Auto-run to prepress production option was selected during
the products Prepress Setup, then the print job will run directly from the
Producing File in Progress queue to the Prepress in Progress queue.

Ready for Delivery: indicates that a product is ready to be delivered. Until

the order reaches this queue, it is managed per Product item, that is for
each Item ID there will be a different record in the Orders list. However,
from the moment the order reaches the Ready for Delivery queue, it is
managed per Shipping item. This is important for orders with split
shipping where the same product is shipped to different addresses. In
this case, the Orders List can display two records with the same Order ID
and Item ID but with different shipping parameters.

Figure 362: Managing Shipping Items in the Ready for Delivery Queue.

Note: In the All Queues list, the orders are displayed as they appear in the
Ready for Delivery queue, that is by Shipping item.

When viewing the Ready for Delivery queue, you can group the Shipping
items list by the their Delivery Ability. This way you can cluster Shipping
items by their delivery provider and addressee, provided that all
Shipping items are from the same store.
Select the Shipping items you want to deliver and then select Create New
Delivery from the Actions list and click Go.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 436

Managing Print Product Orders

The pop up window that is displayed contains options for delivery

depending on the delivery provider.
For Manual shipping, the following pop up window is displayed:
Figure 363: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (Manual Shipping)

The selected service in the Service list is the service the customer chose in
the order. You may change it by selecting a different service. Enter a
Shipping Date, a Tracking Number (if required) and click Delivery Now.
For FedEx shipping, the following pop up window is displayed:

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 437

Managing Print Product Orders
Figure 364: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (FedEx Shipping)

Fill in the following information:

Field

Description

Service

The selected service is the service the customer

chose in the order; you may change it to a different
service.

Drop Off Type

Drop off type.

Ship Date

Shipment schedule.

Residential Delivery

Selected by default if the customer address is a

residence.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 438

Managing Print Product Orders
Packages

Package: Estimation of the most suitable

package for this shipment. Change it if you are
about to ship the order in a different package.
Weight: Weight of the package.
Insurance: (Optional) Enter the insurance
premium for the shipment. The initial price is the
total price of the order.
Total Weight: Estimation of the total weight of
the package.
Add Package: (Optional) Click this link to add
more packages. A new row is displayed in the
Packages section, where you can enter the new
package details.

Get Shipping Rate

Click to get shipping rate from FedEx.

Use delivery provider

to generate label

Select this option to automatically receive the label

from FedEx.

I already have
tracking information

Select this option to manually enter the Tracking

Number you have already received from FedEx.

Deliver Now

If you chose FedEx as your delivery provider, click to

instruct FedEx to deliver the product. The product
order will move to the Delivering queue.

For UPS shipping, the following pop up window is displayed:

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 439

Managing Print Product Orders
Figure 365: Create New Delivery Pop up Window (UPS Shipping)

Fill in the following information:

Field

Description

Service

The selected service is the service the customer

chose in the order; you may change it to a different
service.

Pickup Type

Type of pickup (for example, Daily Pickup).

Delivery Confirmation Select if delivery confirmation is required.

Residential Delivery

Selected by default if the customer address is a

residence.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 440

Managing Print Product Orders
Saturday Delivery

Select this checkbox if you wish the package to be

delivered on Saturday. This delivery type is normally
used for time-critical shipments.

Packages

Estimation of the most suitable package for this

shipment. Change it if you are about to ship the
order in a different package.

Add Package

(Optional) Click this link to add more packages. A

new row is displayed in the Packages section,
where you can enter the new package details:

Figure 366: UPS: Add New Package

Get Shipping Rate

Click to get a shipping rate from UPS.

Deliver Now

If you chose UPS as your delivery provider, click to

instruct UPS to deliver the product. The product
order will move to the Delivering queue.

Delivering: indicates the fulfillment stage of the delivery.

If you chose an online carrier service, such as FedEx or UPS, a

fulfillment request is sent to the respective carrier. When the product
is delivered, the product order will move automatically to the
Delivered queue. You can also move the order manually to the
Delivered queue by selecting the product from the list, select Deliver
from the Actions menu and then click Go.
If you chose Manual Mailing or Manual Shipping, you are required to
manually move the product order to the Delivered queue. To do this,
select the product from the list, select Deliver from the Actions menu
and then click Go.

The product list in the Delivering queue is clustered by the delivery

service, store and address.

Delivered: indicates a product has been delivered. Note that when using

FedEx, this transition is automatic based on delivery confirmation that is

submitted by FedEx.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 441

Managing Email Product Orders

Archive: lists archived items. Archived items are items that has been
prepared and delivered to customers. To archive an item, select Archive
from the Actions menu and then click Go.

Managing Email Product Orders

The following diagram illustrates the default item queues supported by
uStore for Email product orders, and the actions that enable queue
transitions.
Figure 367: Ordered Item Queues and Actions Email Product

uStore Back Office includes the following default item queues:

Delayed Payment: this queue lists the orders that are still pending

approval by the clearing service. After the payment is cleared, the order
automatically moves to the Pending Emails queue for processing.
Note: This feature is only available for clearing services supporting delayed
payments, such as MultiSafepay.

Pending Emails: includes the following types of ordered items:

Items that been received from the uStore Storefront application and
have not been processed yet via the uStore Back Office application.
Items that were moved back to the beginning of the processing cycle
from the Failed Emails queue.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 442

Managing Email Product Orders

Items ordered in the uStore Storefront application are automatically

directed to the Pending Email queue when customers submit their
orders at the store.

Pending Recipient List- Emails this queue is relevant for Emails whose
recipient list has been ordered using USAData services (see Allowing
Customers to Use USAData Services). The order items reside in this
queue until their recipient lists are ready and retrieved from USAData.

Scheduled Order serves as a queue for items intended for processing.

The processing procedure consists of two steps:

First, extract the items intended for processing from the Pending
Email list, by selecting the Schedule Email action. This action moves
the item to the Scheduled Order queue, which effectively serves as a

processing candidate queue. You can also send selected items back
to the Pending queue using the Revert action. This step can be
repeated as many times as needed, until you are satisfied with the list
of items in the Scheduled Order queue.

Next, chooses the items to be processed from the Scheduled Order

queue and then chooses the Process action. This action moves the
items to the Email Send in Progress queue and sends dynamic email
documents for processing by either the uStore server or by the
uProduce server.
Note: The state transition from Producing file in Progress to Ready for
Delivery will occur automatically after ten minutes, if you have not selected
Completed in the Actions list.
Note: Moving an item to the Scheduled Order queue does not imply that the
document is actually being produced. The purpose of this queue is to enable
the administrator to narrow down the processing candidates by filtering
out items not relevant to the current processing task.

Email Send in Progress includes items that are in the process of being

produced and sent to recipients.

Successfully produced items are sent automatically to the Sent Emails

queue. Items whose jobs failed or deleted are sent automatically to the
Failed Emails queue and a notification email is sent to the Superuser. The
email shows the OrderID, OrderProductID, error messages from
uProduce and a link to the Order Product Details page (Figure 370). In the
Order Product Details page, the user can move the item to the Pending
queue and retry the processing.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 443

Viewing Order Information

Note: The link to the Order Product Details page is displayed only if a
friendly URL has been configured for the store in the Store Setup page
>General tab > Enable Store Friendly-URL checkbox (see Enabling StoreFriendly URL).

Archive: lists items that were prepared and sent to recipients. To archive
an item, select Archive from the Actions menu and then click Go.

Viewing Order Information

To view detailed information about the order, click the link in the Order ID
column. The Order Details page is displayed:
Figure 368: Order Details

This page displays the following order information:

Store name: the name of the store from which the order was made.
Customer name: the name of the customer that made this order.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 444

Viewing Order Information
Submission Date: the date when the order was submitted.
Payment indicates the available out-of-the-box payment method chosen by

the customer (Invoice, Credit Card, Cost Center, Purchase Order) or any
payment method that is activated in the Clearing Model list page (Presets
>Clearing Model Setup) and enabled in the relevant store (Store Setup
>Clearing tab).

Total price: indicates the total order price.

Order Items: this table lists all ordered products. For each product, there is a
Thumbnail, ID, Product Name, No of Units and Details. Clicking the Details link
opens the Orders List page (see Viewing Ordered Items Information).
Delivery Details: this table lists the Delivery Addresses specified for this order.
In case of a split shipping, there may be several delivery addresses for one
order.

Delivery: indicates the Delivery Service applied for this order (this
parameter is defined in Store Setup>Delivery Services)
Address: the address to which the order will be delivered (defined in
Store Setup>Delivery Settings>Pickup Address)

ID: product ID

Product Name: the name of the ordered product

No. of units: number of ordered units. Units can refer to single units
or packs (see Stores>Product Pricing Setup>Set Price Steps)
Status: queue status for the given ordered item.
Tracking: tracking information, such as delivery provider, delivery
service, delivery price, shipment tracking number and package
tracking number.

Note: If FedEx is your delivery provider and the package tracking number
was manually entered in the Create New Delivery window, this number
will appear as N/A.
Show receipt: you can view the customers receipt by clicking Show receipt (at
the top of the page). Figure 369 shows an example of a customer receipt.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 445

Viewing Order Information
Figure 369: Customer Receipt

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 446

Viewing Ordered Items Information

Viewing Ordered Items Information

To view detailed information of the ordered product, click the Details link
shown on the Orders Details page (Figure 368).
The Orders List page provides a detailed report of an ordered item.
Figure 370: Ordered Item Details

This page displays the following order information:

Order ID the unique identifier of the order in which this item is included.
You can instantly find a specific order by searching for its exact Order ID.
Payment Method: indicates the payment method chosen by the customer:
Invoice or Credit Card.
Action: enables you to change the order queue. For information on available
order queues, refer to Figure 359 and the explanations that follow.

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 447

Viewing Ordered Items Information
Order Item ID: each Order ID may contain multiple items (i.e., ordered

products). Therefore, each instance of the ordered product receives a unique

identifier.

Product Name: name of the product.

Description: detailed description of the product.
Prepress Workflow: displays the prepress workflow setup selected for the
ordered item as follows:

[WorkflowName]: the name of a prepress workflow appears when a

prepress workflow was defined for the item.

Not selected: when prepress workflow was set up for the item, but a
default workflow was not selected.

N/A: when the prepress workflow was not set up for the item.

Note: When you open the Order Details page from the Ready for Prepress
queue, Not selected and [WorkflowName] are links that open the Select
Workflow dialog box (Figure 361) and enable you to select a new prepress
workflow or change the default selection.
Product Property List: displays the product properties that were defined for

the ordered product and their values (i.e., customer selections). For more
details on Product Properties definition, refer to Setting Up Product
Properties for Single Products.

Composite Components List (Composite Products only): displays a list of all

the components of the Composite Product and its properties.

Note: When you view the Order Details page in the Ready for Prepress
queue, you can click the Prepress Workflow link to select a new prepress
workflow or change the selected workflow.
Proofing List: provides information about the Product Proof (Proof time, Job
ID and Proof status). Clicking the Show Proof link displays the document
image in a separate window. The Show Proof link is not available for
composite products
Add Annotation you can add an annotation to the Details page of any order,
product or product queue transition. uStore saves a history of all annotations,
allowing you to keep track of this information.

uStore also enables you to take advantage of the annotation capability to

obtain valuable information on noteworthy product queue transitions. For
example, this may include the transition from the Pending queue to Cancelled
queue. You can do this by defining such annotations as mandatory for
performing the queue transition. These mandatory queue transition

Chapter 10: Handling Orders 448

Viewing Ordered Items Information

annotations are defined in the Order Handling Action Table, which is

included in the Presets views System Setup tool. See System Setup:
Customizing uStore Tables.
Show Order Receipt: you can view the customers receipt by clicking Show
Order Receipt (at the top of the page). Figure 369 shows an example of a

customer receipt.

Download Job Ticket: you can download the Order Job Ticket as a Word

document (Job ticket - item ID-<Order Item ID>.doc). This document contains a

General Comments field where you can add your comments.

To customize the Job Ticket template, go to Presets >System Setup >Message
Template and edit the Create Printed Job ticket on new Order Creation template

(Setting Up the Message Template Table).

Print (
): you can print the Orders Job Ticket in order to attach it to the
Order. To customize the Job Ticket template, go to Presets >System Setup
>Message Template and edit the Create Printed Job ticket on new Order
Creation template (Setting Up the Message Template Table).

Note: The information in the downloaded or printed Job Ticket document

represents the Job status at the time of download/print operation. For
example, the Order Status may change during the job processing.

Superusers can differentiate between store administrators by presenting

filtered Queue and/or Action menus in the Orders page to support the
business workflow. This is done by setting the corresponding User Group
permissions: See All Order Queues and See All Order Actions (see Assigning
Permissions to the User Group).

In addition, Superuser can prevent Back Office users from performing actions
that exceed their area of responsibility by simply removing the relevant
Action / Queue menu items. Similarly, the superuser can add Actions and/or
Queues to the default workflow and assign them to different store operators.
For more information on adding or removing Queues and Actions, see
Setting Up the Order Handling Status Table and Setting Up the Order
Handling Action Table.

Chapter

11

Generating Reports
The
view allows you to monitor and audit the users activity in
your uStore system.

Predefined Reports
uStore Back Office application includes a selection of predefined reports that
provide a basic overview of the uStore system and address common
reporting needs, such as:

Customer Totals

Daily Orders

Order Totals

Job IDs

Offline Billing

Customer Opt-In Status

Order Profit Margins

Inventory Levels

To generate a predefined report, simply select the desired item from the
Report drop-down list and click Generate. The report results are displayed on
your screen and you can export the report to Microsoft Excel by clicking
Download.
You can add graphs, charts, pivot tables etc. to the report and save as an Excel
template to the folder
\\[servername]\uStoreShared\ReportTemplates\[ReportID].xlsx. (For
information on the Report ID see Setting Up the Report Table.) Use the range
name RawDataRange as your data source.

Chapter 11: Generating Reports 450

Predefined Reports

Figure 371 shows a sample report, Customer Totals, summarizing the total
billing per customer.
Figure 371: Example Report: Customer Totals

The uStore Back Office application also includes an enhanced selection of

predefined reports, which can be easily refined to focus on particular data of
interest. The reports are refined using one or both of the following tools: a
report filter and report parameters.
Report filters are various SQL queries that were specifically defined to filter a
particular report. If a report has filters, each filter returns a different set of
records from the database; therefore you must select the relevant filter in
order to run the report. For example: The Order Totals report is generated
using one of the following filters: Last Week, Last Month or Last 2
Months. To apply a filter to a report queue, click the arrow next to the
required column header ( ) and select the filter from the displayed list.
Some filters allow you to further pinpoint the desired results by specifying a
value or a text string of one or more required fields in the records returned
from the database. For example, the Contains filter allows you to enter a
text string to look for in the listed records.
Report parameters give you the option to further pinpoint the desired results
by specifying the value of one or more required fields in the records returned
from the database. For example, the Order Totals report allows you to
choose a specific Store ID and/or Customer ID as your report
parameters.

Chapter 11: Generating Reports 451

Defining your Own Reports Using SQL
Figure 372: Filtered and Parameterized Report: Order Totals, Example

You can sort any column in the resulted record list in ascending or
descending orders by clicking the required column header. Clicking it once
will sort the list in ascending order; clicking it again will sort it in descending
order.

Defining your Own Reports Using SQL

Advanced users can use this generic report system as a front end for running
highly flexible, customized reports that address their unique needs. For
example, you may wish to generate a report that lists the top ten popular
products or the top ten most active customers, and so forth.
New reports are defined by creating customer-specific SQL queries. For more
information on defining your reports using SQL, see Setting Up the Report
Table.

Appendix

Input Controls
When editing a Dial, you are required to select its Input Control, which is the
type of input required from the customer (see Figure 309 Dial Details Page).
The Input Control options include:

Text Input: a standard, single line text box that enables the customer to
enter short, free text input value.

Multiline Text Input: similar to the Text Input Control, but enables the
customer to enter several lines of text input.

Radio Button: enables the customer to choose the Dial value from a list of
options that were defined by the uStore Administrator during the
customization setup process. This Input Control displays the choice list to
the user as a set of standard radio-style inputs.

Dropdown List: similar to the Radio Box List, but displays the choice list to

Image Selector: suitable for Graphic ADOR Dials, the Image Selector
displays the list of images the customer can choose from inside the
customization steps page, alongside other Dials Input Controls. The
user can choose one of the images displayed on the list, effectively setting
the Dials value to be the name of the chosen image.

Popup Image Selector: similar to the Image Selector, but the Popup Image
Selector displays the list of selectable images in a popup-window, thus
making this control more suitable for Asset Sources containing more
images than can be conveniently contained inside the regular
Customization Steps page.

Extended Image Selector: in addition to capabilities offered by the Image

the user as a standard dropdown control.

Selector and the Popup Image Selector (selecting or uploading images),

this Input Control allows customers to edit the uploaded images. The
store administrator can select one of the two available display modes in
the Display Mode field: Slider View (for less than 16 images) and Library
(grid) View (for more than 16 images).

Appendix A: Input Controls 453

Gallery Image Selector: in addition to capabilities offered by the other

Date Time Picker: enables customers to specify a date attribute for an

Image Selectors (such as, selecting, uploading or cropping images), this

Input Control offers customers enhanced editing capabilities. For
example, the customers can adjust brightness and contrast, flip and rotate
images and control the image opacity.

order. You can set the date picker to function as a Popup (opens when
clicked on) or as Inline (always visible). You can also set the date picker
to a predefined period of time by using the Earliest and Latest date
options. Use the Earliest and Latest date options to set exact dates or dates
relative to an Order date (for example: X days after an order has been
made).
Generic: enables you to embed personalized HTML in uStore (in the
Markup field) that will be rendered in real-time as the contents of the dial

control. For example, you can embed a flash object or a Web page. When
you embed a flash object, make sure you fill in its Client ID in the Object
ID field.
You can use the following parameters in the markup code:

#DIAL_VALUE#: will be replaced with the value of the dial as saved

in the database.
#DIAL_DISPLAY_NAME#: will be replaced with the name of the
dial as set in Display Name field. See Figure 223.

You can also define a Java Script Callback Function in the Callback
Function field, which will be available on the page, and call it to return a
value to uStore.

Get Order Properties: when selected, allows you to add the Order ID or
the Order Item ID values, which are generated automatically, to your
product. This way, an order or an order item can be easily distinguished
with an ID number.

Checkbox: enables you to add a checkbox as a product property. You can

set the value that the dial/property is given when that checkbox is
selected (Value when Checked) or unselected (Value when Unchecked). You
can also define this checkbox as mandatory by selecting the Customer
Must Check checkbox. This way, customers will not be able to continue
shopping unless this checkbox is selected. For example, you can add a
EULA statement as a product property and ask customers to accept it in
order to continue the shopping process.

Gallery List View: enables the customer to choose a value from a list of
predefined options. This Input Control displays the choices to the user as

Appendix A: Input Controls 454

a list of icons, with names and description and can also include an
overlay image.

Gallery Grid View: enables the customer to choose a value from predefined
options. This Input Control displays the choices to the user as a grid of
icons, with name and description and can also include an overlay image.

The available Input Control options depend on the type of Dial you are
editing. Table 7 lists the different Dial types and their input control options.
Table 7: Input Control Options per Dial Type
Dial Type
(ADOR Objects)

Input Control

Dial Type
(Variables)

Input Control

Radio Button List

Dropdown List
Text Input
Multiline Text Input
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Text Input
Date Variable
Multiline Text Input
Radio Button List
Dropdown List
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Text Input
Generic HTML
Radio Button List
Dropdown List
DateTime Picker
Generic HTML
Gallery List/Grid View

Text Input
Number Variable
Multiline Text Input
Radio Button List
Dropdown List
Get Order Properties
Generic HTML
Checkbox
DateTime Picker
Gallery List/Grid View

Text Input
Multiline Text Input
Radio Button List
Dropdown List
Get Order Properties
Image Selector
Popup Image Selector
Extended Image Selector
Gallery Image Selector
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Graphic ADOR

Image Selector
Popup Selector
Extended Image
Selector
Gallery Image
Selector
Generic HTML

Link ADOR

Text ADOR

Boolean Variable

Appendix A: Input Controls 455

Dial Type
(ADOR Objects)

Input Control

Dial Type
(Variables)

Input Control

Text File ADOR

Radio Button List

Text Variable
Dropdown List
Gallery List/Grid View

Text Input
Multiline Text Input
Radio Button List
Image Selector
Popup Image Selector
Extended Image Selector
Gallery Image Selector
Dropdown List
Get Order Properties
DateTime Picker
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Visibility ADOR

Radio Button List

Dropdown List
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Style ADOR

Text Input
Multiline Text Input
Radio Button List
Dropdown List
Generic HTML
Checkbox
Gallery List/Grid View

Appendix A: Input Controls 456

Appendix

Setting Up the uStore Messaging

Mechanism
Note: This chapter assumes familiarity with the SQL, XML and XSL
languages.

uStore Back Office allows superusers and store administrators to create

events that trigger a predefined set of actions. There are four types of events,
as follows:

When a user is created in the Back Office application.

When a customer is registering.

When an order queue is changed.

When a customer is submitting an order at the store.

The event dispatches the messaging mechanism to generate and consequently

send an email message in the following order:
1.

All the messages that are associated with a specific event are gathered to
be generated.

2.

All the SQL queries that are attached to the message template are run on
uStore database using predefined parameters that uStore provides. Each
of the queries generates a single record set.

3.

The record sets are formatted into XML.

4.

The XML is transformed to form the message subject and body, using the
XSLs that are attached to the template.

5.

The email is sent to all recipients specified in the messaging rule.

For further information of triggers setup in uStore Presets, refer to Setting Up

Triggers.

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 458

Creating a New Message Template

Creating a New Message Template

To create a new message template:
1.

Click the Presets

button. The Presets main page is displayed.

2.

Click the System Setup link. The System Setup main page is displayed.

3.

Click the Edit link next to Message Template. The Message Template page
is displayed.

4.

Click the Add New link. The Message Template: New Message Template
page is displayed (see Figure 115).

5.

Fill the following fields:

Field

Description

Name

Name of the email message template that appears in the

Select Email Template list of the Trigger Setup, New/Edit
Trigger page. See Figure 144.

Sender Address

Email address, to which customers will be able to reply

upon delivery of the email message.

Sender Display Name

Name of the sender visible to customers in the email

message header.

Event Point

Event corresponding to this email template. Events that

trigger actions can be selected in the Trigger Setup, New/
Edit Trigger page, as in Figure 144.
For a list of available event points, refer to the following
table.

Example Message

Enter an example text of the resulting message.

Available event points are as follows:

Event

Occurs when...

Order State Transition

Order queue has been changed. For more details, see

Handling Orders.

Order Submission in
Customer Application

Customer has submitted an order at the store.

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 459

Creating a New Message Template SQL
Event

Occurs when...

User Creation in Admin

Application

User has been created. For more details, see Setting up

Users and User Groups.

User Registration

Customer has performed registration. For further

details, see page 187.

Creating a New Message Template SQL

The SQL queries are used to retrieve data for the message.

To create a new message template SQL:

1.

Click the Presets

button. The Presets main page is displayed.

2.

Click the System Setup link. The System Setup main page is displayed.

3.

Click the Edit link next to Message Template SQL. The Message Template
SQL page is displayed.

4.

Click the Add New link. The Message Template SQL New Message
Template SQL page is displayed (see Figure 117).

5.

Fill the following fields:

Field

Description

Message Template Id

ID number of the message template with which this SQL

is associated.

SQL Text

SQL statement. The SQL may use parameters as specified

in the following table.

Name

A unique name for the record set that will be fetched

SQL Examples
exec ('SELECT FirstName, LastName FROM Users WHERE Users.UserID
= ' + @UserId)

exec('SELECT Store.[Name] as StoreName, LandingDomain,

LandingFolder FROM Store WHERE StoreId = ' + @StoreId)

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 460

Creating a New Message Template SQL

exec('SELECT EncryptedOrderId FROM Orders WHERE OrderId = ' +

@OrderId)
Note: Other SQL statements samples can be previewed in the uStore Back
Office Application. Go to uStore Presets>System Setup>Message
Template SQL and click the View link.

The parameters that are passed to the SQL statement by event points are:
Event Type

Event

Parameters

User Life Cycle Events

Customer Login

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

Customer Registration

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

Customer Pending
Registration

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

Password Recovery

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

User Creation in Admin

Application

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

User Details Update In

Admin Application

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

User Details Update in

Storefront

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId

Delivery Creation

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@UserId
@DeliveryId

Order Life Cycle Events

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 461

Creating a New Message Template SQL
Event Type

Order Approval Process

Events

Event

Parameters

Order Product Enters

Shopping Cart

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@UserId
@OrderProductId

Order State Transition

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderProductId,
@FromState
@Tostate

Order Submission in
Customer Application

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId
@ApproverUserId (if
applicable)

Reorder

@StoreId
@CultureId
@ OrderProductId
@OldOrderProductId

Approver Change Notification to New

Approver

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@ApproverUserId (of new
approver)

Approver Change Notification to Old

Approver

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@ApproverUserId (of old
approver)

Order Approved

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@ApproverUserId

Order Rejection

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@RejecterUserId

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 462

Creating a New Message Template SQL
Event Type

Inventory Events

Other Events

Event

Parameters

Order Sent To Approval

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@UserId
@ApproverUserId (if
specific approver was
selected)

Unassign Group from

Approval Process

@StoreId
@CultureId
@UserId
@ApproverUserId
@ApproveeGroupId

Inventory Level Is Low

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@ProductId
@OrderProductId

Inventory Changed

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@ProductId
@OrderProductId

Order Item Job Ticket on @StoreId

@CultureId
New Order Creation
@OrderId
@UserId
@OrderProductId
Redirect Clearing Failed

@StoreId
@CultureId
@OrderId
@UserId

USADATA Clearing Failed @StoreId

@CultureId
@OrderId

The SQL queries you create will be formatted by uStore into XML that, in
turn, will be transformed into the email message subject and body using
XSLs.
The SQL is formatted as follows:
<sqls>

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 463

Creating a New Message Template SQL
<RecordSetName>
<Row>
<FieldName>value</FieldName>
</Row>
</RecordSetName>
</sqls>

Where:

RecordSetName is the name of the message template SQL (the number of

RecordSetName nodes are identical to the number of message template

SQLs).

Row encapsulates all fields of one record (the number of Row nodes is

FieldName is the name of the field that the SQL fetches (number of
FieldName nodes is identical to the number of all fields that are declared

identical to the number of records that the SQL query returned)

in the SQL)

value is the value of this field.

Sample of the XML Data Retrieved from Database

<Sqls>
<CustomerName>
<Row>
<FirstName>d</FirstName>
<LastName>d</LastName>
</Row>
</CustomerName>
<StoreName>
<Row>
<StoreName>MyStore</StoreName>
<LandingDomain>www.xmpie.com</LandingDomain>
<LandingFolder>MyStore</LandingFolder>
</Row>
</StoreName>
<Order>

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 464

Adding Localized Message Template
<Row>
<EncryptedOrderId>82104</EncryptedOrderId>
</Row>
</Order>
</Sqls>

Adding Localized Message Template

To edit the localized text for a message template:
You can localize a message template using one of the two ways described
below:

Localizing a Message Template Using the

Localization Option in the Presets View
You can localize a message template using the Localization option in the
Presets view only after you have added a language to uStore. It is then
possible to edit the Message Template table using the newly added language.
To localize the Message Template table, go to Presets > Localization and click
the Edit button

next to a language in the Localization Table, Localization>

Culture List page (see Figure 78).

The Culture Sections, Table List page for the selected language, is displayed:

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 465

Adding Localized Message Template
Figure 373: Culture Sections, Table List Page

The Culture Sections, Table List page lists all available system tables of the
uStore system that can be localized.
To localize the Message Template table, click the Email Template link. The
Localization page for the Message Template table is displayed.

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 466

Adding Localized Message Template
Figure 374: Culture Edit Page, Message Template Table

Click a column header to sort

search results Click a column header to
sort search results

Enter localized
text here

Use filters to narrow

down search results

For more information on the options available in the Culture Edit page, such
as using filters and sorting columns, refer to Localizing System Tables.
To localize text in the Message Template table, click the Edit More link next
to the text you want to localize and edit as necessary.

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 467

Adding Localized Message Template
Figure 375: Email Template Table, Culture Edit Page: Edit More Option

The Email Template Localization Edit page includes the following fields:
Field

Description

Name, Description

Enter a name and a description for the message template in

the local language.

Message Body

XSL for the e-mail body in the local language.

Message Subject

XSL for the e-mail subject in the local language.

The XSLs should collaborate with the XML that is formatted from the SQL
queries. Hence, each transformations path should appear as: //Sqls/
RecordSetNameName/Row/FieldName, where:

RecordSetNameName is the name of the message template SQL.

FieldName is the field (column) that was returned by the SQL.

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 468

Adding Localized Message Template

Localizing a Message Template Using System Setup

Option in the Presets View
Except for using the Localization option in the Presets window, you can also
use the System Setup option to localize a Message Template.

To localize a Message Template using the System Setup option in

the Presets view:
1.

In the Message Template main page, click the

(View) button or the
(Edit) button next to the message template whose localized text you want
to set.
The Message Template Edit/View page is displayed.

2.

Click the Edit Localized Text link located at the top right side of the page.
The Message Template Localization page is displayed.

3.

Click the Add New link to add localization for each language the stores are
using.
The Message Template Localization page for the selected message
template is displayed.
Figure 376: Message Template Localization, Edit Page for a Selected Message
Template

The Message Template Localization Edit page includes the following fields
and selections:

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 469

Creating a New Message Rule

Field

Description

Culture

Selected Language for uStore.

Name, Description

Enter a name and a description for the message template in

the local language.

Message Body

XSL for the e-mail body in the local language.

Message Subject

XSL for the e-mail subject in the local language.

The XSLs should collaborate with the XML that is formatted from the SQL
queries. Hence, each transformations xpath should look like: //Sqls/
RecordSetNameName/Row/FieldName, where:

RecordSetNameName is the name of the message template SQL.

FieldName is the field (column) that was returned by the SQL.

Note: XSL Samples can be previewed in the Back Office Application. Go to:
[Presets] > [System Setup] > [Message Template] > [View] > [Edit
Localized text] > [View].

Creating a New Message Rule

To create a new message rule:
1.

Click the Presets

button. The Presets main page is displayed.

2.

Click the Triggers Setup link. The Triggers Setup main page is displayed.

3.

Click the New link. The Triggers Setup: New Trigger page is displayed.
In addition to basic properties (such as Rule Name and Rule Description),
the Edit Rule Settings page includes the following:
Event allows you to select from four available events:

User Creation in Admin Application a user has been created

(for further details, see Setting up Users and User Groups)

User Registration a customer has performed registration (for further

details, Enabling Registration)
Order Queue Transition an order queue has been changed (for

further details, see Handling Orders)

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 470

Configuring the Email Server

Order Submission in Customer Application a customer has submitted

an order at the store

Filter allows you to define a filter for an event to narrow down triggered
actions. The Filter list is dynamic and depends on the event you select. By
default, all filters share the same properties, i.e., allowing you to filter
down events by stores, whether all stores or specific stores. However, the
Order Queue Transition event includes further refining options, that is,
allowing you to select the queue origin and the queue target that triggers
an action.
Actions to Perform to configure mail sending, select Send Mail.
Select Email Recipients you can select between predefined email
recipients or you can enter new email addresses in the Other field. It is

also possible to enter a number of email addresses separated with

semicolons ;.

Select Email Template this list is dynamic and depends on your event
selection. Each event is assigned with the proper email template that
defines the appearance and message body of the sent email.

Configuring the Email Server

To configure the email server:
1.

Click the Presets

button. The Presets main page is displayed.

2.

Click the System Setup link. The System Setup main page is displayed.

3.

Click the Edit link next to MALL. The MALL page is displayed.

4.

Click the
(Edit) button next to the mall table entry. The MALL Table:
Edit page is displayed (see Figure 93).
Fill the following fields

Field

Description

SMTP Server,
SMTP Port,
SMTP User,
SMTP Password

The details of the server used for sending email messages

from uStore:
Email server (required)
Port (Default: 25)
User
Password

Appendix B: Setting Up the uStore Messaging Mechanism 471

Testing the Message Rule

Testing the Message Rule

Test your new message rule.
If you do not get any mail, check the ErrorLog table for errors in the uStore
database, ErrorText column.

Appendix

Managing the Order Lists View

Note: This chapter assumes familiarity with XML.

The order list grid view is controlled by XML code. Each of the order list
queues has its own grid view. The grid can show two kinds of tables:
Aggregation groups and order Items. The grid can also show all aggregation
groups and the order items that are aggregated in an aggregation group (in
the master and the detail tables).
The XML code is formatted as follows:
<GridView>
<Master dataTable="[JobGroup|OrderProduct]">
<Fields>
<Field fieldType="Field" displayName="Group Name"
columnName="GroupName" [substringLength="30"]/>
...
<Field fieldType="Link" displayName="Process"
actionID="4" actOnJobGroup="True"
actOnAggregatedJobGroup="True" actOnOrderProduct="True"
actOnNonAggregatedOrderProduct="True"/>
...
</Fields>
<GroupBys>
<GroupBy displayName="Aggregation">
<Fields>
<Field displayName="Group"
columnName="AggregationCriteria"/>
...
</Fields>
</GroupBy>

Appendix C: Managing the Order Lists View 473

<Master> Node
...
</GroupBys>
</Master>
[
<Details dataTable="OrderProduct">
<Fields>
<Field fieldType="Field" displayName="Order ID"
columnName="EncryptedOrderID" />
...
<Field fieldType="Link" displayName="Details"
actionID="15" actOnOrderProduct="True"
actOnNonAggregatedOrderProduct="True"
actOnAggregatedOrderProduct="True"/>
</Fields>
</Details>
]
</GridView>

<Master> Node
The <Master> Node defines the master table. The content of the master table
can be either JobGroup (aggregation groups) or OrderProduct (order
items).

<Fields> Node
The <Fields> node encapsulates the definitions of all fields.

<Field> Node
The <Field> node defines a field that will show in the grid.
The following table shows the available <Field> node attributes:
Field

Description

fieldType

Field: display as field.

Link: display as action link.

Appendix C: Managing the Order Lists View 474

<Master> Node
displayName

Caption of the field or link.

The following table shows attributes that apply only to fields where
fieldType equals Field:
Attribute

Description

columnName

For the jobGroup table, the available fields are

returned from the stored procedure
JobGroup_List.
For the OrderProduct table the available fields
are returned from Order_Report.

substringLength

(optional) Cuts the text to number of

characters and puts ... at the end. The full
text will be displays as a tool tip.

The following table shows attributes that apply only to fields where
fieldType equals Link:
Attribute

Description

actionID

Action ID (from
OrderHandlingAction table).

actOnOrderProduct

Link permitted to show in order

item rows.

actOnAggregatedOrderProduct

Link displayed in aggregated order

item rows.

actOnNonAggregatedOrderProduct

Link displayed in non aggregated

order item rows.

actOnJobGroup

Link permitted to show in job group

rows.

actOnAggregatedJobGroup

Link displayed in aggregated job

group rows.

actOnNonAggregatedJobGroup

Link displayed in non aggregated

job group rows.

Appendix C: Managing the Order Lists View 475

<Details> Node

<GroupBys> Node
The <GroupBys> node encapsulates all the <GroupBy> definitions.

<GroupBy> Node
The <GroupBy> node defines a group by fields (can be defined only in
<Master> node).
The following table shows the <GroupBy> node attributes:
Attribute

Description

displayName

Displays the name of the group by

in a group by dropdown.

<Field> Node
The <Field> node, located under the <GroupBy> node, defines a field in the
group by criteria.
The following table shows the <Field> node attributes:
Attribute

Description

displayName

Caption of the field.

columnName

Name of the column in the

database.

<Details> Node
The <Details> node defines a second level of hierarchy below the Master
hierarchy. When defining a Details hierarchy, the Master hierarchy
dataTable attribute must be set to JobGroup and the Details hierarchy
dataTable attribute must be set to OrderProduct.

Appendix

Requesting and Installing an SSL

Certificate
SSL Certificate Types
A standard SSL certificate is tied to one unique domain name (for example:
www.mycompanyA.com).
A Multi Domain SSL Certificate is a certificate that may be tied to multiple
unique domain names (for example: www. companyA.com and
www.mycompanyB.com).

When do I need a Multi Domain SSL Certificate?

A Multi Domain SSL certificate is needed when operating several online
stores with friendly URLs that contain unique domain names (for example:
www. companyA.com and www. companyB.com).
In the following cases you can use a regular SSL certificate:

When all the online stores share the same domain name and are
differentiated by a sub-folder name (for example: www.
companyA.com/store1 and www.companyA.com/store2)

When all the online stores have the same second level domain name and
are differentiated by sub-domains (for example: abc.company.com,
xyz.company.com), you may use a wildcard SSL certificate.

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

This section describes the following two procedures:

How to create and install the SSL Certificate on a single server

How to create and install the SSL Certificate on multiple servers (in the
uStore Cluster configuration)

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 477

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

Note: uStore Cluster is a web farm configuration allowing linking several

uStore servers into a cluster. For more information, see uStore Cluster
Configuration section in the uStore Installation Guide.

To create and install the SSL Certificate on a Single Server:

1.

Create Certificate Signing Request, see Creating Certificate Signing

Request (CSR).

2.

Install the SSL Certificate, see Installing an SSL Certificate.

3.

Bind the SSL Certificate, see Binding the Certificate to a Specific Port and
Protocol.

To create and install the SSL Certificate on uStore Cluster

configuration:
1.

Create Certificate Signing Request, see Installing a Shared SSL Certificate

in a uStore Cluster.

2.

Install the SSL Certificate on the primary server, see Installing a Shared
SSL Certificate in a uStore Cluster.

3.

Binding the SSL Certificate to the primary server, see Binding the
Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol.

4.

Export certificate with a private key from the primary server, see
Exporting a Certificate with the Private Key.

5.

Import the certificate to other servers in the uStore Cluster, see Importing
a Certificate.

6.

Binding the SSL Certificate to other servers in the uStore Cluster, see
Binding the Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol.

Windows Server 2008

Starting IIS Manager for IIS 7.0
You must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group on the local
computer to perform the following procedures.
Note: On Windows Server 2008, if User Account Control (UAC) is enabled, it
might display a message when you try to access IIS Manager. If so, click
Continue.

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 478

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

Creating Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

A Certificate Signing Request file is required in the process of purchasing an
SSL certificate. Request an Internet server certificate when you must prove
the identity of your Web server to clients who request content that resides on
the server. Internet server certificates are issued by public certification
authorities (CA).

To request an Internet server certificate

1.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click
Run.

2.

In the Open box, type inetmgr and then click OK.

3.

On the left pane, navigate to the <Server Name>.

4.

In Features View, double-click Server Certificates.

5.

In the Actions pane, click Create Certificate Request.

6.

On the Distinguished Name Properties page of the Request Certificate

Wizard, type the following information, and then click Next.

In the Common name text box, type a name for the certificate.
In the Organization text box, type the name of the organization in
which the certificate will be used.
In the Organizational unit text box, type the name of the
organizational unit in the organization in which the certificate will be
used.
In the City/locality text box, type the unabbreviated name of the city
or locality where your organization or organizational unit is located.
In the State/province text box, type the unabbreviated name of the
state or province where your organization or organizational unit is
located.
In the Country/region text box, type the name of the country or region
where your organization or organizational unit is located.

7.

On the Cryptographic Service Provider Properties page, select either

Microsoft RSA SChannel Cryptographic Provider or Microsoft DH SChannel
Cryptographic Provider from the Cryptographic service provider dropdown list. By default, IIS 7 uses the Microsoft RSA SChannel
Cryptographic Provider.

8.

In the Bit length drop-down list, select a bit length that can be used by the
provider. By default, the RSA SChannel provider uses a bit length of

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 479

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

2048. The DH SChannel provider uses a bit length of 512. A longer bit
length is more secure, but it can affect performance.
9.

Click Next.

10. On the File Name page, type a file name in the Specify a file name for the
certificate request text box, or click the browse button () to locate a file,
and then click Finish.
11. Send the certificate request to a public CA.

Installing an SSL Certificate

When you receive a response from a public certification authority (CA) to
whom you sent a certificate request, you must complete the process by
installing the server certificate on your Web server.
Note: You can install the server certificate only on the computer from which
you sent the certificate request.

To install an Internet certificate:

1.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click
Run.

2.

In the Open box, type inetmgr and then click OK.

3.

On the left pane, navigate to the <Server Name>.

4.

In Features View, double-click Server Certificates.

5.

In the Actions pane, click Complete Certificate Request.

6.

On the Complete Certificate Request page, in the File name that contains
the certification authority's response text box, type the path of the file that
contains the response from the CA, or click the Browse button () to
search for the file.

7.

Type a friendly name for the certificate in the Friendly name text box, and
then click OK.

After the completion of the Certificate Request, you need to bind the
certificated to the Default Web Site.

Binding the Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol

1.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click
Run.

2.

In the Open box, type inetmgr and then click OK.

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 480

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

3.

On the left pane, navigate to <Server Name> ' Sites and select the Default
Web Site.

4.

In the Actions pane, click Bindings. This provides a dialog box listing the
protocols for the selected Web site.

5.

In the Site Bindings dialog box, click Add.

6.

In the Add Site Bindings dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select
https.

7.

In the SSL certificate drop-down list, select the certificate that you want to
bind.

8.

Click OK to add the site binding and return to the Site Bindings dialog box.

9.

In the Site Bindings dialog box, click Close.

Installing a Shared SSL Certificate in a uStore Cluster

This section describes how to set up a uStore Cluster that contains multiple
Web servers with the same SSL certificate. These settings ensure secure and
encrypted communication between all the Web servers in the uStore Cluster.
To install a shared SSL Certificate in a uStore Cluster, you must:
1.

Request an SSL certificate from the primary Web server, see Creating
Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

2.

Install the SSL certificate on the primary Web server, see Installing an SSL
Certificate.

3.

Bind the SSL certificate on the primary Web server, see Binding the
Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol.

4.

Export the SSL certificate with the private key from the primary Web
server, see Exporting a Certificate with the Private Key.

5.

Import the SSL certificate with the private key to all the other Web servers
in the uStore Cluster, see Importing a Certificate.

6.

Bind the imported SSL certificate to a Web server, see Binding the
Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol.

Exporting a Certificate with the Private Key

To export the key that you installed on the first Web server, follow these
steps. This key is imported to other Web servers in the uStore Cluster.

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 481

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

To export a certificate with the private key:

1.

Open the Certificates snap-in for a user, computer, or service by doing the
following:
a.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click

Run.

b.

Type mmc, and then click OK.

c.

On the File menu click Add/Remove snap-in.

d. Choose Certificates, and then click Add.

2.

e.

Choose Computer account, and then click Next.

f.

Choose Local computer (the computer this console is running on), and
then click Finish.

g.

Click OK.

In the Console tree expand Certificates > Personal and then expand

Certificates.

3.

In the Details pane, right click the certificate that you want to export.

4.

Point to All Tasks, and then click Export.

5.

In the Certificate Export Wizard, click Next and choose Yes to export the
private key. (This option will appear only if the private key is marked as
exportable and you have access to the private key.)

6.

Under Export File Format, check the Include all certificates in the
certification path if possible checkbox and click Next.

7.

In the Password field, type a password to encrypt the private key you are
exporting.

8.

In the Confirm password field, type the same password again, and then
click Next.

9.

In the File name field, type a file name and path for the PKCS#12 file that
will store the exported certificate and private key.

10. Click Next, and then click Finish.

11. A pop-up message appears confirming that the Certificate export process
was successful.
12. Click OK.

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 482

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

Importing a Certificate
After the certificate has been exported, copy the certificate to a location on
another Web server in the uStore Cluster. You must import the certificate to
the computers Personal certificate store.

To import the certificate to the computers Personal certificate store,

follow these steps:
1.

Open the Certificates snap-in for a user, computer, or service by doing the
following:
a.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click

Run.

b.

Type mmc, and then click OK.

c.

On the File menu click Add/Remove snap-in.

d. Choose Certificates, and then click Add.

2.

e.

Choose Computer account, and then click Next.

f.

Choose Local computer (the computer this console is running on), and
then click Finish.

g.

Click OK.

In the Console tree expand Certificates > Personal and then expand

Certificates.

3.

On the Actions menu, point to All Tasks, and then click Import to start the
Certificate Import Wizard.

4.

Type the file name containing the certificate to be imported (You can also
click Browse and navigate to the file).

5.

If it is a PKCS #12 file, type the password used to encrypt the private key
and click Next.

6.

Select Place all certificates in the following store, click Browse and choose
the Personal certificate store to use.

7.

A pop-up message appears confirming that the Certificate Import process

was successful. Click OK.

Binding the Certificate to a Specific Port and Protocol

1.

On the Start menu, click All Programs, click Accessories, and then click
Run.

2.

In the Open box, type inetmgr and then click OK.

Appendix D: Requesting and Installing an SSL Certificate 483

SSL Certificate Creation and Installation

3.

On the left pane, navigate to <Server Name> > Sites and select the Default

Web Site.

4.

In the Actions pane, click Bindings. This provides a dialog box listing the
protocols for the selected Web site.

5.

In the Site Bindings dialog box, click Add.

6.

In the Add Site Bindings dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select
https.

7.

In the SSL certificate drop-down list, select the certificate that you want to
bind.

8.

Click OK to add the site binding and return to the Site Bindings dialog box.

9.

In the Site Bindings dialog box, click Close.

Repeat the Import and the Binding procedures on any other server in the
uStore Cluster.

Appendix

PayPal Account Setup

To create a PayPal account:
1.

Browse to www.paypal.com and click Sign Up.

Figure 377: PayPal Sign Up

2.

In the Create your PayPal Account page, click the Get Started in the
Business section.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 485

Figure 378: PayPal Get Started for Business Customers

3.

In the Select Payment Solution page, select Website Payment Standard and
click Continue.
Figure 379: PayPal: Select Payment Solution

4.

In the Sign Up for a Business Account Getting Started page, click Go.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 486

Figure 380: PayPal: Sign Up for a Business Account Getting Started

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 487

5.

In the Business Account Setup page, fill in the Business Information section
and click Continue.
Figure 381: PayPal: Business Information

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 488

Figure 382: PayPal: Business Owner Contact Information

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 489

6.

Fill in Business Account Signup page and click Continue.

Figure 383: PayPal: Business Account Signup

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 490

7.

You will receive a confirmation email. Click Click here to activate your

account.

Figure 384: PayPal: Activate Your Account

8.

In the Enter Password page, enter your PayPal password and click
Confirm.
Figure 385: PayPal: Enter Password

9.

Log in to your account at www.paypal.com

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 491

10. In the My Account Overview page, click Go on Enter your Bank Account
Information.
Figure 386: PayPal: My Account Overview

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 492

11. In the Link your bank account page, enter your bank account details and
click Continue.
Figure 387: PayPal: Link Your Bank Account

12. In the Confirm your bank account page, click Confirm in 2-3 days. PayPal
will make small deposits into your bank account.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 493

Figure 388: PayPal: Confirm Your Bank Account

Figure 389: PayPal: Confirm your bank account in 2-3 days

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 494

13. Once you saw the deposits in your bank statements, login to your account
at www.paypal.com.
Figure 390: PayPal: My Account Overview

14. Click Go to confirm your bank account. The Confirm you bank-enter
deposit amounts page is displayed.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 495

Figure 391: PayPal: Confirm your bank deposits

15. Enter the PayPal deposit amounts as listed in your bank account
statement and click Submit.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 496

16. Click My Account > Profile > Payment Receiving Preferences.

Figure 392: PayPal: Payment Receiving Preferences

a.

In Block accidental payments, select Yes.

b.

Uncheck Pay with eCheck or German bank transfer for all website
payments except eBay.

c.

In Display Add Instructions to Seller text input field select No.

d. Set the Credit Card Statement Name and Extended Credit Card
Statement Name as appropriate for the store. To set different
statement names for different stores, you have to open different
PayPal accounts.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 497

17. Click My Account > Profile > Instant Payment Notification Preferences.
Then click Edit IPN Settings and set the following:
Figure 393: PayPal: Payment Notifications Settings

a.

Set Notification URL to http://Domain.com/uStore/controls/clearing/

PayPalInstantPaymentNotification.aspx.

b.

In IPN Messages, select Receive IPN messages (Enabled).

18. Click My Account > Profile > Website Payment Preferences:

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 498

Figure 394: PayPal: Website Payment Preferences

a.

In Auto Return, select On.

b.

Set Return URL to: http://<uStoreDomainName>/uStore/clearing/

PayPalBackFromRedirection.aspx

c.

Set Payment Data Transfer to On.

d. Save the configuration and go back again. Copy the Identity Token to
be used in the PayPal account configuration in uStore.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 499

Figure 395: PayPal: Website Payment Preferences: Identity Token

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 500

19. Click My Account > Profile > Custom Payment Pages to customize the look
of the PayPal pages to match your uStore skin. The Custom Payment Page
Styles page displays the list of available page styles.
Figure 396: PayPal: Custom Payment Pages

You can configure the PayPal account in uStore to use any of the Custom
Page Styles defined in this page by simply typing their name in Custom
Page Style textbox in uStore.
In the Custom Payment Page Styles page you can:

click Add to define a new custom page style. The Edit Custom Page
Style page opens where you should fill in the following fields: Page
Style Name, Header Image URL, Header Background Color and
Background Color.

click Edit to modify the existing one.

click Make Primary to make the selected page style a primary one.

click Remove to delete a page style.

click Preview to view the selected page style.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 501

Figure 397: PayPal: Edit Custom Payment Pages

20. In the My Account > Profile > API Access page, click Request API
Credentials.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 502

Figure 398: PayPal: API Access

a.

Select Request API signature and click Agree and Submit

b.

Copy the API Username, API password and API signature to be used
in the PayPal account configuration in uStore.

Appendix E: PayPal Account Setup 503

21. Under My Account > Profile >Manage Currency page add currencies you
want to support in uStore. Select the currency from the drop-down list
and click Add Currency.
Figure 399: PayPal: Manage Currencies

Appendix

Ogone Account Setup

Overview
Ogone is a payment gateway which collects money from your customers and
uses an acquirer (for example, a bank) to verify the payment details.
In order to work with Ogone, you have to open an account with Ogone and
with acquirers that support this type of payment in your country.
To learn more about the payment types and available acquirers, read the
http://www.ogone.com/ncol/Acquiring_partners_PM_ENG.pdf.

Opening an Ogone Test Account

1.

Go to Ogone website: www.ogone.com.

2.

Click International.

3.

From the drop-down list at the top of the page, select your country.
Figure 400: Ogone: Choose Country

4.

In the Merchant Login panel, click Create a free test account.

Figure 401: Ogone: Create free Test account

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 505

Opening an Ogone Test Account

5.

In the Registration as a new merchant (TEST) page, fill in the registration

form with your details.

You may set the Status of VAT Number to On hold.

In the Choose the appropriate product drop-down list, choose Ogone
e-Commerce.
Remember the PSPID (login name).

Figure 402: Ogone: Registration as a new merchant

6.

Click Register.

7.

When getting to the confirmation page, an email will be sent to you by

Ogone with your password. Remember it.

8.

Log in to Ogones administration site at secure.ogone.com/ncol/test/

admin_ogone.asp with your PSPID and password. Upon the first login,
you will be required to change your password.
The home page of Ogone administration site displays which part of the
account must be set up.

9.

Click the Your subscription link.

10. In Your subscription page, select Premier.

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 506

Opening an Ogone Test Account
Figure 403: Ogone: Premier subscription

11. Click Confirm and go to Your options.

12. In the User Manager up to 5 users click Activate.
13. Click Confirm and go to Account administration.
14. In the left pane, click Payment methods. The Your payment methods page
is displayed.
15. In Your payment methods page, select the payment methods you require
for your website. For a list of local payment options select Other country
in the Country dropdown. uStore supports all the credit cards, Direct
Debits AT ELV, Direct Debits DE ELV, giropay and iDEAL. Do not
activate any of the other payment methods.
For any of the credit cards, when clicking Add, you can select I have not
yet signed a contract for distance selling with an acquiring bank*, but I
want to activate this payment method now in test with a test affiliation
number, and click Add this payment method and then Confirm and go to
Your payment methods.

For the other payment methods, you will have to ask Ogone support to
activate it for test purposes.
16. Once you have added all the payment methods, click Confirm and go to
Homepage.
17. In the homepage, click Technical information. The Your technical settings
page is displayed.
18. In the Global transaction parameters tab, set the global transaction
parameters as follows:

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 507

Opening an Ogone Test Account
Figure 404: Ogone: Global Transaction Parameters

19. Click Confirm and go to Global security parameters.

20. In the Global security parameters tab, set the global security parameters as
follows:
Figure 405: Ogone: Global Security Parameters

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 508

Opening an Ogone Test Account

Note: The first option (Compose the string to be hashed by concatenating

the value of ) is visible only if you have an existing Ogone account. Set this
option to Each parameter followed by the pass phrase.

21. Click Confirm and go to Payment page layout.

22. In the Payment page layout, set the options as follows:
Figure 406: Ogone: Payment Page Layout

23. Click Confirm and go to Data and origin verification.

24. In the Data and origin verification page, fill in a SHA-IN Passp hrase and
remember it.
Figure 407: Ogone: Data and Origin Verification

25. Click Confirm and go to Transaction feedback.

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 509

Opening an Ogone Test Account

26. In Transaction feedback page, set the options as follows:

Figure 408: Ogone: Transaction feedback

Note: uStore does not support the BIN and SUBBRAND parameters.

27. Remember the SHA-OUT Pass phrase. Click Confirm and go to Transaction
e-mails.

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 510

Opening an Ogone Test Account

28. In Transaction e-mails configure you email address for email notifications.
Click Confirm and go to test info.
29. In Test info page, set the options as follows:
Figure 409: Ogone: Test Info

Remember the test credit card numbers that may be used for testing
uStore with Ogone.
Click Confirm and go to Homepage.
30. Click Activate your account and then I accept the general conditions.
31. Log out and log back in (to allow the User management to be activated).
32. From the left panel, click Users.
33. In the Users Management page click New User to create a user for the
Ogone API.

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 511

Opening an Ogone Test Account

34. Fill in the form as follows:

Figure 410: Ogone: Users Management

35. Click Create.

36. In the following page you will get the password of the user you created.
Remember this information. You will use it to fill in the API User Name
and API password fields in Ogone Clearing configuration in uStore
(see Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration).
37. On the left panel, click Account. Click Languages and URL.
38. Select all languages that you use in the uStore Storefront.
39. Click Confirm and go to Account administration.
40. On the left panel, click Account. Click Currencies.
41. Select all the currencies which are used in the uStore Storefront.
42. Click Confirm and go to Account administration.

Appendix F: Ogone Account Setup 512

Opening an Ogone Test Account

Your Ogone test account is now set to work with uStore. To configure uStore
to work with the Ogone account, see Ogone Redirect Clearing Configuration.

Appendix

MultiSafepay Account Setup

Overview
MultiSafepay is a payment gateway which offers payment solutions for small
business and large corporations. With MultiSafepay you can offer specific
local payment options for Germany, Netherlands and Belgium and a wide
variety of credit cards for all other countries.
In order to work with MultiSafepay, you have to open a MultiSafepay
account.

Opening a MultiSafepay Test Account

1.

Go to MultiSafepay website: www.multisafepay.com

2.

Click Create Account.

3.

Click Create a test account.

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 514

Opening a MultiSafepay Test Account
Figure 411: MultiSafepay: Create a test account

4.

In the Open a Test account for your webshop section, fill in the registration
form with your details.

Payment Product: select one of the following three options:

Fast Checkout: enables your customers to make payments quickly

and easily in just 3 steps and a single login.
Connect 300: a payment method for shops with 0-500 transactions

per month.

Connect 1000: a payment method for shops with more than 1000
transactions per month.

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 515

Opening a MultiSafepay Merchant Account

Company name: enter the name of your company.

Salutation: select Mr. or Mrs.

First Name + Last Name: enter your First Name and Last Name.

Phone: enter your phone numbers.

Address: enter your postal address.

Choose a password: enter and confirm your password. The password

should be at least 6 characters and contain at least one letter and one
number.

5.

Click Sign Up.

6.

When getting to the confirmation page, an email will be sent to you by

MultiSafepay with your registration details (Account ID, Security Code
and Log on URL). Save this information for future use.

7.

To log in to MultiSafepay, click the Log on URL in your email.

8.

In the login page, enter your Email address, Security Code and Password
and click the Secure login button.

Your MultiSafepay test account is now set up. You can now proceed to create
a site (see Creating a Site).

Opening a MultiSafepay Merchant Account

1.

Go to MultiSafepay website: www.multisafepay and click Create Account.

2.

Click Merchant registration.

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 516

Opening a MultiSafepay Merchant Account
Figure 412: MultiSafepay: Merchant Registration

3.

In the Signup with MultiSafepay section, fill in the registration form with
your details.

Payment Product: select one of the following three options:

Fast Checkout: enables your customers to make payments quickly

and easily in just 3 steps and a single login.
Connect 300: a payment method for shops with 0-500 transactions

per month.

Connect 1000: a payment method for shops with more than 1000
transactions per month.

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 517

Creating a Site

Company name: enter the name of your company.

Salutation: select Mr. or Mrs.

First Name + Last Name: enter your First Name and Last Name.

Country: select your country.

Postal code: enter your postal code.

Housenumber/Suffix: enter your house number.

Street: enter your street name.

City: enter your city.

Phone: enter your phone number.

Email Address: enter your email address.

Choose a password: enter and confirm your password. The password

should be at least 6 characters and contain at least one letter and one
number.

4.

Select I have read and agree to the above terms and conditions.

5.

Choose Yes if you want to receive the Newsletter.

6.

Click Sign Up.

7.

When getting to the confirmation page, an email will be sent to you by

MultiSafepay with your registration details (Account ID, Security Code
and Log on URL). Save this information for future use.

8.

To log in to MultiSafepay, click the Log on URL in your email.

9.

In the login page, enter your Email address, Security Code and Password
and click the Secure login button.

Your MultiSafepay merchant account is now set up. You can now proceed to
create a site (see Creating a Site).

Creating a Site
Once you have created a MultiSafepay account, you can define different sites
associated with this account.
To create a site:
1.

Log in to your MultiSafepay account.

2.

In the Navigation tree, go to Settings and click Sites.

The Sites page is displayed:

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 518

Creating a Site
Figure 413: MultiSafepay: Create Site

3.

In the Category drop-down list, select your site category. The site category
refers to your store type.

4.

Enter the site description in the Description field.

5.

In the Base URL field, enter the URL of your Store. For example, http://
xmpie.com/uStore?storeid=4.

6.

In the Notification URL field, enter the URL used by MultiSafepay to

update the status of your order. For example, http://xmpie.com/uStore/
Clearing/MultiSafePayNotify.aspx?StoreID=4.

7.

To enable anonymous payments, select Enable PrivatePay. MultiSafepay

ensures that the web owner has no access to the customers personal
information. PrivatePay is only possible with non-physical products.

8.

Select Enable Second Chance to automatically send your customer a

payment link by email. This way the customer that left your web shop
without completing the transaction can return to the website and finish
the transaction at another time.

Appendix G: MultiSafepay Account Setup 519

Creating a Site

9.

Click Save.
The website will be added to your Account and two codes will be
generated: the Site ID and the Site Security Code. You need these codes
(together with the Account ID) to set up MultiSafepay in uStore (see
MultiSafepay Configuration).

Appendix

Creating a Preview Campaign

Before users can set up a Composite Product in the Storefront (see Setting Up
Composite Products (Storefront Groups Only), they must have a Preview
Campaign to enable a realistic preview of the document. The Campaign can
include visualization of certain properties that can be displayed (for example,
different binder selections)
The recipients (records) in the Campaign Data Source represent a spread of
two pages, in a left and right form.
Assume the recipient list is in the following format:
Column Name

Description

Left_Page

Path to thumbnail of the page on the left.

This may be empty, if no pages are printed on the left or
if it is a cover.

Right_Page

Path to thumbnail of the page on the right.

This may be empty, if no pages are printed on the right
or if this is the back cover.

Left_Orientation

Represents the orientation of the Left page. Can be

either Portrait or Landscape

Right_Orientation

Represents the orientation of the Right page. Can be

either Portrait or Landscape

Left_[Property Name]
Right_[Property Name]

The selected value of the property relevant for the Left /

Right page.
For example, a user selected gloss lamination for the Left
Page. The column name is Left_Lamination (or
Right_Lamination) and the value is Gloss.
This will appear for each property.
The column name is case sensitive to the property name
as defined in uStore.
It is recommended to use only the properties you
demonstrate in the preview.

Appendix H: Creating a Preview Campaign 521

Column Name

Description

[Property Name]

The selected value of a property of the Composite

document.
Eg. Binding Type

The following procedure describes how to create a preview campaign.

1.

Create a new InDesign Document, in a proportion that will represent the

finished product (spread + binding).

2.

Link the document to the above data source, with at least one sample line.
(For reference, you may use the schema described above to create your
own data source).

3.

Create 3 graphic items on the InDesign Document: left page, right page
(each using the size of a single page) and a binder in the middle. (The size
of the binder image should be defined to hover over the left and the right
page to represent the actual binding).

4.

Attach the left image with the Left_Page ADOR, the right image with the
Right_Page ADOR, and the middle image with the Binding Type ADOR.

5.

Create Content Objects using Rules to enable page orientation changes in

the preview, and more Rules if necessary.

6.

Export the campaign as CPKG and upload it to uProduce.

Appendix

Creating Composite Products

Composite Products give the end-user the option of creating his own
document by combining selected components into a single document. When
placing an order, the end-user selects the component files to be included in
the final print document. Components can be Static Documents, Dynamic
Documents or documents uploaded by the end-user. Users can upload Word
Documents, PowerPoint presentations and PDF files.
This appendix briefly describes how to create a Composite Product and how
Composite Products differ from other products in the store. For more detailed
information, refer to the indicated sections in this user guide.
Figure 414: Page where the end-user builds a Composite Product on the storefront

5
6

1
4
2
3

The screen shot indicates the elements that you need to configure when you
create a Composite Product. Following is a description of each element and
when relevant, a reference to where you can learn more about how to
configure the element:

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 523

1.

Tools icon: Enables the end-user to set components properties and

customization settings. You define the properties and customization
settings when you set up a component, such as a Dynamic, Static or
Upload Product.

2.

Preflight icon: When the end-user clicks the Preflight icon, uStore
performs a print preflight. The preflight feature is automatically added.
You dont need to configure it.

3.

File name and format icon: The file format icon is displayed for uploaded
documents only. The end-user may change the file name.

4.

Add Components list: Enables the end-user to upload his own

documents or select documents from preconfigured Product Groups.

Upload document: Appears in the list only if you enabled it in the back
office application. To learn how to configure the Upload Product, see
Upload Product.
Product group names: You define Component Groups in the
Component Group (hidden) section. In the Composite Component Setup
section, you select the groups to be displayed in the list. To learn how

to add product groups to the list, see Adding Composite

Components.

5.

Total Price: Displays the total price of all the elements used to build the
final composite booklet. The sum is updated online according to the enduser selections. Note that the prices of Upload Products are calculated per
page.

6.

Composite Properties: Displays the composite properties. To learn how to

7.

Preview icon: Provides a realistic display of the composite booklet. To

learn how to create the Preview capability, see Creating a Preview
Campaign.

8.

Show Properties: Enables the end-user to visualize how a selected

define these properties, see Composite Product Properties Setup. You can
also add dependency between properties. To learn how you do this, see
Creating a Dependency Between Product Properties.

property, such as a binding method, affects each component. For

example, if the user selected the binding type comb-binding, an
illustration of the comb-binder is displayed with the thumbnail as shown
above. To learn how you enable this feature, see Creating Property
Option Overlay Images.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 524

Adding Composite Components

Adding Composite Components

Product Groups
Products are defined in groups. The individual components that will be
included in a Composite Product must be defined in a group under
Component Groups. These groups are hidden and are not visible in the online
store. See Managing Product Groups and Group Hierarchy for more details.

Static and Dynamic Documents

You can use existing products or create new products, but there are the
following limitations on Dynamic and Static Documents so that they can
become valid components for a Composite Product.

Dynamic Documents:

Must not use Recipient Lists,

The proof format is limited to PDF format only

Packs cannot be used as a pricing unit of measure.

Static Documents:

The output and proof format is limited to PDF format only

Packs cannot be used as a pricing unit of measure.

Upload Product
An Upload Product is a set of definitions used as a base for uploaded files. If
the Composite Product includes an Upload Product, end-users will be able to
upload their own documents and print using the uStore store owner (print
shop). A Composite Product can only include one set of definitions (one
Upload Product).
When setting up an Upload Product you must:

Select an Output Paper Size from a list of preset options

Enter a value for Max uploaded no. of pages (optional)

Setting up Product Properties

For more information, see Adding Product Properties.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 525

Adding Composite Products

Product Pricing Setup

For Upload Products the prices and calculation of delivery weight are per
page.
For more information, see Setting Up Product Pricing Parameters.

Product Delivery Setup

For more information, see Setting Up Delivery.

Product Prepress Setup

When you set up Composite Components, you can merge all the components
and run them according to the Composite Prepress Setup.
To merge all components, select the Merge all components and use the
Composite Prepress Setup checkbox in the Composite Components page.
If you clear this option, each component runs according to its predefined
workflow. The Composite Prepress Setup is disabled.
For more information, see Setting Up Prepress Workflows.

Adding Composite Products

Product Groups
Composite Products must be defined under StoreFront Groups so that they
will be available in the online store. See Managing Product Groups and
Group Hierarchy for more details.

Composite Product
When setting up a Composite Product you must:

Upload a Thumbnail Image

Select an Account, Campaign, Document of a Preview Template.

The Preview Template is a campaign that will give a realistic preview of
the Composite Product and should include all the available properties of
the components that you want to show as described in Appendix H:
Creating a Preview Campaign.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 526

Setting up Composite Products

Check Use Recipient List if you want the user to create different versions
of this document. The Recipient List template is created online after the
Storefront user selects the Component Products.

Please note that:

For Composite products the proof format is PDF only. This applies to all
Composite Components as well.

Composite Products cannot use Packs as a pricing unit of measure

Composite Manufacturer settings will override Manufacturer settings of

all component products.

The Minimum and Maximum settings of a Composite Product, override

the Minimum and Maximum limitations of all of its components.

Setting up Composite Products

For more detailed information see Setting Up Component Products
(Composite Products Only).

Composite Components Setup

When adding components to a Composite Product:

Select whether to Include Upload product.

If Include Upload product is selected, choose an Upload product from the

list. The definitions in the Upload product will apply to all uploaded
documents in the Composite Product.

Select whether to Allow upload of more than one document.

Click Add Component and check the Component Groups you wish to add
to the Composite Product for the end-user to select from. (If any of the
documents in a Product Group do not fit the Composite Settings
Notification is given.)
Note: At least one Component/Upload Product must be added to the
Composite Product.

Select whether the components will run according to the Composite

Prepress Setup or if each component will run a separate prepress
workflow.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 527

Ordering a Composite Product from the uStore Storefront

Composite Product Properties Setup

Product Properties may affect various aspects of product pricing, delivery
and production. uStore offers a number of Global Properties that either are, or
can be, applied to all products (see Setting Up Document Repositories).
In most cases, the Product Properties are available for selection to the
Storefront user during product order. For more detailed information see
Setting Up Product Properties for Single Products.
For Composite Products you can:

Create a Dependency between product properties. Design and display an

Icon to appear in the Storefront next to the property name.

Design Icons for property options

Design Overlay images that will overlay the document thumbnail in the
storefront for a more reliable product preview.

For more information see Adding Product Properties.

Ordering a Composite Product from the

uStore Storefront
When ordering a Composite Product from the uStore Storefront please note:

The Total Price of a Composite Product is the sum of the prices of all its
components and is updated online while configuring the document.

For Upload products, the pricing is per page, as the number of pages of
Uploaded documents is not known. The Total Price will be a multiple of
the price per page and the total number of pages that are uploaded.

The Manual Shipping Price of a Composite Product overrides the Manual

Shipping price of all of its components.

When using delivery providers (e.g., FedEX, UPS), the total weight of a
Composite Product is the sum of the weight of all of its components.

A Composite Product ignores the split shipping request in properties of

its components.

For more information on ordering a Composite Product see Composite Flow

of uStore Storefront Quick Start Guide.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 528

Adding Product Properties

Adding Product Properties

Product Properties may affect various aspects of product pricing, delivery
and production. uStore offers a number of Global Properties that either are, or
can be, applied to all products (see Setting Up Document Repositories).

Designing a Property Icon

You can design and display an Icon to appear in the Storefront next to the
Composite property name, using any Graphics software.
You must design two images per property, one reflecting the selected status
and one reflecting the unselected status of the property.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 529

Adding Product Properties

To create a Property Icon:

1.

Using any Graphic Software, open a file to create a new image. The image
size should be 20 pixels x 20 pixels

2.

Save the images with the following names:

Unselected status: PropertyName.PNG

Selected status: PropertyName_selected.PNG

in the folder:
\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons
The following is an example of image files for an Icon for the property
Perforation:
Icon

Status

File Name

Unselected

Perforation.png

Selected

Perforation_selected.png

Note: A green
background has been
added to the icon
image so that it will
be visible in this
manual. This is for
illustration purposes
only. When creating
an icon, the
background should
be transparent.

The icon appears in the Storefront next to the Perforation property:

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 530

Adding Product Properties
Figure 415: Selected Perforation Property Icon in Storefront

Creating Property Option Icons for Gallery List/

Gallery Grid View Input Controls
You can design Icons that will be displayed next to the description of
property options that have Gallery List/Grid View input controls (see Gallery
List/Grid View).

To create a Gallery Property Option Icon:

1.

Using any Graphic Software, open a file to create a new image.

2.

The image size for Gallery List View option should be 41 pixels x 35
pixels
The image size for Gallery Grid View option should be 65 pixels x 33
pixels.

Save the image with the name PropertyName_OptionName.png in the

folder:

\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons
Note: Image names must use the exact property name and should be case
sensitive, e.g. Binding Type_Spiral

Figure 416 shows an example of Icons for different options of the Binding
Type property as they would be displayed in the storefront in Gallery Grid
View.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 531

Adding Product Properties
Figure 416: Property Option Icons: Gallery Grid View

Creating Property Option Overlay Images

You can design an Overlay image that will overlay the composite component
document thumbnail in the storefront for a more reliable product preview.
You must define four graphic overlays images:

Long side binding on portrait document

Short side binding on portrait document

Long side binding on landscape document

Short side binding on landscape document

To create a Property Option Overlay Image:

1.

Using any Graphic Software, open files to create the four images. The
image size should be 423 pixels x 527 pixels.
Note: The image size for the document icon is 403 pixels x 507 pixels and
is displayed in the center of the overlay image. Make sure that the overlay
image is transparent to enable the document display.

2.

Save each image with the name

Overlay_PropertyName_OptionName_XXXXX in folder:
\uStore\App\CustomerApp\Images\[SkinName]\PropertyIcons

where XXXXX reflects the binding side and layout of the document (see
naming convention below).
The following are examples of image files for Overlays for the property option

Spiral Color_Black:

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 532

Adding Product Properties

Icon

Status

File Name

Long side binding

on portrait
document

Overlay_Spiral Color_Black_Long_Portrait.PNG

Short side binding

on portrait
document

Overlay_Spiral Color_Black_Short_Portrait.PNG

Long side binding

on landscape
document

Overlay_Spiral
Color_Black_Long_Landscape.PNG

Short side binding

on landscape
document

Overlay_Spiral
Color_Black_Short_Landscape.PNG

These overlay images are displayed over the component thumbnails if the
Show Properties checkbox is checked in the Document Builder page of the
Composite order flow in the storefront (see Step 2: Adding Components to
Your Product).
Note: For the Perforation property, the images for the long side and the
short side would be the same because the property is defined for Left and
Right and not Top Bottom/Long Short.

Figure 417 shows example of overlay images for Spiral Color_Black property
options as displayed over the component thumbnails in the storefront.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 533

Adding Product Properties
Figure 417: Property Option Overlay Images: Spiral_Black

Creating a Dependency Between Product Properties

A property can be a sub-property of any property that has a Gallery List/
Grid View input control. When ordering in the store, the sub-properties are
only displayed once you select the property option on which they are
dependent.
For example, you may want to define a property, Spiral Color, as being
dependent on the Binding Type property. The options for Spiral Color would
only be displayed, if you select the Spiral option from the list of Binding Type
options displayed:
Figure 418: Binding Type: Spiral Option selected

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 534

Adding Product Properties

Adding a Property Display to the Composite Preview

Campaign
The following is an example of how to add the display of the Perforation
property to the Composite Preview campaign (see Appendix H: Creating a
Preview Campaign).

To add a Property Display to the Preview Campaign:

1.

Add a column to the Excel data source, naming it with the Property name
(case sensitive). In this example, the column should be named Perforation.
Note: For Component properties, add two columns, one for the left side and
one for the right side of the printed page (Left Perforation and Right
Perforation). For Composite components, you only need to add one column
(Perforation) as it will affect all composite pages.

2.

Add the Property Option names to the column. In this example, the

Perforation property has two options, Left and Right. Add these options to
selected records in the Excel Table. This will enable you to view the Left
and Right Perforation options in the Campaign Proof.

Figure 419: Columns for Property Name in Excel Data Source

3.

In the InDesign document for the Preview Campaign, create a layer for
each option and create an image representing the option. In this example,
create a layer for Perforation-Left and another layer for Perforation-Right.

Appendix I: Creating Composite Products 535

Adding Product Properties
Figure 420: Property Image in InDesign Document: Perforation Left

4.

Create a visibility content object using the relevant rule. In this example,
the layer Perforation-Left, will only be visible if the selected property
option is Left.

5.

Save the campaign as CPKG and upload to uProduce.

6.

Generate a proof and update the file and its proof for the uStore
Composite Product.
Figure 421: Property Display: uStore Preview Perforation-Left

Appendix

Creating Products with

Personalized URLs
For Dynamic and Email Products, you have an option to include a
personalized URL for each recipient. uStore creates personalized URL
addresses based on the information provided by the uProduce Port which
was selected to be used for the Documents Proof/Process or Send.
This appendix describes how to convert a cross-media Campaign into a
product in uStore. The Campaign must start either with a Print or an Email
product that would lead to a personalized URL.
For more information on creating cross-media Campaigns refer to uProduce
Reference Manual and e-Media User Guide.

Adapting Cross-Media Campaigns for uStore

Products
1.

If needed, define a Dial for Customization in uPlan. Customization

values will be shared across all Recipients within an order.

2.

Make sure you have a personalized website created using XMPie RURL
Wizard. For information on creating personalized websites, see Chapter
2: Creating Personalized Websites using RURL Wizard of the e-Media
User Guide).

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 537

Adapting Cross-Media Campaigns for uStore Products

3.

In uProduce:
For Dynamic Print Products:
a.

Select the corresponding uProduce Document.

b.

Run Proof and Process.

i.

In the Copy from Port option in the Recipients section select the
Port created by the RURL Wizard.

Figure 422: uProduce: Selecting Port as a Recipient Source

ii. In the Tracking section of the Process page, select Activate

Tracking and select any Touchpoint
Figure 423: uProduce: Activating Tracking

You will need the Process and Proof Job IDs when defining a Product in
uStore.
For Email Products:
a.

Create an Email Activity.

i.

In the Copy from Port option in the Recipients section select the
Port created by the RURL Wizard.

ii. In the Tracking section, select Activate Tracking and select any
Touchpoint (in uProduce versions prior to 6.5, the Tracking
section is located in the Send page).
b.

Run Test Sending and Send for the created Email Activity.

You will need the Test Send and Send Job IDs when defining a product in
uStore. For detailed instructions, see the uProduce Reference Manual.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 538

Setting Up uStore Products to Include a Personalized URL

Setting Up uStore Products to Include a

Personalized URL
1.

Define a standard Dynamic or Email Product. The standard Product

Setup procedure is described in detail in Setting Up Products.
Note: Make sure you use the Proof and Process Job IDs/ Test Send and
Send Job IDs from the steps described above. Using a Job without a Port
reference will make the Product settings invalid

2.

In the Document Template/Email Template section of the Product Setup

page, make sure that the Use Recipient List checkbox is checked. Crossmedia products must use a Recipient List.

3.

In the Cross Media Website section of the Product Setup page, set up the
Document to include a personalized URL:
Figure 424: Product Setup Page: Cross Media Website

a.

Select the Document Includes a Personalized URL checkbox to include

a personalized URL in a Document.

b.

In the Use Dial as Part of the URL Address drop-down list, select a Dial
that you wish to include in the personalized URL address. This dropdown list contains Campaign Dials only. The Campaign Dial must be
a Text input or a Dropdown (it cannot be an Image, Rich Text Editor
or a Date). Adding a Dial in addition to the XMPieRecipientKey (the
XMPie auto-created Primary Key) ensures that a unique URL will be
created for each Order.
Once the customer selects a Dial, a Port with the Dial value name is
created in the Campaign. In our example, a Port Summer or
Winter will be created.
For an example of using Dials in personalized URLs, see Example:
Using Dials in Personalized URLs.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 539

Example: Using Dials in Personalized URLs

c.

Select the Enable Proof XMPieRURL Web Content Object checkbox to

enable proof preview of a personalized website in Storefront. The
Proof Web button will be added in the Finalize step of the Order.

When you save a Document with a personalized URL, its type changes:

Dynamic --> Dynamic & Web

Email --> Email & Web

Example: Using Dials in Personalized URLs

Lets assume that an administrator defined a Product called "Season sale direct
mail campaign" based on a cross-media Campaign with the same name. The
Campaign includes two customization Dials Season and Discount
Percentage and the Recipient List schema includes First Name, Last Name
and Address fields.
The Dial Season is selected as the value for Use Dial as Part of the URL Address
field.
An order is placed in uStore to initiate a "Summer Sale" campaign:
1.

The user selects the "Season Sale direct mail campaign" Product in uStore.

2.

The user customizes this product with the following values: Season Summer, Discount - 20%.

3.

The user uploads a Recipient List with 100 recipients, including John
Smith.
A unique URL is created for each recipient: http://www.domain.com/
Summer.John.Smith

A second order is placed in uStore initiating a "Winter Sale" campaign using

the same product.
1.

The user also selects the "Season Sale direct mail campaign" Product in
uStore.

2.

The user customizes this product with the following values: Season Winter, Discount - 30%.

3.

The user uploads a Recipient List with 100 recipients, including Jane
Harris.
Another unique URL is created for recipients of this order: http://
www.domain.com/Winter.Jane.Harris.
John Smith that appears in both Recipient Lists will have another URL
http://www.domain.com/Winter.John.Smith.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 540

Managing Ports in uProduce

If a third order is placed, and uses (again) the Season value Summer, a
numeric suffix will be added to the URL: http://www.domain.com/
Summer1.John.Smith.

Managing Ports in uProduce

Once the customer places an order, the Port with the Dial value name
becomes available for eternity. The administrator must manually remove this
Port once the Campaign instance is over.
If the order has not been placed or saved as a draft for later use, the
automatically created Port will be deleted within a few hours (up to 6 hours).

Generating Marketing Console Reports for

Cross Media Products
You can track and analyze cross-media Campaign events using Marketing
Console Reports.

Pre-requisites
1.

Activate Tracking in uProduce.

To view and analyze cross-media Campaign performance using
Marketing Console it is important to activate Tracking for this Campaign
(see Adapting Cross-Media Campaigns for uStore Products). Once you
configure the Campaign tracking, tracked events are saved to the
Tracking Database (XMPDBTracking) and you can access this
information via Marketing Console.

2.

Note the name of the Touchpoint created once the order for a crossmedia Product is placed.
When an order is placed for a uStore Product with a personalized URL, a
new Touchpoint is created in uProduce. The Touchpoint name is:
uStore_<Order ID>_<Order Item ID> (To modify the Touchpoint name
format, open uStore, go to Presets>System Setup>Global Configurations
and edit the TouchPointNameFormat configuration). This Touchpoint will
be used for Campaign tracking and analytics and it will override the
Touchpoint previously selected for Tracking in uProduce.

3.

Note the name of the Port created for a cross-media Product.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 541

Generating Marketing Console Reports for Cross Media Products

Marketing Console reports should use the Port which is created once the
customization Dial used in the personalized URL is filled in by the
customer in the Storefront. The Port has the name of the Dial value
entered for the selected Product.

Generating Marketing Console Reports

In Marketing Console, you can generate various types of reports, such as:

Print Reports count or list the recipients for whom a print piece was
generated or indicate a percentage of recipients who visited any website
out of those who received any print piece.

Email Reports display Email Touchpoint status, count or list recipients

to whom an email was sent or who opened the email, etc.

Web Reports count unique website visits, count or list the recipients
who landed on a website.

For a complete list of reports, see Marketing Console User Guide.

Example 1: Print Report

Suppose you want to know the percentage of recipients who visited their
personalized URL out of those who received a print piece.
To generate this report, select the Print Response Rate (KPI) report in
Marketing Console and fill in the Population Filter as follows:
1.

In Population A filter, in the Website drop-down list, select the Port that
was created for the cross-media Product (the Port is created once the
customization Dial used in the personalized URL is filled in by the
customer). This filter retrieves recipients who visited the personalized
website.

2.

In Population B filter, in the Touchpoint drop-down list, select the

Touchpoint in which the print event occurred. This filter retrieves all the
recipients for whom a print piece was generated for the selected
Touchpoint. The Touchpoint is created once an order is placed in uStore.

3.

Define the scale range percentages for the KPI report.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 542

Generating Marketing Console Reports for Cross Media Products
Figure 425: Marketing Console: Print Response Rate (KPI) Report

4.

Run the report.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 543

Generating Marketing Console Reports for Cross Media Products
Figure 426: Marketing Console - Print Response KPI Report Result

Example 2: Email Report

Suppose you want to know how many recipients opened the Email but did
not land on a personalized website.
To get this information, you need to generate the Email Opened but Not
Landed Population report.
Select this report and define the Population Filter as follows:
1.

In the Touchpoint drop-down list, select the Touchpoint in which the

Email Opened event occurred. This filter retrieves all the recipients who
opened the email for the selected Touchpoint. The Touchpoint is created
once an order is placed in uStore.

2.

In the Website drop-down list, select the Port that was created for the
cross-media Product (the Port is created once the customization Dial used
in the personalized URL is filled in by the customer). This filter retrieves
the recipients who did not visit the personalized website.

Appendix J: Creating Products with Personalized URLs 544

Generating Marketing Console Reports for Cross Media Products
Figure 427: Marketing Console: Email Opened but Not Landed Population Report

3.

Run the report.

Figure 428: Marketing Console: Email Opened but Not Landed Population Report
Result

Appendix

Creating a Facebook App

The Facebook App option saves users the process of registration. For
example, instead of the user having to register to a store, the user can use the
Login with Facebook option, and then all of the users registration details are
retrieved from Facebook. This eliminates the sometimes lengthy process of
registration, which can cause the user to leave the page.
To be able to implement Facebook Login on your store, you first need to
create an application in Facebook. When you set up the Facebook login on
uStore, you will need the application ID provided by Facebook.

Prerequisites

Before you create a Facebook app, make sure that you have an account on
Facebook.

If you havent registered as a facebook developer, you will be requested

to do so once you start creating the app.

To create a new app on Facebook:

1.
2.

Log on to Facebook and go to https://developers.facebook.com.

On the toolbar at the top of the page, click Apps and then Create a New

App.

Appendix K: Creating a Facebook App 546

Figure 429: Create A New App window on the Facebook developers' site

3.
4.

Enter a display name for the app, from the Category list choose a Apps for

Pages, and then click Create App.

In the Security Check window, enter the displayed text and click Submit.
The Dashboard opens. Notice that the App ID appears here. Make a copy
of this number for later use.
Figure 430: Dashboard page

5.

On the left panel, click Settings and then do the following:

In the App Domain box enter your stores server domain. Make sure
you enter it without www.
In the Contact Email box enter your contact email. This email will be
used for important communication about your app.

Appendix K: Creating a Facebook App 547

Figure 431: Settings page

6.

Click +Add Platform, and in the Select Platform window choose Website.
The Website area in the Settings page appears.
Figure 432: Website area in Settings page

7.

In the Site URL box, enter your sites (stores) URL. Make sure that you
add http:// to the URL address.

8.

Click Save Changes.

9.

On the left panel, click Status & Review, and when prompted change to

ON.

You now have an app on Facebook. To implement Facebook Login on your

store, continue to the Enabling Registration section (Figure 152).

Index

Index
A
Account
managing 37
Address
updating 40
Administrator 2
ADOR Object 2
Aggregation 431
Asset 2
Asset source 2

B
Billing information
updating 40

C
Clearing
payment methods 51
store clearing 210
Clearing Model
creating 50
Component Groups 323
Composite Product 2, 323, 522
Setting up 526
Coupons 68
Credit Card
security code 59, 61
CSR See SSL
Culture
dialect 121
set in Admin 106
Culture options
override 205
Currency Code
displaying 309
Customer 3, 407

Customization 3, 321
input controls 266
Rich Text Editor 268
spell checker 268
visible to customers 366
wizard 362

D
Data source
defining 80
Delivery
account 82
FedEx 211, 383
manual mailing 211, 383
manual shipping 211, 383
services 217
setting up 383
settings 210
UPS 211, 383
Delivery Package
add new 125
Delivery Providers
setting up 127
Delivery Services
setting up 128, 148, 158, 162
Delivery Setup
packaging 385
weight 385
Dial 3, 6
Document 3
dynamic 321
static 5, 321
Duplicate
store 254
Dynamic document 321
Customization 321
personalization 322

548

Index

E
Email
schedule email sending time 290
Email server
configuring 470
Excel Pricing Engine 301

F
Facebook App 545
Facebook Login 189, 545
FedEx
adding an account 84
defining 83
setting up an account 83
Friendly URL
Proxy Setup utility 114

G
Global
product properties 92
Global Product Properties
logical name 264
Google Analytics 246
Group
hierarchy 323
root-group 324
sub-group 324

H
Home page 200

J
JDF (Job Definition Format) 136

JDF node 274, 275, 276

JDF Node Sets 136
JDF Nodes 136

K
Key word 335

L
LDAP (lightweight directory access
protocol) 190
LDAP Authentication 187
LivePerson Chat 240
Localization 105
store 205
Logging in 8

M
Managing
account 37
Manual Shipping
fixed address 130
Message rule
creating 469
Message template
creating 458
localizing 464
Localization 464
system setup 468
Message template SQL
creating 459
Messages
creating templates 142
setting up mechanism 457
Multi Domain SSL certificate See SSL

549

Index

O
Order
action 428
Common Flow 11
Composite Flow 26
finalizing 22, 34
number 36
pending 427
pending email 427
printing 36
printout 36
queue 428
submitting 26
Order history
viewing 38
Order Information
export as XML 176
Order list view
managing 472
Orders view 427
Overlay Image 531

P
Package
add new 125
Password recovery 174
Payment
automatic clearing 51
data collection 51
invoice 51
methods 51
offline clearing 51
Payment Methods 51
PayPal 51
account setup 484, 504
configuration 56, 58, 60, 62, 63, 65
Personal information
updating 39
Personalization 4, 322
Plan 4
Prepress Workflows 152, 356
prepress workflows 258

Presets
data sources 80
delivery setup 82
Presets view 48
localization 105
Preview
store 253
Price
steps 294, 299
Produc Profile 4
Product 4
adding to store 320
basic setup 331
Customization Wizard 362
delivery 383
edit 391
placing online 391
prices 298, 300
Recipient List 369
setup 257, 320
Product Inventory 387
Product Inventory Management 356
Product List
display 201
Product Profiles 257
Product Properties
global 92
Product properties
email
edit 290
Product Property
Dependency 533
Proof
enable 349
Proof set 4
Proof Type
select default for product 349
Property Icon 528
Property Option
Icon 530
Overlay Image 531
Proxy Setup utility
using 114

550

Index

Q
Queue 428

R
Recipient 5
Recipient list
alternative template 372
database 22, 378
Manager 43
managing 18
Recipient List Manager 377
selecting from data source 22, 375
uploading 372
USAData 376
Recipient List Manager 43
using 377
Registration
enable 187
Reordering 38
Reports view 449
Rich Text Editor
customization 268

S
Schedule email sending time
edit 290
Search
key word 335
Search Bar
displaying 199
Security
SSL 228
Security Code
credit card 59, 61
Shipping information
updating 40
Shopping cart
viewing 23
Skin
store skin 197
Spell checker 268

SSL 228
certificate 476
Static document 5, 321
Status
store 182
Store 5
before creating 6
duplicate 254
group 324
setup 183
Store Administrator 408
Store Operator 408
Store Setup
advanced options 224
appearance 197
clearing 210
custom header and footer 203
delivery services 217
delivery settings 210
general information 182
home page 200
product list display 201
skin 197
text insertion 208
Store-Friendly URL 187
Storefront Groups 323
Stores view 182, 230, 255, 324, 393, 426
System setup
country 120
culture 122, 124
delivery package 125
delivery providers 127
delivery services 128, 148, 158, 162
global address 130
mall 140
message template 142
message template SQL 144
order handling action 145
order handling status 147
province 154
tax 170
USAData account 166

551

Index

T
Tables
customizing 116
Text Input
Rich Text Editor 268
Thumbnail 278
Tracking Link
format 130
Triggers
action 175
CRM 176
filter 174
landing queue 176
MIS 176
setup 172

U
Upload Product 5, 524
UPS
adding an account 86
defining 83
setting up an account 85
USADATA 21

User
Customer 407
role 407
Store Administrator 408
Store Operator 408
unregistered 8
uStore Superuser 409
uStore Customer 7
uStore views 45
Orders 427
Presets 48
Reports 449
Stores 182, 230, 235, 238, 240, 255,
324, 393, 426

V
Views 45

X
XML
export order information 176

552